User Guide S800 I-O

Advant® OCS S800 I/O
with Master Software
User’s Guide
3BSE 008 878R301
Use of DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, and NOTE
This publication includes, DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, and NOTE information where appropriate to point out safety
related or other important information.
DANGER Hazards which could result in severe personal injury or death
WARNING Hazards which could result in personal injury
CAUTION Hazards which could result in equipment or property damage
NOTE Alerts user to pertinent facts and conditions
Although DANGER and WARNING hazards are related to personal injury, and CAUTION hazards are associated with
equipment or property damage, it should be understood that operation of damaged equipment could, under certain operational
conditions, result in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore, comply fully with all
DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION notices.
TRADEMARKS
Advant, AdvaCommand, and AdvaBuild are registered trademarks of ABB Asea Brown Boveri Ltd. Switzerland.
Advant Fieldbus and Advant Controller are trademarks of ABB Asea Brown Boveri Ltd. Switzerland.
ABB Master is a registered trademark of ABB Asea Brown Boveri Ltd. Switzerland.
ELCON is a trademark of ELCON Instruments SRL, Italy.
HART is a registered trademark of HART Communication Foundation of Austin, Texas, USA.
NOTICE
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by ABB
Automation Products AB. ABB Automation Products AB assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this
document.
In no event shall ABB Automation Products AB be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages of
any nature or kind arising from the use of this document, nor shall ABB Automation Products AB be liable for incidental or
consequential damages arising from use of any software or hardware described in this document.
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without ABB Automation Products AB’s written permission,
and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party nor be used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance
with the terms of such license.
CE MARKING
The S800 I/O meets the requirements specified in the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and in Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC.
Copyright © 1999 ABB Automation Products AB. All rights reserved.

3BSE001264/E
Template: 3BSE001286/E
3BSE 008 878R301

S800 I/O User’s Guide
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 1 - Introduction
1.1 General Information................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 Equipment Requirements......................................................................................... 1-3
1.3 Manual Organization ............................................................................................... 1-4
1.4 Related Documentation............................................................................................ 1-5
1.5 Release History ........................................................................................................ 1-6
1.6 Terminology............................................................................................................. 1-7
1.7 Product Overview .................................................................................................... 1-8
1.7.1 I/O Station with S800 I/O ......................................................................1-11
1.7.1.1 CI810/CI810A Fieldbus Communication Interface ....... 1-12
1.7.1.2 CI820 Fieldbus Communication Interface ..................... 1-14
1.7.1.3 CI830 Fieldbus Communication Interface ..................... 1-16
1.7.1.4 TB815 Interconnection Unit .......................................... 1-18
1.7.1.5 TB810/TB811 Optical ModuleBus Port ........................ 1-21
1.7.1.6 TB820 ModuleBus Modem ........................................... 1-22
1.7.1.7 Module Termination Units ............................................. 1-24
1.7.1.8 I/O Modules ................................................................... 1-32
1.7.2 Power Supply........................................................................................ 1-36
1.7.3 Examples of Enclosure Configurations ................................................ 1-39
1.7.4 Support for Intrinsic Safety System...................................................... 1-41
1.7.4.1 Support for HART.......................................................... 1-42
Chapter 2 - Installation
2.1 Site Planning Environment ...................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Site Selection and Preparation ................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 Environmental Considerations................................................................ 2-2
2.1.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility and CE marking.................................... 2-3
2.1.4 Layout of I/O Stations............................................................................. 2-3
2.1.4.1 I/O Station with S800 I/O ................................................ 2-3
2.1.5 Grounding ............................................................................................. 2-15
2.1.6 Signal Cable Considerations................................................................. 2-16
2.1.6.1 Recommendations for Signal and Process Cable........... 2-16
2.1.7 Power Requirements ............................................................................. 2-18
3BSE 008 878R301 i

Table of Contents
CONTENTS (continued)
2.1.8 Process Connection ............................................................................... 2-19
2.1.8.1 Analog Input Module AI810 Process Connections ........ 2-20
2.1.8.2 Differential Analog Input Module AI820 Process
Connections .................................................................... 2-24
2.1.8.3 RTD Input Module AI830 Process Connections ............ 2-26
2.1.8.4 TC/mV Input Module AI835 Process Connections ....... 2-28
2.1.8.5 Analog Output Module AO810 Process Connections.... 2-31
2.1.8.6 Bipolar Analog Output Module AO820
Process Connections....................................................... 2-34
2.1.8.7 Digital Input Module DI810 Process Connections......... 2-36
2.1.8.15 Digital Output Module DO810 Process Connections .... 2-56
2.1.8.20 Pulse Counter Module DP820 Process Connection ....... 2-72
2.1.9 Hazardous Applications ........................................................................ 2-76
2.1.10 High Voltage Switch-gear Applications................................................ 2-76
2.1.11 Lightning Strike Protection ................................................................... 2-76
2.1.12 Mounting Dimensions........................................................................... 2-76
2.2 Setup....................................................................................................................... 2-78
2.2.1 Safety Regulations ................................................................................ 2-79
2.2.1.1 Personnel Safety ............................................................. 2-79
2.2.1.2 Equipment Safety ........................................................... 2-79
2.2.2 Grounding ............................................................................................. 2-79
2.2.3 Cable Routing in Enclosures................................................................. 2-81
2.2.4 Power Connection ................................................................................. 2-81
2.2.5 I/O Station with S800 I/O ..................................................................... 2-82
ii 3BSE 008 878R301

Table of Contents
2.2.6 Checklists.............................................................................................. 2-84
2.2.6.1 Grounding Philosophy, Ground Plane System .............. 2-84
2.2.6.2 Process Cabling, Shielding, Grounding, Max. Length .. 2-85
2.2.6.3 Power Supply ................................................................. 2-86
2.2.6.4 Lightning Protection ...................................................... 2-86
2.2.6.5 MTU, I/O Module .......................................................... 2-87
2.2.6.6 Cabinet, Internal Cables ................................................. 2-87
2.2.6.7 Communication, Communication Cables ...................... 2-88
2.2.6.8 Environmental Data ....................................................... 2-88
2.2.6.9 Airborne Contaminants .................................................. 2-89
2.2.6.10 Miscellaneous................................................................. 2-89
2.2.6.11 External Cables .............................................................. 2-89
2.2.7 Final Procedure Before Start-up ........................................................... 2-89
2.3 Shut-down Procedures ........................................................................................... 2-89
2.3.2 I/O Station............................................................................................. 2-90
2.4 Start-up Procedures................................................................................................ 2-91
2.4.2 Controller and I/O................................................................................. 2-91
2.4.2.1 Power Up on S800 I/O ................................................... 2-92
2.5 Product Verification ............................................................................................. 2-100
2.5.1 General................................................................................................ 2-100
2.5.1.1 Check of Process Input/Output Systems ...................... 2-100
2.5.2 Final Check ......................................................................................... 2-103
Chapter 3 - Configuration
3.1 Design Considerations ............................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 I/O Station Layout Hardware Configuration Guidelines........................ 3-1
3.1.2 CI810/CI810A/CI820/CI830 FCI ........................................................... 3-6
3.1.2.1 Address Switches ............................................................. 3-6
3.1.2.2 Advant Fieldbus 100 Connections ................................... 3-9
3.1.2.3 Advant Fieldbus 100 Twisted Pair Connection...............3-11
3.1.2.4 Profibus-DP Connections............................................... 3-14
3.1.2.5 Optical ModuleBus Connections ................................... 3-15
3.1.2.6 Power Supply Connections ............................................ 3-15
3.1.3 TB820 ModuleBus Modem .................................................................. 3-17
3.1.3.1 Cluster Address Switch .................................................. 3-18
3.1.3.2 Optical ModuleBus Connections ................................... 3-18
3.1.3.3 Power Supply Connections ............................................ 3-21
3BSE 008 878R301 iii

Table of Contents
3.1.4 SD811 and SD812 Power Supply Configurations ................................ 3-22
3.1.5 Module Termination Units (MTU)........................................................ 3-25
3.1.6 I/O Modules .......................................................................................... 3-26
3.1.7 Power Supply Load Calculation............................................................ 3-26
3.1.8 Heat Dissipation .................................................................................... 3-27
3.1.8.1 Cabinet Ventilation ......................................................... 3-27
3.1.8.2 Heat Dissipation Permitted in Cabinets.......................... 3-27
3.1.8.3 Calculation of Heat Generated in a Cabinet ................... 3-27
3.1.9 Maintenance and Repair........................................................................ 3-27
3.1.10 Expansion Considerations ..................................................................... 3-28
3.2 Capacity and Performance ..................................................................................... 3-28
3.2.1 Advant Fieldbus 100 Loading ............................................................... 3-28
3.2.1.1 Bus Load Calculation on 8,500 Meters .......................... 3-30
3.2.1.2 Bus Load Calculation on 15,000 Meters ........................ 3-31
3.2.2 Limitations caused by Profibus-DP ...................................................... 3-32
3.2.3 Data Scanning ....................................................................................... 3-33
3.2.4 Power Supply Requirements ................................................................. 3-35
3.2.5 Power and Cooling ................................................................................ 3-35
3.3 Application Start-up ............................................................................................... 3-36
Chapter 4 - Runtime Operation

4.1 Product Operation .................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 FCI Functionality on Advant Fieldbus 100............................................. 4-1
4.1.1.1 Module Configuration and Supervision ........................... 4-1
4.1.1.2 Signal Conditioning.......................................................... 4-1
4.1.1.3 Dynamic Data Transfer .................................................... 4-2
4.1.2 FCI Functionality on Profibus-DP .......................................................... 4-3
4.1.2.1 Module Configuration and Supervision ........................... 4-3
4.1.2.2 Signal Conditioning.......................................................... 4-3
4.1.2.3 Dynamic Data Transfer .................................................... 4-4
4.1.3 I/O Module Functionality on Advant Fieldbus 100 ................................ 4-5
4.1.3.1 Module Identity for Advant Fieldbus 100 ........................ 4-5
4.1.3.2 Module States for Advant Fieldbus 100........................... 4-6
4.1.3.3 Configuration and Parameters for Advant Fieldbus 100.. 4-8
4.1.3.4 OSP-Watchdog for Advant Fieldbus 100 ......................... 4-8
4.1.3.5 Module Status for Advant Fieldbus 100........................... 4-9
iv 3BSE 008 878R301

Table of Contents
4.1.4 I/O Module Functionality on Profibus-DP ............................................. 4-9
4.1.4.1 Module Identity for Profibus-DP ..................................... 4-9
4.1.4.2 Module States for Profibus-DP ...................................... 4-10
4.1.4.3 Configuration, Parameters for Profibus-DP................... 4-12
4.1.4.4 OSP-Watchdog for Profibus-DP .................................... 4-13
4.1.4.5 Module Status for Profibus-DP...................................... 4-13
4.2 Operating Overview............................................................................................... 4-13
4.3 Runtime Tutorial.................................................................................................... 4-13
4.4 Operating Instructions............................................................................................ 4-13
4.5 Runtime Operations Menu..................................................................................... 4-13
Chapter 5 - Maintenance
5.1 Preventive Maintenance........................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 Safety Regulations .................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.2 Visual Inspection..................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Hardware Indicators................................................................................................. 5-2
5.2.1 Color ....................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.2 Location .................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.3 Identification........................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.4 CI810/CI810A FCI Module LEDs ......................................................... 5-3
5.2.5 CI820 FCI Module LEDs ....................................................................... 5-5
5.2.6 CI830 FCI Module LEDs ....................................................................... 5-7
5.2.7 TB820 ModuleBus Modem LEDs.......................................................... 5-9
5.2.8 I/O Module LEDs ................................................................................. 5-10
5.3 Fault Finding and User Repair............................................................................... 5-12
5.3.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-12
5.3.2 Diagnostics and Fault Indications......................................................... 5-13
5.3.3 List of General Fault Finding Procedures and Hints ............................ 5-13
5.3.3.1 Location of Malfunction ................................................ 5-13
5.3.3.2 External Factors ............................................................. 5-14
5.3.3.3 Safety at Start/Stop......................................................... 5-14
5.3.3.4 Check of Power Supply.................................................. 5-14
5.3.4 User Repair ........................................................................................... 5-15
5.3.4.1 I/O Module Replacement ............................................... 5-15
5.3.4.2 Power Supply Module Replacement.............................. 5-18
5.3.4.3 Communication Module Replacement........................... 5-19
5.3.4.4 Application Memory Reset ............................................ 5-23
3BSE 008 878R301 v

Table of Contents
5.3.5 Field Upgrade of CI810/CI810A/CI820/CI830 Basic Software ........... 5-23
5.3.5.1 Load the CI810/CI810A Software Upgrade................... 5-24
5.3.5.2 Load the CI820 Software Upgrade................................. 5-26
5.3.5.3 Load the CI830 Software Upgrade................................. 5-28
Appendix A - General Specification

A.1 AI810 Analog Input Module, 0...20 mA, 0...10V .................................................. A-1
A.2 AI820 Differential Analog Input Module, +/- 20 mA, +/- 10V, +/- 5V ................. A-7
A.3 AI830 RTD Input Module..................................................................................... A-13
A.4 AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module .............................................................. A-19
A.5 AO810 Analog Output Module, 0...20 mA........................................................... A-25
A.6 AO820 Bipolar Analog Output Module, -20 mA...+20 mA, -10V...+10V .......... A-31
A.7 CI810/CI810A Fieldbus Communications Interface (FCI) .................................. A-37
A.8 CI820 Fieldbus Communications Interface (FCI) ................................................ A-43
A.9 CI830 Fieldbus Communications Interface (FCI)................................................. A-49
A.10 DI810 Digital Input Module, 24V ........................................................................ A-55
A.11 DI811 Digital Input Module, 48V......................................................................... A-59
A.12 DI814 Digital Input Module, 24V Current Source .............................................. A-63
A.13 DI820 Digital Input Module, 120V a.c./d.c. ......................................................... A-67
A.14 DI821 Digital Input Module, 230V a.c./d.c. ......................................................... A-71
A.15 DI830 Digital Input Module, 24V d.c. with SOE ................................................. A-75
A.16 DI831 Digital Input Module, 48V d.c. with SOE ................................................. A-81
A.17 DI885 Digital Input Module, 24V/48V d.c. with SOE ......................................... A-87
A.18 DO810 Digital Output Module, 24V, 0.5A, Current Sourcing ............................. A-93
A.19 DO814 Digital Output Module, 24V, 0.5A, Current Sinking ............................... A-97
A.20 DO815 Digital Output Module, 24V, 2A, Current Sourcing .............................. A-103
A.21 DO820 Digital Output Module, Relay NO ......................................................... A-109
A.22 DO821 Digital Output Module, Relay NC ......................................................... A-115
A.23 DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module......................................................... A-121
A.24 SD811/SD812 Power Supply Module, 24V d.c.................................................. A-133
A.25 TB805 ModuleBus Cable Adapter-Out .............................................................. A-137
A.26 TB806 ModuleBus Cable Adapter-In ................................................................ A-139
A.27 TB807 ModuleBus Terminator ........................................................................... A-141
A.28 TB810 ModuleBus Optical Port ......................................................................... A-143
A.29 TB811 ModuleBus Optical Port ......................................................................... A-145
A.30 TB815 Interconnection Unit .............................................................................. A-147
A.31 TB820 ModuleBus Modem ................................................................................ A-149
A.32 TU810 Compact MTU ........................................................................................ A-155
A.33 TU811 Compact MTU ........................................................................................ A-159
vi 3BSE 008 878R301

Table of Contents
A.34 TU812 Compact MTU.........................................................................................A-163
A.35 TU814 Compact MTU.........................................................................................A-167
A.36 TU830 Extended MTU .......................................................................................A-171
A.37 TU831 Extended MTU ........................................................................................A-175
3BSE 008 878R301 vii

Table of Contents
viii 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 1.1 General Information
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 General Information

The S800 I/O is distributed modular I/O which communicates with Advant Controllers over a
Advant Fieldbus 100 (AF 100), Profibus-DP or directly with the Advant Controller 70. The
S800 I/O provides easy installation of the I/O modules and process cabling. It is highly
modularized and flexible so that I/O modules can be combined to suit many applications. The
S800 I/O can be mounted in many configurations to fit your requirements.
Figure 1-1. S800 I/O Field Communication Interface with an I/O-module on

Compact and Extended MTUs
3BSE 008 878R301 1-1

Advant Controller
Dual AF 100
I/O Station with Redundant FCIs I/O Station with S800 I/O
FCI
FCI
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 FCI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112
I/O Cluster (1-7) I/O Cluster (1-7)

TB TB
820 Fiber Optic 820
1 2 3 4 5 6 AF 100 1 2 3 4 5 6
ModuleBus
AC 70 Station with S800 I/O AC 70 Station with S800 I/O

AC AC
70 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 70 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112
Stand-alone AC 70
Tool Tool
Figure 1-2. S800 I/O Overview
1-2 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 1.2 Equipment Requirements
Advant Controller
I/O Station with S800 I/O
FCI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112
I/O Cluster (1-7)

TB
Fiber Optic 820
Profibus-DP 1 2 3 4 5 6
ModuleBus
Other Profibus-DP slave
Figure 1-3. S800 I/O Overview with Fieldbus Profibus-DP
This book provides a physical and functional description of the S800 I/O. It provides
instructions for site planning and installation, start-up and shutdown procedures, and
information regarding capacity and performance. This book is not intended to be the sole source
of instruction for the S800 I/O system. Those people involved in system engineering should
attend the applicable system engineering or maintenance courses offered by ABB Automation
University.
1.2 Equipment Requirements

The S800 I/O is used with the Advant Controllers (AC) as part of their I/O system.
The AC 400 Series controllers need to have an interface to the fieldbus network. The fieldbus
network will connect to a Fieldbus Communications Interface (FCI) with S800 I/O installed.
The S800 I/O modules are also used on the AC 70 as its I/O device. The AC 70 can either be a
stand-alone device or connected to an AC 400 Series controller via the fieldbus network.
3BSE 008 878R301 1-3

1.3 Manual Organization
Chapter
Runtime
Introduction Installation Configuration Maintenance Appendices Index
Operation
General Site Planning Design Product Preventive

Information Environment Considerations Operation Maintenance
Equipment Setup Capacity & Operating Hardware
Requirements Performance Overview Indicators
Shut-down
Manual Procedures Power Supply Runtime Fault Finding
Organization Requirements Tutorial & User Repair
Start-up
Conventions Procedures Power & Operating
Cooling Instructions
Release Product Section
History Verification Application Runtime
Start-up Operation
Terminology Menu
Product
Overview
Figure 1-4. Organization of this Manual
Introduction
Chapter 1 (this chapter) provides introductory and background information.This information
includes:
• Guidelines how you can find information in the manual.
• The relation to other documents related to the operation of the S800 I/O.
• A product and functional overview that give you an idea of what the S800 I/O can do and
how it works.
Installation
Chapter 2 guides in different installation activities:
• Site Planning Environment, guidelines for planning installation of the product.
• Setup gives you information how to set up the equipment. It includes safety regulations,
handling and unpacking instructions, inspection and assembly procedures, cable routing
and connections, setup procedures, etc. Common instructions as well as instructions
directed to specific subsystem are given. Activities prior to power up are described.
1-4 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 1.4 Related Documentation
• Shut-down Procedures. In addition to safety regulations, the basic shut down procedures
are given. You should know how to shut-down the product if initial power up has prob-
lems.
• Start-up procedures. In the set-up section the conditions and the preparation for start are
discussed, and here you can find basic power up procedures, such as, how to apply power
to and initialize the I/O system.
• Product Verification. Initial determination that the I/O is functional.
Configuration
Chapter 3 will give you the information needed to obtain the desired function. The main
information is structured as follow:
• Design considerations and guidelines are given.
• Capacity and performance.
Operation
Chapter 4 discusses the different start modes and operating modes of the I/O.
Maintenance
Chapter 5 focus is on fault finding supported by built in diagnostics and use of system status
displays in operator station and LEDs on I/O hardware units.
Appendix
Appendix A contains different information which does not fit elsewhere in this manual
structure. Examples are:
• Technical data including cabinetry, power and cooling information
Index
It will offer you an easy way of finding information.
1.4 Related Documentation

• The AdvaBuild Basic Functions User’s Guide has instructions for using AdvaBuild to
configure the database.
• The AdvaCommand Basic Functions User’s Guide shows the system status displays for
runtime information.
• The Advant Controller 70 User’s Guide gives information about the operation of that
controller system.
controller system.
3BSE 008 878R301 1-5

controller system.
• AMPL Configuration AC 400 Series Reference Manual contains instructions for
configuration, application programming, fault finding and maintenance
• PC Elements AC 400 Series Reference Manual contains data for the available PC
elements.
• Data Base Elements AC 400 Series Reference Manual contains data for the available Data
Base elements.
• Function Chart Editor User’s Guide contains a description of the function chart editor
operation. The Function Chart Editor is the predecessor of the Function Chart Builder
(FCB).
• Function Chart Builder User’s Guide provides information for programming Advant
Controller 400 Series, MasterPiece 200/1, and Advant Controller 100 Series nodes. The
Function Chart Builder (FCB) is the successor of Function Chart Editor (FCE).
• Source Code Handling User’s Guide provides information on how to design the source
code.
• Interference-free Electronics describes the rule for the installation of equipment to ensure
the correct operation of equipment in environments where disturbance are present.
• ABB Master Environmental Immunity manual contains a philosophy, theory, design and
application of EMC on equipment and systems. This manual is valid of all ABB control
systems and contains a summary of the ABB Master environmental factors.
• Advant Fieldbus 100 User’s Guide describes the equipment and contains information
required to install and commission the system.
• Profibus-DP Advant Controller 400 Series User’s Guide describes the equipment and
contains information required to install and commission the system.
1.5 Release History

This is the forth release for this product. It includes:
• CI810A - Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI) with 512 kbyte to S800 I/O.
• CI830 - Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI) with Profibus-DP for S800 I/O.
• DI830 - 16 channel 24V d.c. digital input module with sequence of event (SOE) handling.
• DI831 - 16 channel 48V d.c. digital input module with sequence of event (SOE) handling.
• DO815 - 8 channels, 24V d.c., 2A digital output module, with short circuit proof outputs.
• DO821 - 8 channels for 230V a.c./d.c. relay (NC) outputs
• DP820 - Two channels, pulse count and frequency measurement.
1-6 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 1.6 Terminology
This is the third release for this product. It includes:

• Redundant CI820 FCI with TB815 ModuleBus Interconnection Unit
• DI811 - 16 channel 48V d.c. digital input module
• DI814 - 16 channel 24V d.c. digital input module (current source)
• DI885 - 8 channel 24/48V d.c. digital input module with sequence of event (SOE)
handling
• DO814 - 16 channel 24V d.c. digital output module (current sink)
• TU812 - Compact MTU, 50V, used for connection of field via a D-Sub contact (25 poles)
• TU814 - Compact MTU, 50V, used for connection of field via crimp-snap-in connectors
• TU837 - Extended MTU, 250V inputs with individually fused channels.
The second release for this product included:
• Optical ModuleBus Interface to I/O Clusters (TB810, TB811 and TB820)
• Up to 24 I/O modules per I/O Station
• AI820 - 4 channel differential analog input module
• AI830 - 8 channel RTD analog input module
• AI835 - 8 channel TC/mV analog input module
• AO820 - 4 channel bipolar analog output module
• DI821 - 8 channel 230V a.c./d.c. digital input module
• TU835 - Extended MTU, 50V, with individually fused channels
• TU836 - Extended MTU, 250V, with individually fused channels
1.6 Terminology
The following terms and definitions are used as part of the S800 I/O:
Table 1-1. S800 I/O Terminology
Term Definition
AC 400 Advant Controller 410 and Advant Controller 450
AF 100 Advant Fieldbus 100 is the communications bus between the I/O
stations and the Advant Controllers. (FCI to CI52x)
AMPL An acronym for ABB Master Programing Language.
FCI The Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI) device contains the
interface to the fieldbus (e.g. AF 100), ModuleBus interface and
power regulators. The FCI module can manage 24 I/O devices (up to
12 directly and to the others in 1 to 7 I/O clusters).
3BSE 008 878R301 1-7

Table 1-1. S800 I/O Terminology (Continued)
Term Definition
I/O cluster An extension of the I/O Station’s ModuleBus connected to the FCI by
fiber optic connections. Up to 12 I/O devices per cluster.
I/O device A complete I/O device consists of one MTU and one I/O module.
I/O module Is the active, electronic and signal conditioning part of an I/O device.
I/O station An I/O station consists of one or two FCI(s), 1-7 I/O clusters and up to
24 I/O devices.
ModuleBus Is an incremental, electrical or optical, bus for interconnection of I/O
devices.
(ModuleBus) Is used when extending the electrical ModuleBus (within the max.
Extension cable 2 meters).
MTU The Module Termination Unit is a passive base unit containing
process terminals and a part of the ModuleBus.
OSP Outputs Set as Predetermined. A user configurable action on an
output module when communications is lost to the FCI or Controller
Profibus-DP Profibus-DP is one of the communication buses between the I/O
stations and the Advant Controllers. (FCI to CI541.)
SOE Sequence of events. Time stamping of status changes for digital
inputs.
1.7 Product Overview

The S800 I/O provides easy installation of the I/O modules and process cabling. It is highly
modularized and flexible so that the I/O modules can be combined to suit many applications.
The S800 I/O modules and a Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI) are combined to form an
I/O Station. The I/O Station with S800 I/O connects to the AC 400 Series controller via the
Advant Fieldbus 100. The S800 I/O is also used by the AC 70 as its I/O device. Please refer to
the Advant Controller 70 User’s Guide for more information on the AC 70. The equipment that
is used as part of the I/O Station with S800 I/O is presented in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2. I/O Station with S800 I/O Components
Device Type
Function
Designator
AI810 8 AI channels (1*8), 0...20mA, 0...10V
AI820 4 AI channels (differential), -20...+20mA, -10...+10V, -5...+5V
AI830 8 AI channel for Resistance Measurements (e.g. Pt 100 sensors)
AI835 7+1 AI channels for Thermocouples or mV Inputs
1-8 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 1.7 Product Overview
Table 1-2. I/O Station with S800 I/O Components (Continued)
Device Type
Function
Designator
AO810 8 AO channels (1*8), 0...20mA
AO820 4 AO channels (bipolar), -20...+20mA, -10...+10V
CI810/CI810A Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI) to S800 I/O.
CI820 Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI) for redundant
communications to S800 I/O Stations
CI830 Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI) with Profibus-DP to
S800 I/O
DI810 16 DI channels (2x8), 24V d.c.
DI811 16 DI channels (2x8), 48V d.c.
DI814 16 DI channels (2x8), 24V d.c. current source
DI820 8 DI channels (8x1), 120V a.c./d.c.
DI821 8 DI channels, (8x1) 230V a.c./d.c.
DI830 16 DI channels (2x8) 24V d.c. with sequence of event (SOE)
handling.
DI831 16 DI channels (2x8) 48V d.c. with sequence of event (SOE)
handling.
DI885 8 DI channels, (1x8) 24/48V d.c. with sequence of event (SOE)
handling.
DO810 16 DO channels (2x8), 24Vd.c.,0.5A, current sourcing
DO814 16 DO channels (2x8), 24Vd.c.,0.5A current sinking
DO815 8 DO channels (2x4), 24V d.c., 2A, current sourcing
DO820 8 DO channels (1x8), Relay, 250V 3A a.c. (45W d.c.) (NO)
DO821 8 DO channels (1x8), Relay, 250V 3A a.c. (45W d.c.) (NC)
DP820 2 channels, pulse count and frequency measurement
TB805 Cable adaptor out module (electrical ModuleBus)
TB806 Cable adaptor in module (electrical ModuleBus)
TB807 Terminator module for electrical ModuleBus
TB810 ModuleBus Optical Port Module 10 Mbit driver, fiber optic
connection on the CI810 for S800 I/O (TB820) and drive
equipment.
3BSE 008 878R301 1-9

Table 1-2. I/O Station with S800 I/O Components (Continued)
Device Type
Function
Designator
TB811 ModuleBus Optical Port Module 5 Mbit driver, fiber optic
connection on the CI810 or TB815 for drive equipment
TB815 ModuleBus Interconnection Unit to redundant FCIs (CI820)
TB820 ModuleBus Modem, fiber optic ModuleBus interface of an I/O
cluster. 10 Mbit driver.
TC501V150 Cable terminator for AF 100 twisted pairs, 150 ohms
TC505 Connector: AF 100 Trunk Tap to FCI
TK801V003 Cable, ModuleBus Extension, 300 mm (11.8 inches)
TK801V006 Cable, ModuleBus Extension, 600 mm (23.6 inches)
TK801V012 Cable, ModuleBus Extension, 1.2 meters (47.25 inches)
TK811V015 Cable, Optical ModuleBus Extension, 1.5 meters (59 inches)
TK811V050 Cable, Optical ModuleBus Extension, 5 meters (16 feet)
TK811V150 Cable, Optical ModuleBus Extension, 15 meters (50 feet)
TU810 Compact MTU, 3*8 + 2*3 terminals, 50V
TU811 Compact MTU, 2*8 terminals, 250V
TU812 Compact MTU, 25 pin D-sub Connector for field connection, 50V
TU814 Compact MTU, Crimp Snap-in Connector for field connection,
50V
TU830 Extended MTU, 3*16 + 2*4 terminals, 50V
TU831 Extended MTU, 8*2 terminals, 250V
TU835 Extended MTU, 4*2 groups + 2*4 power terminals, 50V,
individually fused per channel
TU836 Extended MTU, 2*4 groups + 2*6 power terminals, 250V,
individually fused per channel
TU837 Extended MTU, 2*4 groups + 2*6 power return terminals, 250V
SD811 Power supply, 120/230V a.c. to 24V d.c. @ 2.5A
SD812 Power supply, 120/230V a.c. to 24V d.c. @ 5.0A
RE810 Wall Cabinet, IP65, 800 x 1000 x 300 mm (31.5 x 39.4 x 11.8)
1-10 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 1.7.1 I/O Station with S800 I/O
1.7.1 I/O Station with S800 I/O

The S800 I/O is a modular I/O system. The modular system allows for easy configuration of the
I/O type and size.
An S800 I/O Station can consist of a base cluster and up to 7 additional I/O clusters. The base
cluster, consists of a Fieldbus Communication Interface module (FCI) and up to 12 I/O
modules. I/O clusters 1 to 7 consist of a ModuleBus Modem and up to 12 I/O modules. I/O
clusters 1 to 7 are connected to the FCI though a fiber optic expansion of the ModuleBus. An
S800 I/O Station can have up to 24 I/O modules. This means that an I/O Station can have a
maximum of 384 digital channels or a maximum of 192 analog channels.
An S800 I/O Station base cluster can also consist of redundant FCIs to provide greater
availability of communications between the Advant Controller and the ModuleBus.
Each I/O cluster can be divided in groups using ModuleBus extension cables between the
groups. The maximum length of the electrical ModuleBus of an I/O cluster is 2.5 meters (8.2 ft.)
including extension cables. The factory made extension cables which plug into the cable
adaptors are available in lengths of 0.3, 0.6 and 1.2 m (1, 2 and 4 ft.). The maximum length of
the optical ModuleBus expansion is dependent on the number of ModuleBus Modems. The
maximum length between any two clusters is 15m (50ft.) with plastic fiber and 200m (667ft)
with HCS glass fiber. Factory made optical duplex cables (plastic fiber) are available in lengths
of 1.5, 5 and 15 m (5, 16.7 or 50 ft.).
ModuleBus
Each I/O module is installed on a Module Termination Unit (MTU). The first MTU with its I/O
module connects to the FCI or a cluster’s ModuleBus Modem and then each of the remaining
MTUs connect to the previous MTU. With redundant FCIs, the ModuleBus connects to the
ModuleBus Interconnection Unit.
An FCI communicates with its I/O modules over the ModuleBus. The ModuleBus can be
divided into 8 clusters, one base cluster and up to 7 I/O cluster. The base cluster consists of the
FCI and I/O modules. Additional I/O clusters (1 to 7) consist of a ModuleBus Modem and I/O
modules. The ModuleBus Modems are connected via optical cables to an optional ModuleBus
Optical Port module on the FCI.
Within a cluster the ModuleBus is made up of increments that are integrated into each MTU.
The FCI and ModuleBus Modems have a ModuleBus outlet connector to connect to an MTU.
An MTU has a bus inlet and a bus outlet connector. By adding, on the DIN rail, an MTU to a
FCI or a ModuleBus Modem, the bus is automatically expanded up to a maximum of 12 MTUs.
Unique position codes are automatically assigned to each MTU as the bus is expanded. An
inserted I/O module is assigned the unique position identity of its MTU. Through the
incremental bus design the physical size of an S800 I/O installation is directly proportional to
the number of installed MTUs.
The S800 I/O modules can be inserted and removed from MTUs without disturbing system
operation. The physical lock, which locks an I/O module to its MTU, allows I/O module
removal only when the lock is in its unlock position. The locking mechanism also acts as a logic
lock so that an I/O module is only operational when the lock is in the locked position. If the lock
is in its unlocked position, output channels are de-energized and I/O modules can be
inserted/removed without need to remove system or field power.
3BSE 008 878R301 1-11

The MTUs are totally passive units with all active circuitry allocated to the I/O module. The
ModuleBus requires a terminator to be installed after the last MTU of an I/O cluster.
2.5 meters (8.2 feet) maximum
Figure 1-5. Typical I/O Station Base Cluster with S800 I/O
2.5 meters (8.2 feet) maximum
Figure 1-6. Typical I/O Station Base Cluster with Redundant FCIs to S800 I/O
1.7.1.1 CI810/CI810A Fieldbus Communication Interface

The CI810/CI810A Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI) module is a configurable
communication interface which performs operations such as signal processing, gathering of
various supervision information, OSP handling and configuration of re-inserted I/O modules.
The FCI connects to the AC 400 by way of the Advant Fieldbus 100 (AF 100) twisted pair
segment.
The FCI has two AF 100 interfaces which allows the use of redundant cable media. The
Advant Fieldbus 100 uses a twisted pair cable with a total length of up to 750 meters (2450’).
Up to 32 stations can be configured on one AF 100 segment. The FCI has two rotary switches
that select its address on the fieldbus in the range of 01 - 79.
An I/O Station can consist of the FCI module, ModuleBus Modems and the I/O modules. The
FCI is the bus-master on the S800 I/O ModuleBus and communicates with the S800 I/O
modules. It is a pure “slave station” on the AF 100 which is controlled by a master station, for
example the AC 410.
1-12 3BSE 008 878R301

I/O Station modules are mounted on DIN rails and are connected by the ModuleBus. This
principle allows horizontal and vertical mounting on the wall. Figure 1-7 shows the FCI
Module.
LED Status
Fuse Cover F R Indicators
P
T1 T2
ModuleBus
DIN Rail Interface
Connector
SERVICE
STN. ADDR.
4 56 Address
3 7 x 10
2 8 Switch #1
109 (Address 04
5
4 6 shown)
3 7x1 Address
1)
CI810
2
109
8 Switch #2
Service Port
Label SWX.X/Y
AF100 Tx Rx
software L+ L+ SA 1 2
Connector for the TB810/TB811
version L- L- SB Optical ModuleBus Port
+ + Tx Interface
Power Supply - -
Connections SH SH
SH SH Rx
AF 100 Channel 2
Connector
Redundant Power
Supervision AF 100 Channel 1 1) or CI810A
Connector
Figure 1-7. CI810/CI810A FCI Module
The FCI communicates with the Advant Controller, ModuleBus Modems and the I/O modules.
The FCI handles the I/O-modules operations such as read and write data, read status and
configuration of modules and channels. The FCI has a connector for the TB810/TB811 Optical
ModuleBus Port.
The FCI provides 24V d.c. (from the source) and an isolated 5V d.c. power to the base cluster’s
I/O modules (12 maximum) by way of the ModuleBus connections. One power source (single
or redundant 24V d.c.) can be connected to the power terminals (L+ & L-) of the FCI. A
replaceable fuse for the 24V supply to the I/O modules is located under the fuse cover.
1:1 redundant power sources can be supervised by connecting the power sources POWER OK
status signals to terminals SA and SB.
3BSE 008 878R301 1-13

The size, type and direction of data to be transferred on the AF 100 bus depends on and is
determined by the I/O module type. The FCI can be configured to send or transmit dynamic data
over the AF 100 with cycle times in the interval of 1 to 4096 ms.
84 mm (3.3”) 122 mm (4.8”)
F R
P
162 mm (6.37”) T1 T2
SERVICE
STN. ADDR.
4 5 6
3 7
x 10
2 8
1 0 9
4 5 6
3 7
x1
2 8
1 9
CI810 0
AF 100
L+ L+ SA 1 2
- -
L L SB
+ + Tx
- -
SH SH
Rx
SH SH
Figure 1-8. CI810 FCI Dimensions
1.7.1.2 CI820 Fieldbus Communication Interface

The CI820 Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI) module is a configurable communication
interface which performs operations such as signal processing, gathering of various supervision
information, OSP handling and configuration of re-inserted I/O modules. The FCI connects to
the AC 400 by way of the Advant Fieldbus 100 (AF 100) twisted pair segment.
The CI820 has one AF 100 interface connection; when used in a redundant configuration of two
CI820s and one TB815 Interconnection Unit, each of the CI820s has two AF 100 channels and
uses the modem of the other CI820 which allows use of redundant cable media.
CI820 can not be connected to any I/O modules without a TB815.
Up to 32 stations can be configured on one AF 100 segment. Each FCI has two rotary switches
that select its address on the fieldbus in the range of 01 - 79. Redundant FCIs of a station must
be set to the same address.
The FCI is the bus-master on the S800 I/O ModuleBus and communicates with the S800 I/O
modules. It is a pure “slave station” on the AF 100 which is controlled by a master station, for
example the AC 410.
1-14 3BSE 008 878R301

I/O Station modules are mounted on DIN rails and are connected by the ModuleBus through the
TB815 Interconnection Unit to the CI820 FCI. Figure 1-9 shows the CI820 FCI Module.
Electrical ModuleBus LED Status

Interface Connector to F R Indicators
TB815 Interconnect Module P
T1 T2
PR DU
Electrical ModuleBus
Interface Connector to
DIN Rail TB815 Interconnect Module
STN. ADDR.
4 56 Address
3 7 x 10
2 8 Switch #1
109 (Address 04
4 56 shown)
3 7 x1 Address
CI820
2
109
8 Switch #2
Label SWX.X/Y Locking

software L+ L+ SA AF100
version Screw
L- L- SB
+
-
Power Supply
Connections SH
SH
AF 100 Twisted-pair Channel n

Redundant Power Connector
Supervision
Figure 1-9. CI820 FCI Module
The FCI communicates with the Advant Controller, and the I/O modules. The FCI handles the
I/O module operations such as read and write data, read status and configuration of modules and
channels. The CI820 FCI has an electrical ModuleBus connector that plugs into the TB815
Interconnection Unit. The TB815 provides an electrical ModuleBus connection (via a
TK801Vxx extension cable) to the TB806 Cable Adaptor In Module at the I/O modules, and to
the TB810/TB811 Optical ModuleBus Port. See Figure 1-15 for the layout of the redundant FCI
with the TB815.
3BSE 008 878R301 1-15

The FCI provides 24V d.c. (from the source) and an isolated 5V d.c. power to the base cluster’s
I/O modules (12 maximum) by way of the electrical ModuleBus connections. One power source
(single or redundant 24 V d.c.) can be connected to the power terminals (L+ & L-) of the FCI.
The size, type and direction of data to be transferred on the AF 100 bus depends on and is
over the AF 100 with cycle times in the interval of 1 to 4096 ms.
58 mm (3.3”) 122 mm (4.8”)
F R
P
T1 T2
PR DU
162 mm (6.37”)
STN. ADDR.
4 5 6
3 7
x 10
2 8
1 0 9
4 5 6
3 7
x1
2 8
CI820 1 09
AF100
L+ L+ SA
L- L- SB
+
-
SH
SH
1.7.1.3 CI830 Fieldbus Communication Interface

The CI830 Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI) module is a configurable communication
interface which performs operations such as signal processing, gathering of various supervision
information, OSP handling and configuration of re-inserted I/O modules. The FCI connects to
the AC 400 by way of the Profibus-DP fieldbus.
The FCI has one Profibus-DP interface and uses a Profibus-DP cable with a total length of up to
1200 meters (3937’). Up to 32 stations can be configured on one segment. The FCI has two
rotary switches that select its address on the fieldbus in the range of 01 - 99.
An I/O Station can consist of the FCI module, ModuleBus Modems and the I/O modules. The
FCI is the bus-master on the S800 I/O ModuleBus and communicates with the S800 I/O
modules. It is a pure “slave station” on Profibus-DP which is controlled by a master station, for
example the AC 410.
1-16 3BSE 008 878R301

I/O Station modules are mounted on DIN rails and are connected by the ModuleBus. This
principle allows horizontal and vertical mounting on the wall. Figure 1-11 shows the FCI
Module.
LED Status
F R Indicators
P
RX TX
PROFIBUS ModuleBus
DIN Rail Interface
Connector
SERVICE
STN. ADDR.
4 56 Address
3 7 x 10
2 8 Switch #1
109 (Address 04
4 56
3 7 x1 Address shown)
CI830
2
109
8 Switch #2
Service Port
Label SWX.X/Y
PROFIBUS Tx Rx
software Connector for the TB810/TB811
version L+ Optical ModuleBus Port
L- Tx Interface
Power Supply SA
Connections
SB Rx
Profibus-DP
Connector
The FCI communicates with the Advant Controller, ModuleBus Modems and the I/O modules.
The FCI handles the I/O-modules operations such as read and write data, read status and
configuration of modules and channels. The FCI has a connector for the TB810/TB811 Optical
ModuleBus Port.
The FCI provides 24 V d.c. (from the source) and an isolated 5 V dc power to the base cluster’s
I/O modules (12 maximum) by way of the ModuleBus connections. One power source (single
or redundant 24 V d.c.) can be connected to the power terminals (L+ & L-) of the FCI.
3BSE 008 878R301 1-17

The size, type and direction of data to be transferred on the Profibus-DP bus depends on and is
over the Profibus-DP with cycle times in the interval from 1 ms.
84 mm (3.3”) 122 mm (4.8”)
F R
P
RX TX
PROFIBUS
170 mm (6.7”)
SERVICE
STN. ADDR.
4 5 6
3 7
x 10
2 8
1 0 9
4 5 6
3 7
x1
2 8
1 9
CI830 0
PROFIBUS
L+
Tx
L-
SA
SB Rx
1.7.1.4 TB815 Interconnection Unit

The TB815 Interconnection Unit is used with redundant CI820 FCIs to provide an interface to
the ModuleBus (electrical and optical) and service port connections. All signals between the
redundant FCIs such as AF 100 signals and control signals are routed through the TB815 and it
also provides the termination of the electrical ModuleBus.
The TB815 has a connector for the optional TB810/TB811 Optical ModuleBus Port extension.
1-18 3BSE 008 878R301

Figure 1-13 shows the layout of the TB815 Interconnection Unit.
Electrical ModuleBus M Electrical ModuleBus

Connection to FCI #1 O Connection to FCI #2
D
U
L
E
B
U
S
SERVICE SERVICE
Extension Connector
TB815
Service Port FCI #2

Service Port FCI #1
Tx
Rx
Optional
TB810/TB811 Fiber
Optic Module Bus
Extension(s)
Figure 1-13. TB815 Interconnection Unit Layout
3BSE 008 878R301 1-19

58 mm (3.3”) 38 mm (1.5”)
MODULEBUS
SERVICE SERVICE
162 mm (6.37”)
TB815
Tx
Rx
Figure 1-14. TB815 Interconnection Unit Dimensions
1-20 3BSE 008 878R301

Figure 1-15 shows the TB815 configured with two CI820 FCIs for redundant operation.
F R F R
P M P
O
T1 T2 D T1 T2
U
PR DU L PR DU
E
B
U
S
SERVICE SERVICE
STN. ADDR STN. ADDR

4 56 4 56
3 7 x 10 3 7 x 10
2 8 2 8
109 109
4 56 4 56
3 7x1 3 7x1
2 8 2 8
CI820 109 TB815 CI820 109
SWX.X/Y SWX.X/Y
L+ L+ SA AF100 L+ L+ SA AF100
L- L- SB L- L- SB
+ Tx +
- -
SH SH
SH Rx SH
Figure 1-15. Redundant CI820 FCIs and TB815 Interconnection Unit Layout
1.7.1.5 TB810/TB811 Optical ModuleBus Port

The TB810/TB811 Optical ModuleBus Port is used with the CI810 FCI or the TB815
Interconnection Unit to provide an interface for the Optical ModuleBus expansion. The
TB810/TB811 has two connectors for fiber optic connections and a connection to the
communication interface module. Figure 1-16 shows the TB810/TB811 install in the FCI.
Figure 1-13 shows it installed on the TB815.
TB810 used with TB820 and drive equipment (with 10 Mbit driver).
TB811 used with ABB ACS 600 drive equipment (with 5 Mbit equipment).
3BSE 008 878R301 1-21

SERVICE
STN. ADDR.
4 56
3 7 x 10
2 8
109
5 6
3
4
7x1
LED Status
CI810
2 8 Indicators
109
SWX.X/Y
AF100 Tx Rx TB810/TB811
L+ L+ SA 1 2 Optical ModuleBus Port
L- L- SB
+ + Tx
- -
SH SH
SH SH Rx
Figure 1-16. TB810/TB811 Optical ModuleBus Port installed in CI810 FCI
1.7.1.6 TB820 ModuleBus Modem

The TB820 ModuleBus Modem is a fiber optic interface to the ModuleBus. The ModuleBus
Modem has an electrical and an optical interface which are logically the same bus. A maximum
of 12 I/O modules can be connected to the electrical ModuleBus and up to seven clusters can be
connected to the fiber optic ModuleBus. The fiber optic interface is intended for local
distribution of I/O clusters and where more then 12 I/O modules are required in an I/O Station.
1-22 3BSE 008 878R301

The TB820 ModuleBus Modem has a rotary switch that selects its cluster number, 1 to 7, on the
optical ModuleBus. Figure 1-17 shows the layout of the TB820 ModuleBus Modem.
LED Status
F R Indicators
P
ORx1 ORx2
ERx
DIN Rail Interface Connector
CLUSTER
4 56
3 7 Cluster Address
2 Switch
1
(Address 4 shown)
TB820
L+ L+ SA
L- L- SB
X4 X5
Rx Rx
Power Supply Tx Tx
Connections Optical ModuleBus
Interface Connector
Redundant Power
Supervision
Figure 1-17. TB820 ModuleBus Modem
The ModuleBus Modem communicates with the CI810 FCI via a TB810, or theTB815
Interconnection Unit via a TB810, and to the I/O modules. The FCI handles the I/O-modules
operations such as read and write data, read status and configuration of modules and channels.
The TB820 ModuleBus Modem provides 24V d.c. (from the source) and an isolated, short
circuit proof 5 V dc power to the cluster’s I/O modules by way of the electrical ModuleBus
connection. One power source (single or redundant 24V d.c.) can be connected to the power
terminals (L+ & L-).
3BSE 008 878R301 1-23

58 mm (2.3”) 122 mm (4.8”)
F R
P
ORx1 ORx2
ERx
162 mm (6.37”)
CLUSTER
4 5 6
3 7
2
1
TB820
L+ L+ SA
L- L- SB
Figure 1-18. TB820 ModuleBus Modem Dimensions
1.7.1.7 Module Termination Units

The Module Termination Units (MTU) are passive base units used to house the I/O modules.
They contain the process wiring terminals and a section of the ModuleBus.
• TU810 Compact MTU for 50 volt applications
• TU811 Compact MTU for 250 volt applications
• TU812 Compact MTU, 25 pin D-sub Connector for 50 volt applications
• TU814 Compact MTU, Crimp Snap-in Connector for 50 volt applications
• TU830 Extended MTU for 50 volt applications
• TU831 Extended MTU for 250 volt applications
• TU835 Extended MTU, individually fused per channel for 50 volt applications
• TU836 Extended MTU, 2*4 groups individually fused per channel with power feed and
return terminals for 250 volt applications.
• TU837 Extended MTU, 8*1 groups individually fused per channel and 2*6 groups power
return terminals for 250 volt applications
An MTU can house one I/O module and contains bus connectors on each side for extension of
the ModuleBus. The MTU interconnects between the FCI or ModuleBus Modem and the I/O
modules either directly or by way of a ModuleBus adaptor cable. The MTU mounts on a
standard DIN rail and has a mechanical latch that locks it to the rail.
1-24 3BSE 008 878R301

Two mechanical keys are used to set-up each MTU for a particular group or type of I/O module.
The mechanical keys protect the I/O modules from being inserted on the wrong MTU and
thereby being damaged by excessive voltage or current. There are 36 different configurations
that can be set to match an I/O module type. There is also a mechanical locking tab that locks
the I/O module into position on the MTU. This module lock is connected to a switch that keeps
the I/O module in its initialization state until it is locked into position.
The MTUs are available in two versions (Compact and Extended). The Compact MTU version
typically provides for a compact installation of the I/O modules using 1 wire connections. The
Extended MTU version provides for a more complete installation on the MTU, including 3 wire
connection, fuses and field circuit power distribution. See Figure 1-19 and Figure 1-20 for an
illustration of the MTUs together with the I/O modules.
TU810 Compact MTU for 50 Volt Applications

The TU810 is a 16 channel compact module termination unit. It provides field terminations to
the I/O module and connection to the ModuleBus of the communication interface (FCI or
ModuleBus Modem). The TU810 has three rows of terminals for field signals and process
power connections. The TU810 distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next
MTU. The correct ModuleBus address of this MTU is automatically configured when inserted
into the previous MTU.
See Table 3-8 for information about the combination between MTU and I/O modules.
122 mm
7 mm
(4.8”)
(.27”)
F
R
W
50 mm
(1.97”)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
162 mm
119 mm
(6.37”)
(4.68”)
9
E
F
10 D
A
11
C
B
12
13
E
F
D
14 A
C
15
B
16
DI810
24V
31.5 mm (1.24")
7 mm 58.5 mm
(.27”) (2.3”)
Figure 1-19. Typical Compact MTU with I/O Module
3BSE 008 878R301 1-25


The TU811 is an 8 channel compact module termination unit. It provides field terminations to
power connection. The TU811 distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next
TU812 Compact MTU for 50 Volt Applications and 25 pin D-sub for Process
Connections
The TU812 is a compact module termination unit. It provides 16 signal terminations and two
process voltage connections to the I/O module and connection to the ModuleBus of the
communication interface (FCI or ModuleBus Modem). The TU812 has a 25 pin D-Sub
connector for signals and process power connections. The TU812 distributes the ModuleBus to
the I/O module and to the next MTU. The correct ModuleBus address of this MTU is
automatically configured when inserted into the previous MTU.

The TU814 is a 16 channel compact module termination unit. It provides field terminations to
ModuleBus Modem). The TU814 has three rows of crimp snap-in connectors for field signals
and process power connections. The TU814 distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to
the next MTU. The correct ModuleBus address of this MTU is automatically configured when
inserted into the previous MTU.
TU830 Extended MTU for 50 Volt Applications

The TU830 is a 16 channel extended module termination unit. It provides field terminations to
power connection. The TU830 distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next
1-26 3BSE 008 878R301

7 mm (.27”) 122 mm
(4.8”)
A
F F
B B
E E
C C
(1.77”)
45 mm
D
DI810
24V
109 mm
(4.3”)
10
12
13
14
15
16
11
W
R
F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
31.5 mm (1.24")
120.5 mm
7 mm (4.74”)
(.27”)
Figure 1-20. Typical Extended MTU with I/O Module
TU831 Extended MTU for 250 Volt Applications

The TU831 is an 8 channel extended module termination unit. It provides field terminations to
ModuleBus Modem). The TU831 has two rows of terminals for field signals and process power
connection. The TU831 distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next MTU. The
correct ModuleBus address of this MTU is automatically configured when inserted into the
previous MTU.
TU835 Extended MTU, Individually Fused per Channel for 50 Volt Applications
ModuleBus Modem). The TU835 has two rows of terminals for process power connection and a
single row of process signal connections. Each channel has one fused (3A max.) transmitter
power terminal and one signal connection. Process voltage can be connected to 2 individually
isolated groups. The TU835 distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next MTU.
The correct ModuleBus address of this MTU is automatically configured when inserted into the
previous MTU.
3BSE 008 878R301 1-27

connection. Each channel has one fused (3A max.) power outlet terminal and one signal return
connection. Process voltage can be connected to 2 individually isolated groups. The TU836
distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next MTU. The correct ModuleBus
address of this MTU is automatically configured when inserted into the previous MTU.
NOTE
The standard fuse holder that comes with the TU836 can be changed to an
indicating fuse holder. This indicating fuse holder can be ordered from Phoenix:
• 15-30 VDC type, order 3118119

• 110-250 VAC type, order 3118106
Standard Optional fuse holder with

fuse holder fuse status indication for
15-30 VDC or 110-250 VAC
Figure 1-21. Exchange of Standard Fuse Holder for Indication Type
connection. Each channel has one fused (3A max.) power outlet terminal and one process power
connection. Process voltage return can be connected to 2 individually isolated groups. The
TU837 distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next MTU. The correct
ModuleBus address of this MTU is automatically configured when inserted into the previous
MTU.
1-28 3BSE 008 878R301

Mounting
The I/O station can be mounted horizontally and/or vertically or in combinations; for examples
of configurations see Figure 1-22 through Figure 1-26. Different MTUs (Compact or Extended
version) can be used depending on available space and preferred way of installing the field
wiring (external marshalling/power distribution or direct on Extended MTUs using built in 2/3
wire termination and power distribution arrangements). Compact and extended MTUs can be
mixed on the same ModuleBus and mounting rail.
816 mm (32.1")
20
(0.8)
10
(0.4)
84 58.5
(3.3) (2.3)
Figure 1-22. Horizontal Mounting of S800 I/O MTUs (Compact)
1560 mm (61.4")
20
10 84 120.5 (0.8)
(0.4) (3.3) (4.74)
Figure 1-23. Horizontal Mounting of S800 I/O MTUs (Extended)
1188 mm (46.77")
10 84 58.5 120.5 20
(0.4) (3.3) (2.3) (4.74) (0.8)
Figure 1-24. Combination Mounting of S800 I/O MTUs (Compact and Extended)
3BSE 008 878R301 1-29

CI810 FCI
ModuleBus Optical Port TB810
Optical cable (duplex fiber) ModuleBus Modem TB820
Figure 1-25. Optical ModuleBus Expansion
1-30 3BSE 008 878R301

10 10
(0.4) (0.4)
84 84
(3.3) (3.3)
58.5
120.5 (2.3)
(4.74)
816 mm
(32.1)
1560 mm
(61.4")
20
(0.8)
20
(0.8)
Figure 1-26. Vertical Mounting of S800 I/O MTUs, Compact and Extended
3BSE 008 878R301 1-31

1.7.1.8 I/O Modules

The I/O modules have open ventilated plastic enclosures. On the front of each I/O module there
are three LEDs (FAULT, RUN and WARNING) indicating the module status and digital I/O
modules have a status LED for each channel. One additional LED (OSP) is included on analog
output and digital output modules. Refer to Section 5.2, Hardware Indicators for the status
indication of the LEDs.
I/O modules may be replaced in a fully operational I/O station. Mechanical keying on modules
and MTUs protect I/O modules from being inserted in positions where they could be damaged
by excessive voltage or current. An electronic type designation ID in each module keeps the I/O
module from being taken into operation by the FCI, if a module’s ID doesn’t match the
configured module type definition in the data base.
AI810 Analog Input Module

The AI810 Analog Input Module has 8 current and voltage inputs. The inputs are independent
for each channel, in that either voltage or current can be measured.
The current input is able to handle a short circuit to the transmitter supply without damage. The
current input is compatible with HART protocol. Please refer to specifications in Section A.1,
AI810 Analog Input Module, 0...20 mA, 0...10V for more information.
AI820 Differential Analog Input Module

The AI820 Differential Analog Input Module has 4 differential, bipolar current/voltage inputs.
This module is suitable for applications requiring high common mode rejection ratings, and/or
bipolar voltage or current inputs. Nominal input ranges are: -20...+20mA, 0(4)...+20mA,
-10...+10V, 0(2)...+10V, -5...+5V and 0(1)...+5V.
The current input is able to handle a short circuit to the transmitter supply without damage. The
current input is also compatible with HART protocol. Please refer to specifications in Section
A.2, AI820 Differential Analog Input Module, +/- 20 mA, +/- 10V, +/- 5V for more information.
AI830 Analog Input, RTD Module

The AI830 Analog Input, RTD Module has 8 RTD (Pt100, Cu10, Ni100 and Ni120 and resistor)
inputs. The inputs allow 3-wire connection to RTDs. Inputs are monitored for open-circuit,
short-circuit, reference channel and internal supply. Please refer to specifications in Section A.3,
AI830 RTD Input Module for more information.
AI835 Analog Input, Thermocouple/mV Module

The AI835 Analog Input, Thermocouple/mV Module has 8 differential inputs for TC/mV
measurements. One channel (channel 8) can be configured for “Cold Junction” (ambient)
temperature measurement, thus serving as the CJ-channel for the other channels on the module.
All 8 channels can be used if no CJ-temperature measurement is needed. The inputs can be
connected to a variety of thermocouples with the following characteristics: B, C, E, J, K, N, R, S
and T. Please refer to specifications in Section A.4, AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module for
more information.
1-32 3BSE 008 878R301

AO810 Analog Output Module

The AO810 Analog Output Module has 8 current outputs. State of outputs can be set to a
predetermined (OSP) value if a communications error is detected. Please refer to specifications
in Section A.5, AO810 Analog Output Module, 0...20 mA for more information.
AO820 Bipolar Analog Output Module

The AO820 Bipolar Analog Output Module has 4 bipolar current or voltage outputs. The choice
of either current or voltage output is configurable per channel. Outputs are individually
galvanically isolated. State of outputs can be set to a predetermined (OSP) value if a
communications error is detected. Please refer to specifications in Section A.6, AO820 Bipolar
Analog Output Module, -20 mA...+20 mA, -10V...+10V for more information.
DI810 Digital Input Module - 24V d.c.

The DI810 Digital Input Module has 16 channels for 24 volt d.c. digital inputs. The inputs are
divided into two isolated groups of eight channels with a voltage supervision input for each
group. Each input channel provides current limiting, EMC protection, input state LED indicator
and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. Please refer to specifications in Section A.10, DI810
Digital Input Module, 24V for more information.
DI811 Digital Input Module - 48V d.c.

The DI811 Digital Input Module has 16 channels for 48 volt d.c. digital inputs. The inputs are
divided into two isolated groups of eight channels with a voltage supervision input for each
group. Each input channel provides current limiting, EMC protection, input state LED indicator
and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. Please refer to specifications in Section A.11, DI811
Digital Input Module, 48V for more information.
DI814 Digital Input Module - 24V d.c. Current Source
The DI814 Digital Input Module has 16 channels for 24 volt d.c. current source digital inputs.
The inputs are divided into two isolated groups of eight channels with a voltage supervision
input for each group. Each input channel provides current limiting, EMC protection, input state
LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. Please refer to specifications in
Section A.12, DI814 Digital Input Module, 24V Current Source for more information.
DI820 Digital Input Module - 120V a.c./d.c.
The DI820 Digital Input Module has 8 channels for 120 volt a.c./d.c. digital inputs. The inputs
are individually isolated. Channel 1 can be used as voltage supervisor for channels 2 - 4, and
channel 8 can be used for channels 5 - 7. If voltage supervision is disabled, channels 1 and 8 can
be used as normal inputs. Each input channel provides current limiting, EMC protection, input
state LED indicator, noise filter and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. Please refer to
specifications in Section A.13, DI820 Digital Input Module, 120V a.c./d.c. for more
information.
3BSE 008 878R301 1-33

DI821 Digital Input Module - 230V a.c./d.c.

The DI821 Digital Input Module has 8 channels for 230 volt a.c./d.c. digital inputs. The inputs
are individually isolated. Channel 1 can be used as voltage supervisor for channels 2 - 4, and
channel 8 can be used for channels 5 - 7. If voltage supervision is disabled, channels 1 and 8 can
be used as normal inputs. Each input channel provides current limiting, EMC protection, input
state LED indicator, noise filter and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. Please refer to
specifications in Section A.14, DI821 Digital Input Module, 230V a.c./d.c. for more
information.
DI830 Digital Input Module - 24V d.c. with SOE
The DI830 Digital Input Module has 16 channels for 24 volt d.c. digital inputs and sequence of
events (SOE) handling capabilities. The sequence of events time stamp has a resolution of
0.4 ms for each input channel. The inputs are divided into two isolated groups of eight channels
with a voltage supervision input for each group. Each input channel provides current limiting,
EMC protection, input state LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. Please
refer to specifications in Section A.15, DI830 Digital Input Module, 24V d.c. with SOE for
more information.
DI831 Digital Input Module - 48V d.c. with SOE
The DI831 Digital Input Module has 16 channels for 48 volt d.c. digital inputs and sequence of
events (SOE) handling capabilities. The sequence of events time stamp has a resolution of
0.4 ms for each input channel. The inputs are divided into two isolated groups of eight channels
with a voltage supervision input for each group. Each input channel provides current limiting,
EMC protection, input state LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. Please
refer to specifications in Section A.16, DI831 Digital Input Module, 48V d.c. with SOE for
more information.
DI885 Digital Input Module - 24V/48V d.c. with SOE

The DI855 Digital Input Module has 8 channels for 48 volt d.c. digital inputs with or without
open-circuit monitoring (wire break supervision), or 24 volt d.c. electronic inputs without open-
circuit monitoring; and sequence of events (SOE) handling capabilities. The sequence of events
time stamp has a resolution of 1 ms for each input channel. The inputs are arranged in one group
of 8 channels. Each input channel provides current limiting, EMC protection, input state LED
indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus. The DI885 also has the capability to
monitor an internal or external sensor power supply (60V d.c. max.). Please refer to
specifications in Section A.17, DI885 Digital Input Module, 24V/48V d.c. with SOE for more
information.
DO810 Digital Output Module - 24V d.c., Current Sourcing

The DO810 Digital Output Module has 16 channels for 24 volt d.c., 0.5A, digital outputs. The
outputs are divided into two isolated groups of eight channels with a voltage supervision input
for each group. Each output channel provides protection against short circuits to ground, over-
voltage, over-temperature, EMC protection, output state LED indicator and optical isolation
from the ModuleBus. State of outputs can be set to a predetermined (OSP) value if a
communications lost error is detected. Please refer to specifications in Section A.18, DO810
Digital Output Module, 24V, 0.5A, Current Sourcing for more information.
1-34 3BSE 008 878R301

DO814 Digital Output Module - 24V d.c. Current Sinking

The DO814 Digital Output Module has 16 channels for 24 volt d.c., 0.5A, current sinking
digital outputs. The outputs are divided into two isolated groups of eight channels with a voltage
supervision input for each group. Each output channel provides protection against short circuits
to ground, over-voltage, over-temperature, EMC protection, output state LED indicator and
optical isolation from the ModuleBus. State of outputs can be set to a predetermined (OSP)
value if a communications lost error is detected. Please refer to specifications in Section A.19,
DO814 Digital Output Module, 24V, 0.5A, Current Sinking for more information.
DO815 - Digital Output Module - 24V d.c., 2A, Current Sourcing

The DO815 Digital Output Module has 8 channels, 24 volt d.c., 2A, digital outputs. The outputs
are divided into two isolated groups of four channels with a voltage supervision input for each
group. Each output channel provides protection against short circuits to ground, over-voltage,
over-temperature, EMC protection, output state LED indicator and optical isolation from the
ModuleBus. State of outputs can be set to a predetermined (OSP) value if a communications lost
error is detected. Please refer to specifications in Section A.20, DO815 Digital Output Module,
24V, 2A, Current Sourcing for more information.
DO820 Digital Output Module - 230V a.c./d.c. Relay NO

The DO820 Digital Output Module has 8 channels for 230 volt a.c./d.c. relay outputs. The
outputs are individually isolated. Each output channel provides a relay contact (NO - Normal
Open), EMC protection, output state LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus.
State of outputs can be set to a predetermined (OSP) value if a communications lost error is
detected. Please refer to specifications in Section A.21, DO820 Digital Output Module, Relay
NO for more information.
DO821 Digital Output Module - 230V a.c./d.c. Relay NC

The DO821 Digital Output Module has 8 channels for 230 volt a.c./d.c. relay outputs. The
outputs are individually isolated. Each output channel provides a relay contact (NC - Normal
Closed), EMC protection, output state LED indicator and optical isolation from the ModuleBus.
State of outputs can be set to a predetermined (OSP) value if a communications lost error is
detected. Please refer to specifications in Section A.22, DO821 Digital Output Module, Relay
NC for more information.
DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module

DP820 is an two-channel pulse counting module for incremental pulse transmitters. Each
channel contains counters and registers for position/length and speed/frequency measurement.
Each channel provides three balanced inputs for connection of a pulse transmitter, one digital
input and one digital output.
Pulse transmitters with RS422, +5V, +12V, +24V and 13 mA interfaces can be connected to
DP820. Please refer to specifications Section A.23, DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module
for more information.
3BSE 008 878R301 1-35

1.7.2 Power Supply

The SD811 and SD812 are switch-mode power supply units which convert the mains voltage to
24 volts d.c. These power supplies can be utilized for non-redundant and redundant applications
and do not require additional load-sharing control equipment or diode voting units.
50 mm (2”) 130 mm (5.1”)
SD811
L1
L2 (N)
PE
102 mm (4”)
a.c. 110-240V
104VA
DCOK
DC Adj.
+24V
2.5A
0V
DCOK
138 mm (5.4”)
125 mm (5”)
SD812
L1
L2 (N)
PE
134 mm (5.25”)
102 mm (4”)
a.c. 110-240V
207VA
DCOK
DC Adj.
+24V
5A
0V
DCOK
Figure 1-27. SD811 and SD812 Power Supplies Dimensions
The S800 I/O station can be powered by a single or redundant supply voltage of 24V d.c., see
Figure 1-28, Figure 1-29 and Figure 1-30. Two power supplies with 120/230V inputs and
24V d.c. outputs are available to supply the I/O station and its field circuits. The SD811 Power
Supply provides 2.5A at 24V d.c. and the SD812 Power Supply provides 5A at 24V d.c. See
Section 3.1.2.6, Power Supply Connections for details.
1-36 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 1.7.2 Power Supply
Power
Supply 24V
A
B
FCI I/O station
24V power supply
or ModuleBus Modem
I/O modules
Figure 1-28. Installation Using Single Power Supply Unit
The FCI and ModuleBus Modem are able to supervise the redundant voltage supply. The
supervision function is individually configurable for power supervision of each I/O station.
FCI
or ModuleBus Modem
Power
Supply 24V
A
A
B
Power I/O station
Supply
B 24V d.c. power supply
Supervision 24V A, 24V B
I/O modules
Figure 1-29. Installation Using Redundant Power Supply Units
3BSE 008 878R301 1-37

CI820 TB815 CI820
SA
SB
SA
SB
L+
L+
L-
L-
Circuit
Breaker Fuse
SD811/812
or MCB
+24V
0V
PowOK Optional
Power to
field circuits
via MTUs
SD811/812
+24V
0V
PowOK
CI820
Diode
Voting
Unit
SA
SB
L+
L-
SD811/812
+24V
0V
PowOK
SD811/812
+24V
0V
PowOK
Figure 1-30. Connection Diagram for Redundant Power Supplies to Redundant FCIs
NOTE
Circuit breakers or a diode voting unit at the power supplies output are required if
hot replacement of supplies is required.
1-38 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 1.7.3 Examples of Enclosure Configurations
1.7.3 Examples of Enclosure Configurations

Enclosure layout examples are shown for two different stations. The examples of enclosures
layouts are in a RE810 Cabinets (Figure 1-31) which could house the I/O Station with power
supplies for system as well as for the field powering, and space for marshalling terminals.
800 mm (31.5")
FCI
1000 mm (39.4")
POW POW
Figure 1-31. RE810 Cabinet with 12 I/O Modules and Redundant Station Power Supplies
3BSE 008 878R301 1-39

800 mm (31.5")
Min Min Min

8 mm (0,03”) 100 mm (3.9”) 8 mm (0,03”)
FCI
Min
Min 100 mm (3,9”) Min
50 mm (2”) 50 mm (2”)
Min
8 mm (0,03”)
1000 mm (39.4")
Min
8 mm (0,03”) Min
100 mm (3,9”)
SD SD
811 811
I/O
Min 40 mm (1.6”)
Cable channel
Min 25 mm (1”) if the cable channel is longer than 40 mm (1.6”)
I/O
Figure 1-32. Enclosure with 12 Modules and Redundant Station Power Supplies
1-40 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 1.7.4 Support for Intrinsic Safety System
1.7.4 Support for Intrinsic Safety System

Intrinsic Safety System from ELCON Instruments (manufacturer outside ABB) is supported via
S800 I/O module and a special MTU.
Supported Intrinsic Safety System is the HiD Series 2000.
The S800 I/O modules are connected via MTU TU812, a standard cable and a specific adapter
board, one for each I/O module types.
For further information refer to Elcon Instruments manuals.
The following I/O modules are supported:
• AI810
• AO810
• DI810
• DO810
See Figure 1-33 for an example of a connection between S800 i/O and Intrinsic Safety System.
S800 I/0
Intrinsic Safety System
Figure 1-33. Example of Connection between S800 I/O and Intrinsic Safety System from
ELCON
3BSE 008 878R301 1-41

1.7.4.1 Support for HART

ELCON Instruments provides a HART protocol connection to I/O modules integrated with the
Intrinsic Safety System, see Figure 1-34.
For further information refer to Elcon Instruments manuals.
To PC
S800 I/O
RS485
HART MultiplexerConnection
Intrinsic Safety System
Figure 1-34. Example of Connection between S800 I/O and Intrinsic Safety System from
ELCON and HART Multiplexer Interface from HART
1-42 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 2.1 Site Planning Environment
Chapter 2 Installation
This chapter contains guidelines for planning the installation of the S800 I/O equipment.
This chapter does not give the complete list of measures to be taken with respect to environment
and other conditions on site. The equipment should be adapted to the actual application by
thorough system definition and design.
Since each system is designed to meet a specific requirement, there is no standard configuration
that describes every system. Therefore, certain areas of the following instructions are meant
only as a guide for planning a specific installation. However, some of the information covers
specific requirements for proper system and equipment operation, and is not subject to
modification.
All information given in this chapter relates to standard equipment.
For installation of Advant Fieldbus 100 and Advant Fieldbus 100 modems, see the Advant
Fieldbus 100 User’s Guide.
For installation of Profibus-DP, see Profibus-DP Advant Controller 400 Series User’s Guide.
2.1 Site Planning Environment
2.1.1 Site Selection and Preparation

When planning an S800 I/O installation, please consider the following:
• Surrounding environment and atmosphere.
• The temperature in the room where the equipment is to be located. This should include an
estimation of the resulting temperature rise with respect to the power dissipation from the
planned equipment.
• Proximity of the equipment to the process.
• Size of the cabinets to accommodate all the required equipment.
• Minimum distances from a cabinet to walls and ceiling to obtain satisfactory results from
different aspects.
• Ease of access for moving equipment in and out of area.
• Free space in front of cabinets. Also consider the need of space to fully open a cabinet door
either left hand or right hand hinged.
• Spare area for future expansion of the system.
• Grounding by an effective plane of copper bars.
• Cable routing with respect to installation rules.
• Availability of power and other utilities.
The following sections examine some of these factors in detail and provide recommendations
and requirements as necessary.
3BSE 008 878R301 2-1

2.1.2 Environmental Considerations
General
S800 I/O equipment can be installed in a designated control room, or located in the process area
when housed in a suitable enclosure. The S800 I/O is designed for a demanding industrial
environment.
Temperature
I/O Module Factors
The maximum ambient air temperature around S800 modules is 55°C (131°F) for I/O modules
mounted on Extended MTUs on vertical or horizontal orientated DIN-rails. I/O modules
mounted in Compact MTUs on a vertical DIN-rail allows operation at 40°C (104°F).
The ambient temperature derating which applies for vertical DIN-rail and Compact MTUs is
due to the reduced air flow through an I/O module due to the orientation.
The different hardware modules in the S800 I/O have different outputs of heat. Accurate
calculation of the heat produced by the system requires knowledge of the modules and the work
cycle. Power supplies with regulated outputs are highly recommended to minimize heat in
cabinets. Use of such devices will reduce the power loss of resistive loads and current outputs,
for example, digital inputs and analog outputs. Please refer to Section 3.2.5, Power and Cooling
Cabinetry Factors
The temperature within cabinets and in the surrounding environment and atmosphere must be
considered, especially when using sealed cabinets (IP65/IP54) or tropicalized cabinets (IP41)
with considerable equipment and outside ambient temperatures at levels approaching 40°C
(104°F). The frequency of faults is estimated to double for each 20° C (36°F) increase in
temperature. Thus, it is important to maintain as low an ambient temperature outside the
cabinets (typical operating range 10 - 40°C (50 - 104°F)) as possible where the equipment is
installed. Design considerations are given in Section 3.1.8.2, Heat Dissipation Permitted in
Cabinets.
Vibration
The cabinets are to be located on a stable floor, wall, deck or supporting structure, free from
vibrations.
If the system equipment is installed in a control room adjacent to large machinery such as
shakers or large presses, where frequent major vibrations occur, shock absorbers or an isolation
pad may be required to protect the system equipment. Shock absorbers normally protect the
equipment from sustained low level vibrations (vibrations that are perceptible, but not
excessive). If vibrations or shock is a major problem, more extreme measures must be
considered to alleviate the problem.
2-2 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 2.1.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility and CE marking
2.1.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility and CE marking

Grounding, cable selection and cable routing must be considered for electromagnetic
interference-free operation. Planning considerations are discussed in the following sections.
Instructions for implementing these plans are provided in Section 2.2, Setup.
The S800 I/O meets requirements specified in EMC Directive 89/336/EEC. You should request
CE marking and compliance when ordering the equipment.
For more information about environmental immunity, including EMC qualities with or without
CE marking, refer to the ABB Master Environmental Immunity data sheet.
2.1.4 Layout of I/O Stations
2.1.4.1 I/O Station with S800 I/O

The S800 I/O is mounted on a DIN-rail. The DIN-rail is mounted in a cabinet or on an enclosure
wall to a metal sheet with fastening screws every 100 mm to ensure a good chassis ground
connection in the cabinet or an open rack. The FCI, ModuleBus Modem and MTUs are mounted
to the DIN-rail. The FCI, ModuleBus Modem and MTUs have a snap locking device that
attaches it to the mounting rail. It is possible to mount the FCI, ModuleBus Modem and MTUs
both vertically and horizontally. The FCI, ModuleBus Modem or MTU is placed on the top edge
of the DIN-rail and the bottom latch mechanism can be snapped into place.
To mount the unit, place it on the top edge of the DIN-rail, release the rail latch with a flat blade
screw driver and snap the bottom mechanism into place. When the unit is in place on the DIN-
rail and in vertical position, take away the screw driver and the rail latch will fix the unit in
position on the DIN-rail. Release the unit from the DIN-rail in a similar way.
3BSE 008 878R301 2-3

A flat blade screw driver can be used to release the latch to allow easier movement along the
DIN-rail or removal of the unit (Figure 2-1).
ModuleBus
Release
I/O Module
DIN-rail Lock/Switch
To
Lock
E
F
D
A
Ground
C
B
Clip Spring
E
F
D
A
C
B
L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C8 L2+
Move up to L1+ B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B8 L2+

release rail
latch L1- A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A8 L2-
Pry down to
release rail
latch
Figure 2-1. MTU Latching System
Snapping the FCI, ModuleBus Modem or MTU to the DIN-rail makes contact by a grounding
spring with the chassis.
2-4 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 2.1.4 Layout of I/O Stations
Connection of the MTU ModuleBus connector to the FCI, ModuleBus Modem or next MTU is
made by sliding the MTU along the mounting rail and then locking it in place (Figure 2-2).
F R
P
T1 T2
E
F
F
D D
A A
SERVICE
C
B
B
STN. ADDR.
4 56
E
F
F
3 7 x 10 D D
2 8 A A
109
C
C
B
B
5
4 6
3 7 x1
2 8
CI810 109
SWX.X/Y AF100 Tx Rx
L+ L+ SA 1 2
L- L- SB
+ + Tx L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C8 L2+ L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C8 L2+
- -
SH SH L1+ B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B8 L2+ L1+ B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B8 L2+
SH SH Rx
L1- A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A8 L2- L1- A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A8 L2-
Figure 2-2. I/O Station Installation Diagram
3BSE 008 878R301 2-5

The MTU can be disconnected from the FCI, ModuleBus Modem or another MTU by pressing
and holding the ModuleBus release button (Figure 2-3) while sliding the MTU away to the
right.
ModuleBus
Release
Figure 2-3. ModuleBus Release
Redundant FCI Installation

Installation of an I/O Station with redundant FCIs requires two CI820 FCIs and a TB815
Interconnection Unit (Figure 2-4). They are connected to the I/O modules of the base cluster by
an electrical ModuleBus extension cable. From the TB815 ModuleBus connector, a
TK801V0xx cable is connected to the first MTU via a TB806 Cable Adapter-in module.
2-6 3BSE 008 878R301

F R F R
P M P
O
T1 T2 D T1 T2
U
PR DU L PR DU
E
B
U
S
SERVICE SERVICE
STN. ADDR STN. ADDR

4 56 4 56
3 7 x 10 3 7 x 10
2 8 2 8
109 109
4 56 4 56
3 7x1 3 7x1
2 8 2 8
CI820 109 TB815 CI820 109
SWX.X/Y SWX.X/Y
L- L- SB L- L- SB
+ Tx +
- -
SH SH
Rx
SH SH
Figure 2-4. Redundant CI820 FCIs and TB815 Interconnection Unit Layout
The redundant FCIs can either be mounted on a separate DIN rail or the same one as the I/O
modules. Room must be allowed to the left and right of the FCIs for disconnection from the
TB815 for removal (Figure 2-5).
The total length of the ModuleBus extension, from the TB815, and ModuleBus segments of the
I/O modules must not exceed 2.5 meters (8.2 feet).
Optical ModuleBus Extension can be connected to the TB815 via the TB810 ModuleBus
Optical Port unit for connection of 1 to 7 additional clusters.
3BSE 008 878R301 2-7

F R F R
M F F F
P P
O
T1 T2 D T1 T2 R R R
U
PR DU L DU W W W
PR
E
B
U
1 1 1
S
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5
6 6 6
SERVICE SERVICE 7 7 7
8 8 8
9 9 9
E
F
F
10 D 10 D 10 D
A A A
11 11 11
C
B
B
STN. ADDR STN. ADDR
4 5 6 4 5 6 12 12 12
3 7 3 7
E
13 13 13
F
2 8 x 10 2 8 x 10 D D D
1 0 9 1 0 9 14 A 14 A 14 A
C
4 5 4 5 6
B
6 15 15 15
3 7 3 7
x1 16 16 16
2 8 2 8 x1
CI820 1 0 9 TB815 CI820 1 0 9
DI810 DI810 DI810
24V 24V 24V
L- L- SB L- L- SB
+
-
Tx +
-
TB806 L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C8 L2+ L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C8 L2+ L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C8 L2+
L1+ B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B8 L2+ L1+ B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B8 L2+ L1+ B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B8 L2+

SH SH
Rx
SH SH
L1- A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A8 L2- L1- A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A8 L2- L1- A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A8 L2-
TK801V003
(300 mm)
(1 ft.)
Figure 2-5. Connection of Redundant FCIs to I/O Modules
ModuleBus Extension (Electrical)

When the next MTU is located away from the previous MTU, or from the TB815
Interconnection Unit, then a TK801V0xx ModuleBus Extension cable must be used. The
previous MTU will require a TB805 Cable Adapter-out to be plugged into the ModuleBus-out
connector. The TK801V0xx cable is then connected to the TB805 adapter. The next MTU will
have a TB806 Cable Adapter-in plugged into the ModuleBus-in connector and then connected
to the other end of the ModuleBus Extension cable (see Figure 2-6).
The TB805 and the TB806 adapters mount on the DIN-rail. Each has a latch that locks it to the
rail. There is also a grounding spring that connects it to the DIN-rail. The latch can be released
with a screw driver and the adaptor moved toward or away (for removal) from the MTU.
The ModuleBus Extension cable comes in three standard lengths:
• TK801V003 - 300 mm (1 ft.)
• TK801V006 - 600 mm (2 ft.)
• TK801V012 - 1.2 meters (4 ft.)
2-8 3BSE 008 878R301

ModuleBus length must not exceed 2.5 meters (8.2 feet) from FCI, TB815 Interconnection Unit,
or ModuleBus Modem to the last MTU including extension cables.
TB805
F TB806 F
R R
W W
1 Latch Release 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
E
E
F
F
10 D
A
10 D
A
11 11
C
C
B
B
12 12
13 13
E
E
F
F
14 14
D D
A A
15 15
C
C
B
B
16 16
DI810 DI810
24V 24V
Male Cable Female Cable
Connector Connector
L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C8 L2+ L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C8 L2+
L1+ B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B8 L2+ L1+ B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B8 L2+

TK801V003
L1- A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A8 L2- (300 mm) L1- A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A8 L2-
(1 ft.)
Figure 2-6. ModuleBus Extension Cable Connections
Optical ModuleBus Expansion

The FCI provides fiber optic expansion of the ModuleBus for up to 7 additional I/O clusters or
to drive equipment. The TB810/TB811 ModuleBus Optical Port must be inserted in to the
CI810 FCI to provide optical ModuleBus expansion. See Figure 2-7 for location of the
TB810/TB811 the CI810 FCI and Figure 2-8 for location in the TB815 Interconnection Unit.
3BSE 008 878R301 2-9

TB810 has 10 Mbit drivers and is used with the TB820 (S800 I/O) and ABB drives equipment.
TB811 has 5Mbit drivers and is used with ABB variable drives ACS 600 equipment. The
TB811 can only use up to 10 meters (33 ft) plastic optic fiber. A Modulebus must have the same
type of drivers on each node.
SERVICE
STN. ADDR.
4 56
3 7 x 10
2 8
109
5
4 6
3 7 x1
2 8
CI810 109
AF100
TB810
Tx Rx
L+ L+ SA 1 2
L- L- SB
+ + Tx
- -
SH SH
SH SH Rx
Figure 2-7. Location of TB810/TB811 ModuleBus Optical Port in CI810 FCI
SERVICE SERVICE
STN. ADDR STN. ADDR

4 56 4 56
3 7 x 10 3 7 x 10
2 8 2 8
109 109
4 56 4 56
3 7x1 3 7x1
2 8 2 8
CI820 109 TB815 CI820 109
L- L- SB L- L- SB
+ Tx +
- -
SH SH
Rx
SH SH
TB810
Figure 2-8. Location of TB810/TB811 ModuleBus Optical Port on the TB815
2-10 3BSE 008 878R301

Each I/O cluster can have a maximum of 12 S800 I/O modules. The maximum number of
S800 I/O modules or other units connected to one FCI is 24. The optical ring connection allows
for a maximum distribution of 15m (49 ft.) (plastic fiber) or 200m (667 ft.) (HCS fiber) between
each I/O cluster on the ring, see example in Figure 2-9.
FCI FCI
ModuleBus Optical Port TB810

Simplex optical cable (TK812Vxxx)
15m (49 ft.)Max. (plastic fiber)
Duplex optical cable (TK811Vxxx) ModuleBus Modem TB820

15m (49 ft.) Max. (plastic fiber
TB807 ModuleBus Terminator
Fiber Optic Simplex Configuration Fiber Optic Duplex Configuration
Figure 2-9. Optical ModuleBus Expansion, Simplex and Duplex Configurations
The TB820 can be used in both a simplex optical configuration as well as in a duplex optical
configuration. In a simplex optical configuration, the optical ModuleBus nodes are connected in
a ring. In a duplex optical configuration, the optical ModuleBus nodes are connected in a row.
The optical ModuleBus Extension fiber optic (plastic fiber) cable comes in three standard
lengths:
• TK811V015 - 1.5 meters (5 ft.)
• TK811V050 - 5 meters (16 ft.)
• TK811V150 - 15 meters (49 ft.)
3BSE 008 878R301 2-11

As with the FCI (base cluster), the electrical ModuleBus length must not exceed 2.5 meters
from the ModuleBus Modem to the last MTU of each cluster. Each cluster requires a TB807
ModuleBus Terminator plugged into the last MTU.
I/O Module Installation

Connection of the I/O module to the MTU is made by setting the I/O Module Keys #1 & #2 to
the correct setting (per Table 3-8), place the I/O Module Lock/Switch to the unlock position and
then push the I/O module straight onto the MTU. The I/O module is locked and electrically
connected to the MTU by the I/O Module Lock/Switch.
F
R
W I/O Module Lock/Switch
(shown locked)
1
2 I/O Module Lock/Switch
3 (shown unlocked)
4
5
6
7 Turn clockwise
8 to lock I/O Module
9
E
E
F
F
10 D
A
D
A
11
C
I/O Module
B
12
13 Key #1
E
E
F
14
D D
A A
15
C
C
B
16
I/O Module
DI810 Key #2
24V
L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C8 L2+ L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C8 L2+
L1+ B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B8 L2+ L1+ B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B8 L2+
L1- A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A8 L2- L1- A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A8 L2-
Figure 2-10. MTU Mechanical Keys for I/O Module and Module Lock
CAUTION
Do not turn the I/O Module Lock/Switch counter-clockwise from the unlocked
position. This will cause it to break and will make the MTU and the I/O module
inoperative.
2-12 3BSE 008 878R301

After all the MTUs are connected, the TB807 ModuleBus Terminator connects to the
ModuleBus connector of the last MTU of the I/O Station. The TB807 has a snap latch
(Figure 2-11) that holds it in place. To release the terminator, the latch has to be squeezed to
allow removal.
Top View
F
R
W
TB807
1
2
3
4 ModuleBus
5 Terminator
6 Latch
7
8
9 E
E
F
F
10 D
A
D
A
11
C
C
B
B
12
13
E
E
F
F
14
D D
A A
15
C
C
B
B
16
DI810
24V
L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C8 L2+ L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C8 L2+
L1+ B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B8 L2+ L1+ B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B8 L2+
Figure 2-11. TB807 ModuleBus Terminator Installation
The I/O Station configuration can be as shown in Figure 2-12 and/or as presented in Section
1.7.1.7, Module Termination Units and Section 1.7.3, Examples of Enclosure Configurations.
816 mm (32.1") End Stop

End Stop
DIN-rail
mm 10 84 58.5 20
(inches) (0.4) (3.3) (2.3) (0.8)
Figure 2-12. I/O Station Layout with FCI and S800 I/O Modules
3BSE 008 878R301 2-13

439 mm (17.2")
ModuleBus Modem TB820
Fiber Optic
ModuleBus Cables
10 58 58.5 20 mm
(0.4)(2.2) (2.3) (0.8) (inches)
Figure 2-13. I/O Station Layout with ModuleBus Modem and S800 I/O Modules
NOTE
In all installations, two end stops must be mounted on the DIN-rail, one at each
end of the station, to prevent the modules from moving along the rail, see
Figure 2-12.
Deviations from these installation rules are possible, but should be followed as much as
possible. The flexibility of the system allows both horizontal and vertical mounting of the rail
and mixing of MTU types as shown in Figure 2-14.
Figure 2-14. Compact and Extended MTU and Horizontal and Vertical Mounting.
2-14 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 2.1.5 Grounding
2.1.5 Grounding
General
The signal processing electronics in the Advant System, and all interference suppression for
external signals, are normally directly grounded to chassis and/or plant ground. The plant
ground potential must be stable and well defined, even in the event of a low ground fault caused
by high voltage equipment or a lightning strike.
Each I/O module’s grounding spring which connects to the metallic DIN-rail which serves as
the module electronics ground conductor between the inter-connected devices. This is to ensure
a good ground connection both for the internal logic and for the EMI immunity and RF emission
of the modules. The DIN mounting rail must have a good bond to the PE of the cabinet.
If S800 I/O-modules are configured as two or more groups interconnected with an extension
cable(s), special care should be taken to ensure that the DIN-rails of all groups have a good
connection to ground. If the DIN-rails are mounted on a common metal sheet, no extra means
need be taken except to make sure that each rail has a reliable low ohmic path to the metal plate.
Ground connection can be done at a single point on the common metal plate.
The ground wire which joins the grounding systems should be ≥35 mm2 (2 AWG) copper (Cu),
Figure 2-15.
Cabinetry
or enclosure
Shield bar
Protective
Ground
Ground Plane
> 35 mm2
(> 2 AWG)
Figure 2-15. Grounding of Electronic Equipment
Protective Ground (PE)

Cabinets supplied with 120/220V a.c. must always be provided with a protective ground. The
configuration is grounded at the same point with a 35 mm2 (2 AWG) copper lead.
3BSE 008 878R301 2-15

Grounding of Signals and Voltage Supply

For minimum interference and maximum accuracy, it is normally most effective to ground the
signals from transmitters or transducers directly at a grounding point in the cabinet. It is also
advantageous to ground supply voltages for transducers, sensing voltage for contacts, load
supply voltage and so on at the same location. All modules have galvanic isolation from the
chassis; this means that group-wise isolated modules can be grounded in other equipment as
long as all channels have their ground point at the same location. In the event that the above
recommendations (because of measurement techniques or safety regulations) cannot be
complied with, be sure to use these methods:
• Signal isolation for analog input signals
• Digital inputs and outputs are divided into groups at the MTUs and I/O modules, with the
supply voltage distribution and grounding in other equipment.
Local grounding of a signal at the transducer location may be a requirement for individual
voltage supply to each transducer. This normally hinders the use of MTUs for voltage
distribution. A ground bar with the terminal block and fuse equipment required by the
application can be used in such cases.
If the transmitter/transducer has galvanic isolation of the supply, its signal zero can be grounded
freely and where most suitable for measurement accuracy without special voltage supply
requirements such as group division, fusing and grounding.
2.1.6 Signal Cable Considerations

When planning for the cable routing in the plant and when selecting suitable cables to be used,
the following should be considered:
• Routing of communication cables with regard to a.c. power wiring.
• Mixing of signals and signal types within cables.
• Need of shielded or un-shielded cables.
Cable entry into cabinets is generally from the bottom. Alternative cable entrances can be
accommodated if required. Refer to ABB Installation Rules for details.
2.1.6.1 Recommendations for Signal and Process Cable

For use in a typical industrial environments according to the basic protection:
1. Unshielded lines are adequate for binary signals and high level (0...20mA, ±10V...) analog
signals.
2. Shielded cables should be use for low level (RTDs, TC...) analog signals and pulse
transducer signals.
3. Minimize the loop area formed between the cable and earth (environment ground), for
example by laying the cable on metallic trays that are earthed at several points. Closed
cable conduits provide an additional attenuation of up to 30 dB.
2-16 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 2.1.6 Signal Cable Considerations
4. Use separate cables for analog, binary and heavy current lines. Lay the cables separately
sorted according to type. The signal cables and heavy current cables should be in separate
conduits or at least 30cm apart from each other.
5. The return-conductor should be in the same cable as the signal.
6. The field cables must be wired according to the recommendations of Figure 2-16.
7. Advant Fieldbus cable installed per the Advant Fieldbus 100 User’s Guide.
8. Profibus-DP cable installed per Profibus-DP Advant Controller 400 Series User’s Guide.
For modules with special LED indications see respectively modules in Appendix A, General
Specification.
I/O device
Power supply cables >600V
Distance 30 cm P
R
O
Own power supply cables
T
process I/O cables E
C
Field Cables for communication with Electronic
T
modems = long distance bus I
Zone (isolated) Zone
Video cables
O
Pulse transmission N
Distance 10 cm
B
A
Cables for communicating without
R
modems = short distance bus R
(RS232, RS422) I
E
R
Distance 30 cm
Power supply cables >600V
Figure 2-16. Recommended Field Cable Wiring Distances
3BSE 008 878R301 2-17

2.1.7 Power Requirements
General
Power supplied to ABB system’s power supply units and for external supply to I/O can
normally be obtained from the plant a.c. or d.c. supply sources.
A.C. Supply
A power source can be rated as Class II or Class III with respect to level of disturbances, voltage
variations and so on, according to the IEC standards. Voltage range is 110 - 240V a.c. Class II
denotes a higher quality than Class III. The S800 I/O power supplies SD811 and SD812 are
rated for Class III mains.
D.C. Supply
Table 2-1. Requirements for D.C. Supply Sources
Device Voltage Range

FCI/ModuleBus Modem 19.2 - 30
SD811/SD812 185 - 250
When using a d.c. source, only battery-supplied systems with a non-grounded battery can be
used for direct supply of ABB systems without galvanic isolation between the system and the
current source. With this type of supply, the battery is grounded in the ABB equipment.
Supply from a grounded battery requires an isolating d.c./d.c. converter.
Protective Ground
ABB cabinets supplied with 120/230V a.c. must always be provided with a protective ground.
Current Consumption
The total current consumption with 24V is calculated as follows:
I tot = I 24V + 0.37 × I 5V
where I24V = current consumption 24V, obtained from Appendix A

I5V = current consumption 5V, obtained from Appendix A
0.37 = conversion factor
This current should include the output current for powering field circuits and analog outputs in
addition to supplying the internal electronics.
The total static and dynamic loads may under no circumstances exceed 100% of the capacity of
the supply unit. As all current consumption information is typical and not an “absolute
maximum” it is recommended that the supply unit should not be loaded beyond 90% of its
capacity, including all static and dynamic loads.
When calculating the a.c. current supplied to the 24V output power supply units, 0.85 is used as
the efficiency factor of the units.
2-18 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 2.1.8 Process Connection
2.1.8 Process Connection

Process signal cables are connected to the MTUs of each S800 I/O module. There are certain
restrictions that must be considered:
• Internal cable routing
• Signal grounding
• Shield grounding
• Grounding of; MTUs, mounting rails, cable channels
Please find more information on grounding in the document Advant OCS Installation Rules.
Connection Principles, Fusing and Voltage Distribution

Each I/O module is provided with an MTU and the process signals are distributed by dividing
the cables entering the cabinet and connecting the separate conductors to different MTUs.
In addition to terminal blocks for process signals, the MTUs may contain terminal blocks for
power distribution and fusing. The alternatives available in the standard MTUs, in regards to:
extra terminal blocks for 0V, voltage distribution, number of fuses and so on, varies between the
different types and are presented in the following sections.
3BSE 008 878R301 2-19

2.1.8.1 Analog Input Module AI810 Process Connections

Figure 2-17 shows the process connections for the Analog Input Module AI810 when installed
on a TU830 Extended MTU.
Process TU830 AI810
6.3A
+24v L1+ L1+
Pwr. L1+
0v Fuse L-
Source L1-
L1-
L1+ B1,B2 L1+
C1 I1U
0 - 20mA Ch1 I C2 I1I
A1,A2 ZP
2 - Wire L1+
XMTRs L1+ B3,B4
C3 I2U
0 - 20mA Ch2 I C4 I2I
A3,A4 ZP
B5,B6 L1+ Mux.
0 - 10V Ch3 V C5 I3U
C6 I3I
ZP A5,A6 ZP
4 - Wire
XMTRs B7,B8 L1+
0 - 10V Ch4 V C7 I4U
C8 I4I
ZP A7,A8 ZP
L2+ B9,B10 L2+
C9 I5U
0 - 20mA Ch5 I C10 I5I
ZP A9,A10 ZP
L2+ B11,B12 L2+
C11 I6U
0 - 20mA Ch6 I C12 I6I
ZP A11,A12 ZP
3 - Wire
XMTRs L2+ B13,B14 L2+
0 - 10V Ch7 V C13 I7U
C14 I7I
A13,A14
ZP ZP
L2+ B15,B16 L2+
0 - 10V Ch8 V C15 I8U
C16 I8I
ZP A15,A16 ZP
6.3A
+24v L2+ L2+
L2+
Fuse
Chx V = Voltage Input 0v L2- L-
Chx I = Current Input L2- EM
Figure 2-17. AI810 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections
2-20 3BSE 008 878R301

Figure 2-18 shows the process connections for the AI810 when installed on a TU810 or TU814
Compact MTU.
Process TU810 AI810

(or TU814)
+24V L1+ L1+

Pwr. L1+
Sup. 0V L1- ZP
L1+
C1 I1U
0 - 20mA Ch1 I B1 I1I
A1 ZP
L1+
C2 I2U
0 - 20mA Ch2 I B2 I2I
A2 ZP
L1+ Mux.
0 - 10V Ch3 V C3 I3U
B3 I3I
ZP A3 ZP
L1+
0 - 10V Ch4 V C4 I4U
B4 I4I
ZP A4 ZP
L2+
C5 I5U
0 - 20mA Ch5 I B5 I5I
ZP A5 ZP
L2+
C6 I6U
0 - 20mA Ch6 I B6 I6I
ZP A6 ZP
L2+
0 - 10V Ch7 V C7 I7U
B7 I7I
ZP A7 ZP
L2+
0 - 10V Ch8 V C8 I8U
B8 I8I
ZP A8 ZP
L2+ L2+
Pwr. 24V L2+
Chx V = Voltage Input Sup. 0V L2- ZP
EM
Chx I = Current Input
Figure 2-18. AI810 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections
3BSE 008 878R301 2-21

Figure 2-19 shows the process connections for the AI810 when installed on a TU835 Extended
MTU.
Process TU835 AI810

X11
Fn=100mA L1+
+24v L1+
L1+
0v L1- L-
L1-
X12 F1
L1+ 11 L1+
I1U
0 - 20mA Ch1 I 12 I1I
ZP
F2
L1+ 13 L1+
I2U
0 - 20mA Ch2 I 14 I2I
ZP
F3
L1+ 15 L1+ Mux.
I3U
0 - 20mA Ch3 I 16 I3I
ZP
F4
L1+ 17 L1+
I4U
0 - 20mA Ch4 I 18 I4I
ZP
F5
L2+ 19 L2+
I5U
0 - 20mA Ch5 I 20 I5I
ZP
F6
L2+ 21 L2+
I6U
0 - 20mA Ch6 I 22 I6I
ZP
F7
L2+ 23 L2+
I7U
0 - 20mA Ch7 I 24 I7I
F8 ZP
L2+ 25 L2+
I8U
0 - 20mA Ch8 I 26 I8I
ZP
X13
+24v L2+ L2+
L2+
0v L2- L-
2-22 3BSE 008 878R301

Figure 2-20 shows the process connections for the AI810 when installed on a TU812 Compact
MTU.
TU812 AI810
1 1 UP1 +24V
L1+
14 14 UP1
L-
2 2 ZP1 0V
L1+
15 15 ZP1
I1U
I1I
3 3 S1 Ch1 V ZP
16 16 S2 Ch1 I L1+
I2U
4 4 S3 Ch2 V I2I
ZP
17 17 S4 Ch2 I
L1+ Mux.
5 5 S5 Ch3 V I3U
I3I
18 18 S6 Ch3 I ZP
Process 6 6 S7 Ch4 V L1+
Connection I4U
19 19 S8 Ch4 I I4I
ZP
7 7 S9 Ch5 V
L2+
20 20 S10 Ch5 I I5U
I5I
8 8 S11 Ch6 V ZP
21 21 S12 Ch6 I
L2+
I6U
9 9 S13 Ch7 V I6I
ZP
22 22 S14 Ch7 I
L2+
10 10 S15 Ch8 V I7U
I7I
23 23 S16 Ch8 I ZP
L2+
11 11 UP2 +24V I8U
24 24 UP2
I8I
ZP
12 12 ZP2 0V
L2+
25 25 ZP2
L-
13 13 EM EM EM
Chx V = Voltage Input

Figure 2-20. AI810 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections
Please refer to Table A-2 for all AI810 process connections for each MTU type.
3BSE 008 878R301 2-23

2.1.8.2 Differential Analog Input Module AI820 Process Connections

Figure 2-21 shows the process connections for the Differential Analog Input Module AI820
when installed on a TU830 Extended MTU.
Process TU830 AI820
Pwr.
6.3A
Source +24v L1+ L1+
L1+
Fuse
0v L1- L1-
L1-
0 - 10V
B1,B2 L1+
Ch1 V C1 I1U+
C2 I1IB 250Ω Diff.
4 Wire A1,A2 L1- Compensation
Amp
250Ω
XTMR
4W
B3,B4 L1+ +
C3 I1I+
Ch1 - C4 I1- LPF
4 - 20mA A3,A4 L1-
2 Wire L1+ B5,B6 L1+

C5 I2U+
XTMR Bridge C6 I2IB
A5,A6 L1-
250Ω Diff.
Jumper Compensation Amp
250Ω
4W
B7,B8 L1+ +
Ch2 I C7 I2I+
C8 I2- LPF
A7,A8 L1-
Pwr.
Source B9,B10 L2+
C9 I3U+
Bridge C10 I3IB 250Ω Diff.
Jumper A9,A10 L2- Compensation
0 - 20mA Amp
250Ω
4W
B11,B12 L2+ +
Ch3 I C11 I3I+
C12 I3-
LPF
Ch3 -
A11,A12 L2-
4 Wire
XTMR B13,B14 L2+
CH4 V C13 I4U+
C14 I4IB
0 - 10V A13,A14 L2-
250Ω Diff.
Compensation Amp
L2+
250Ω
4W
B15,B16 L2+ +
3 Wire C15 I4I+
XTMR C16 I4- LPF
L2- A15,A16 L2-
6.3A
+24v L2+ L2+ LPF = Low Pass Filter
L2+
Fuse
Chx V = Voltage Input 0v L2- L2-
2-24 3BSE 008 878R301

Compact MTU.
Process +24V 0V TU810 AI820

(or TU814)
Pwr.
Source L1+ L1+
L1+
Local L1- L1-
0 - 10V Gnd.
L1+
Ch1 V C1 I1U+
B1 I1IB 250Ω Diff.
4 Wire A1 L1- Compensation
Amp
250Ω
4W
XTMR L1+ +
C2 I1I+ LPF
Ch1 - B2 I1-
A2 L1-
4 - 20mA Bridge L1+
2 Wire Jumper C3 I2U+
XTMR B3 I2IB 250Ω Diff.
A3 L1- Compensation Amp
250Ω
4W
L1+ +
Ch2 I C4 I2I+ LPF
Ch2 - B4 I2-
Pwr. L1- A4 L1-
Source L2+
C5 I3U+
Bridge B5 I3IB Diff.
250Ω
Jumper A5 L2-
0 - 20mA Compensation Amp
250Ω
4W
L2+ +
Ch3 I C6 I3I+
B6
LPF
Ch3 - I3-
A6 L2-
4 Wire
XTMR L2+
CH4 V C7 I4U+
B7 I4IB 250Ω Diff.
0 - 10V A7 L2- Compensation Amp
250Ω
L2+
4W
+
3 Wire C8 I4I+
Ch4 - I4- LPF
XTMR B8
A8 L2-
L2+ L2+ LPF = Low Pass Filter

+24v L2+
Chx V = Voltage Input 0v L2- L2-
EM
3BSE 008 878R301 2-25

2.1.8.3 RTD Input Module AI830 Process Connections

Figure 2-23 shows the process connections for the RTD Input Module AI830 when installed on
a TU830 Extended MTU.
Process TU830 AI830
6.3A
L1+
L1+
L1- Fuse ZP
0V L1-
T B1,B2
Ch1+ C1 I1+
Ch1- C2 I1-
ZP A1,A2 ZP
T B3,B4
Ch2+ C3 I2+
Ch2- C4 I2-
ZP A3,A4 ZP
T B5,B6
Ch3+ C5 I3+
Ch3- C6 I3-
ZP A5,A6 ZP
T B7,B8
Ch4+ C7 I4+
Ch4- C8 I4-
ZP A7,A8 ZP
B9,B10
T
Ch5+ C9 I5+
Ch5- C10 I5-
ZP A9,A10 ZP
T B11,B12
Ch6+ C11 I6+
Ch6- C12 I6-
ZP A11,A12 ZP
T B13,B14
Ch7+ C13 I7+
Ch7- C14 I7-
A13,A14 ZP
ZP
T B15,B16
Ch8+ C15 I8+
Ch8- C16 I8+
ZP A15,A16 ZP
6.3A
L2+
L2+
L2- Fuse ZP
0V L2- EM
2-26 3BSE 008 878R301

Figure 2-24 shows the process connections for the AI830 when installed on a TU810 of TU814
Compact MTU.
Process TU810 AI830

(or TU814)
L1+
L1+
0V L1- ZP
T
Ch1+ C1 I1+
Ch1- B1 I1-
ZP A1 ZP
T
Ch2+ C2 I2+
Ch2- B2 I2-
ZP A2 ZP
T
Ch3+ C3 I3+
Ch3- B3 I3-
ZP A3 ZP
T
Ch4+ C4 I4+
Ch4- B4 I4-
ZP A4 ZP
T
Ch5+ C5 I5+
Ch5- B5 I5-
ZP A5 ZP
T
Ch6+ C6 I6+
Ch6- B6 I6-
ZP A6 ZP
T
Ch7+ C7 I7+
Ch7- B7 I7-
ZP A7 ZP
T
Ch8+ C8 I8+
Ch8- B8 I8+
ZP A8 ZP
L2+
L2+
0V L2- ZP
EM
3BSE 008 878R301 2-27

2.1.8.4 TC/mV Input Module AI835 Process Connections

Figure 2-25 shows the process connections for the TC/mV Input Module AI835 when installed
Process TU830 AI835
6.3A
L1+ PCJC-
L1+
L1- Fuse
L1-
B1,B2
Ch1+ C1 I1+
Ch1- C2 I1-
A1,A2 ZP
Thermocouple isolated
from ground B3,B4
Ch2+ C3 I2+
Ch2- C4 I2-
A3,A4 ZP
B5,B6
Ch3+ C5 I3+
Ch3- C6 I3-
A5,A6 ZP
B7,B8
Ch4+ C7 I4+
Ch4- C8 I4-
A7,A8 ZP
B9,B10
Ch5+ C9 I5+
Ch5- C10 I5-
A9,A10 ZP
B11,B12
Thermocouple connected
to ground Ch6+ C11 I6+
Ch6- C12 I6-
A11,A12 ZP
B13,B14
Ch7+ C13 I7+
Ch7- C14 I7-
A13,A14
ZP
B15,B16
Pt100 Ch8+ C15 I8+
Ch8- C16 I8+
A15,A16 ZP
6.3A
L2+ PCJC+
L2+
Fuse
L2-
L2-
EM
2-28 3BSE 008 878R301

Compact MTU.
Process TU810 AI835

(or TU814)
L1+ PCJC-
L1+
L1-
Ch1+ C1 I1+
Ch1- B1 I1-
A1 ZP
Thermocouple isolated
from ground
Ch2+ C2 I2+
Ch2- B2 I2-
A2 ZP
Ch3+ C3 I3+
Ch3- B3 I3-
A3 ZP
Ch4+ C4 I4+
Ch4- B4 I4-
A4 ZP
Ch5+ C5 I5+
Ch5- B5 I5-
A5 ZP
Thermocouple connected
to ground Ch6+ C6 I6+
Ch6- B6 I6-
A6 ZP
Ch7+ C7 I7+
Ch7- B7 I7-
A7 ZP
Pt100 Ch8+ C8 I8+
Ch8- B8 I8+
A8 ZP
L2+ PCJC+
L2+
L2-
EM
3BSE 008 878R301 2-29

Figure 2-27 shows the AI835 connections through a remote junction box.
Process TU810 AI835

(or TU814)
Multi-conductor (Cu)
shielded cables L1+ PCJC-
L1+
L1-
Junction
Thermocouple Box
connected to
ground
Ch1+ C1 I1+
2 Ch1- B1 I1-
A1 ZP
Ch2+ C2 I2+
2 Ch2- B2 I2-
A2 ZP
Ch3+ C3 I3+
2 Ch3- B3 I3-
A3 ZP
Ch4+ C4 I4+
2
Ch4- B4 I4-
A4 ZP
Ch5+ C5 I5+
2
Ch5- B5 I5-
A5 ZP
Ch6+ C6 I6+
2
Ch6- B6 I6-
A6 ZP
Ch7+ C7 I7+
2
Ch7- B7 I7-
A7 ZP
Thermocouple
isolated from
ground Ch8+ C8 I8+
2
Ch8- B8 I8+
A8 ZP
2 L2+ PCJC+
L2+
L2-
EM
Figure 2-27. AI835 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections to Remote Junction Box
2-30 3BSE 008 878R301

2.1.8.5 Analog Output Module AO810 Process Connections

Figure 2-28 shows the process connections for the Analog Output Module AO810 when
installed on an TU830 Extended MTU.
AO810 TU830 Process

Device
6.3A
L1+ +24V
L1+
Fuse
L1- 0V
L1-
UP1 B1
O1 Ch1 + RL < 500 ohms

C1 0 - 20mA (with power supply
D/A ZP A1 Ch1 - connected to L1+,
See Note below)
UP1 B3
O2 C3 Ch2 + 0 - 20mA
D/A ZP A3 Ch2 -
UP1 B5
O3 C5 Ch3 + 0 - 20mA
D/A ZP A5 Ch3 -
UP1 B7
O4 C7 Ch4 + 0 - 20mA
D/A ZP A7 Ch4 -
UP1 B9
O5 C9 Ch5 + 0 - 20mA
D/A ZP A9 Ch5 -
UP1 B11
O6 C11 Ch6 + 0 - 20mA

D/A ZP A11 Ch6 -
UP1 B13
O7 C13 Ch7 + 0 - 20mA

D/A ZP A13 Ch7 -
UP1 B15
O8 C15 Ch8 + 0 - 20mA

D/A ZP A15 Ch8 -
6.3A
L2+ +24V
Note: RL = 400...950 ohms (with power supply
L2+ connected to L2+)
Fuse
L2- 0V Power supply min. = 7.7V+0.023*RL
EM L2- Power Supply = 19.2 to 30V
RL min = 400 ohms (including all outputs)
Figure 2-28. AO810 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections
3BSE 008 878R301 2-31

Figure 2-29 shows the process connections for the AO810 when installed on a TU810 or TU814
Compact MTU.
AO810 TU810 Process

(or TU814) Device
L1+ +24V
L1+
L1- 0V
UP1
O1 C1 Ch1 + 0 - 20mA RL < 500 ohms
D/A ZP A1 Ch1 - (with power supply
connected to L1+,
UP1 See Note below)
O2 C2 Ch2 + 0 - 20mA
D/A ZP A2 Ch2 -
UP1
O3 C3 Ch3 + 0 - 20mA
D/A ZP A3 Ch3 -
UP1
O4 C4 Ch4 + 0 - 20mA
D/A ZP A4 Ch4 -
UP1
O5 C5 Ch5 + 0 - 20mA
D/A ZP A5 Ch5 -
UP1
O6 C6 Ch6 + 0 - 20mA
D/A ZP A6 Ch6 -
UP1
O7 C7 Ch7 + 0 - 20mA
D/A ZP A7 Ch7 -
UP1
O8 C8 Ch8 + 0 - 20mA
D/A ZP A8 Ch8 -
L2+ +24V
L2+ Note: RL = 400...950 ohms (with power supply
L2- 0V connected to L2+)
EM Power supply min. = 7.7V+0.023*RL
Power Supply = 19.2 to 30V
RL min = 400 ohms (including all outputs)
Figure 2-29. AO810 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections
2-32 3BSE 008 878R301

Figure 2-30 shows the process connections for the Analog Output Module AO810 when
installed on an TU812 Compact MTU.
AO810 TU812
+24V UP1 1 1
UP1 14 14
0V ZP1 2 2
ZP1 15 15
UP1 Ch1 + S1 3 3
O1
Ch1 - S2 16 16
D/A ZP
Ch2 + S3 4 4
UP1
Ch2 - S4 17 17
O2
D/A ZP Ch3 + S5 5 5
UP1 Ch3 - S6 18 18
O3 Process
Ch4 + S7 6 6
D/A ZP Connection
UP1 Ch4 - S8 19 19
O4 Ch5 + S9 7 7
D/A ZP
Ch5 - S10 20 20
UP1
Ch6 + S11 8 8
O5
D/A ZP Ch6 - S12 21 21
UP1 Ch7 + S13 9 9
O6 Ch7 - S14 22 22
D/A ZP
Ch8 + S15 10 10
UP1
Ch8 - S16 23 23
O7
D/A ZP +24V UP2 11 11
UP1 UP2 24 24
O8 0V ZP2 12 12
D/A ZP
ZP2 25 25
EM 13 13
EM
Figure 2-30. AO810 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections
Please refer to Table A-12 for all AO810 process connections for each MTU type.
3BSE 008 878R301 2-33

2.1.8.6 Bipolar Analog Output Module AO820 Process Connections

Figure 2-31 shows the process connections for the Bipolar Analog Output Module AO820 when
AO820 TU830 Process

Device
6.3A
L1+
L1+ RL = <550Ω for
Fuse
L1- current outputs
L1-
O1I C1 Ch1 I+ ±20mA

ZP1 C2 Ch1 -
D/A
O1U C3 Ch1 V+
ZP1 C4 Ch1 -
O2I C5 Ch2 I+ 0 - 20mA

ZP2 C6 Ch2 -
D/A
O2U C7 Ch2 V+
ZP2 C8 Ch2 -
Use either the current or
voltage output terminals,
O3I C9 Ch3 I+ but not both per channel.
ZP3 C10 Ch3 -
D/A
O3U C11 Ch3 V+ ±10V
ZP3 C12 Ch3 -
O4I C13 Ch4 I+

ZP4 C14 Ch4 -
D/A O4U C15 Ch4 V+ 0 - 10V

ZP4 C16 Ch4 -
6.3A
L2+
L2+ RL = >2KΩ for
Fuse
L2- voltage outputs
EM L2-
Figure 2-31. AO820 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections
2-34 3BSE 008 878R301

Figure 2-32 shows the process connections for the AO820 when installed on a TU810 or TU814
Compact MTU.
AO820 TU810 Process

(or TU814) Device
L1+
L1+
L1-
RL = <550Ω for
current outputs
O1I C1 Ch1 I+ ±20mA

ZP1 B1 Ch1 -
D/A
O1U C2 Ch1 V+
ZP1 B2 Ch1 -
O2I C3 Ch2 I+ 0 - 20mA

ZP2 B3 Ch2 -
D/A
O2U C4 Ch2 V+
ZP2 B4 Ch2 -
Use either the current or
voltage output terminals,
O3I C5 Ch3 I+ but not both per channel.
ZP3 B5 Ch3 -
D/A
O3U C6 Ch3 V+ ±10V
ZP3 B6 Ch3 -
O4I C7 Ch4 I+
ZP4 B7 Ch4 -
D/A 0 - 10V
O4U C8 Ch4 V+
ZP4 B8 Ch4 -
L2+
L2+
RL = >2KΩ for
L2-
EM voltage outputs
Figure 2-32. AO820 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections
Please refer to Table A-14 for all AO820 process connections for each MTU type.
3BSE 008 878R301 2-35

2.1.8.7 Digital Input Module DI810 Process Connections

Figure 2-33 shows the process connections for the Digital Input Module DI810 when installed
on an TU830 Extended MTU.
Process TU830 DI810
6.3 A
+24V L1+
L1+ Supervise
0V L1- Fuse
L1-
L1+ B1,B2 L1+
Ch1 C1 I1
Ch2 C2 I2
L1- A1,A2 L1-
+ L1+ B3,B4 L1+
Ch3 C3 I3
Ch4 C4 I4
- L1- A3,A4 L1-
+ L1+ B5,A6 L1+
Ch5 C5 I5
Ch6 C6 I6
- L1- A5,A6 L1-
L1+ B7,B8 L1+
Ch7 C7 I7
Ch8 C8 I8
L1- A7,A8 L1-
L2+ B9,B10 L2+
Ch9 C9 I9
Ch10 C10 I10
L2- A9,A10 L2-
+ L2+ B11,B12 L2+
Ch11 C11 I11
Ch12 C12 I12
- L2- A11,A12 L2-
+ L2+ B13,B14 L2+
Ch13 C13 I13
Ch14 C14 I14
- L2- A13,A14
L2-
L2+ B15,A16 L2+
Ch15 C15 I15
Ch16 C16 I16
L2- A15,A16 L2-
6.3 A
+24V L2+ Supervise
L2+
0V L2-
Fuse
L2- EM
Figure 2-33. DI810 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections
2-36 3BSE 008 878R301

Figure 2-34 shows the process connections for the DI810 when installed on a TU810 or TU814
Compact MTU.
Process TU810 DI810

(or TU814)
+24V L1+
L1+ Supervise
0V L1-
L1+
Ch1 C1 I1
Ch2 B1 I2
L1- A1 L1-
+ L1+
Ch3 C2 I3
Ch4 B2 I4
- L1- A2 L1-
+ L1+
Ch5 C3 I5
Ch6 B3 I6
- L1- A3 L1-
L1+
Ch7 C4 I7
Ch8 B4 I8
L1- A4 L1-
L2+
Ch9 C5 I9
Ch10 B5 I10
L2- A5 L2-
+ L2+
Ch11 C6 I11
Ch12 B6 I12
- L2- A6 L2-
+ L2+
Ch13 C7 I13
Ch14 B7 I14
- L2- A7 L2-
L2+
Ch15 C8 I15
Ch16 B8 I16
L2- A8 L2-
+24V L2+
L2+ Supervise
0V L2-
EM
Figure 2-34. DI810 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections
3BSE 008 878R301 2-37

Figure 2-35 shows the process connections for the DI810 when installed on a TU812 Compact
MTU.
TU812 DI810
1 1 UP1 +24V
Supervise
14 14 UP1
2 2 ZP1 0V
L1+
15 15 ZP1 I1
I2
3 3 S1 Ch1 L1-
16 16 S2 Ch2 L1+
I3
4 4 S3 Ch3 I4
L1-
17 17 S4 Ch4
L1+
5 5 S5 Ch5 I5
I6
18 18 S6 Ch6 L1-
Process 6 L1+
6 S7 Ch7
Connection I7
19 19 S8 Ch8 I8
L1-
7 7 S9 Ch9
L2+
20 20 S10 Ch10 I9
I10
8 8 S11 Ch11 L2-
21 21 S12 Ch12
L2+
I11
9 9 S13 Ch13
I12
L2-
22 22 S14 Ch14
L2+
10 10 S15 Ch15 I13
I14
23 23 S16 Ch16 L2-
L2+
11 11 UP2 +24V I15
24 UP2
I16
24
L2-
12 12 ZP2 0V
25 25 ZP2 Supervise
13 13 EM
EM
Figure 2-35. DI810 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections
Please refer to Table A-27 for all DI810 process connections for each MTU type.
2-38 3BSE 008 878R301


Process TU830 DI811
6.3 A
+48V L1+
L1+ Supervise
0V L1- Fuse
L1-
L1+ B1,B2 L1+
Ch1 C1 I1
Ch2 C2 I2
L1- A1,A2 L1-
+ L1+ B3,B4 L1+
Ch3 C3 I3
Ch4 C4 I4
- L1- A3,A4 L1-
+ L1+ B5,A6 L1+
Ch5 C5 I5
Ch6 C6 I6
- L1- A5,A6 L1-
L1+ B7,B8 L1+
Ch7 C7 I7
Ch8 C8 I8
L1- A7,A8 L1-
L2+ B9,B10 L2+
Ch9 C9 I9
Ch10 C10 I10
L2- A9,A10 L2-
+ L2+ B11,B12 L2+
Ch11 C11 I11
Ch12 C12 I12
- L2- A11,A12 L2-
+ L2+ B13,B14 L2+
Ch13 C13 I13
Ch14 C14 I14
- L2- A13,A14
L2-
L2+ B15,A16 L2+
Ch15 C15 I15
Ch16 C16 I16
L2- A15,A16 L2-
6.3 A
+48V L2+
L2+ Supervise
0V L2-
Fuse
L2- EM
3BSE 008 878R301 2-39

Compact MTU.
Process TU810 DI811

(or TU814)
+48V L1+
L1+ Supervise
0V L1-
L1+
Ch1 C1 I1
Ch2 B1 I2
L1- A1 L1-
+ L1+
Ch3 C2 I3
Ch4 B2 I4
- L1- A2 L1-
+ L1+
Ch5 C3 I5
Ch6 B3 I6
- L1- A3 L1-
L1+
Ch7 C4 I7
Ch8 B4 I8
L1- A4 L1-
L2+
Ch9 C5 I9
Ch10 B5 I10
L2- A5 L2-
+ L2+
Ch11 C6 I11
Ch12 B6 I12
- L2- A6 L2-
+ L2+
Ch13 C7 I13
Ch14 B7 I14
- L2- A7 L2-
L2+
Ch15 C8 I15
Ch16 B8 I16
L2- A8 L2-
+48V L2+
L2+ Supervise
0V L2-
EM
2-40 3BSE 008 878R301


Figure 2-38 shows the process connections for the Digital Input Module DI814 (current
sourcing) when installed on an TU830 Extended MTU.
Process TU830 DI814
6.3 A
+24V L1+
L1+ Supervise
0V L1- Fuse
L1-
L1+ B1,B2 L1+
Ch1 C1 I1
Ch2 C2 I2
L1- A1,A2 L1-
+ L1+ B3,B4 L1+
Ch3 C3 I3
Ch4 C4 I4
- L1- A3,A4 L1-
+ L1+ B5,A6 L1+
Ch5 C5 I5
Ch6 C6 I6
- L1- A5,A6 L1-
L1+ B7,B8 L1+
Ch7 C7 I7
Ch8 C8 I8
L1- A7,A8 L1-
L2+ B9,B10 L2+
Ch9 C9 I9
Ch10 C10 I10
L2- A9,A10 L2-
+ L2+ B11,B12 L2+
Ch11 C11 I11
Ch12 C12 I12
- L2- A11,A12 L2-
+ L2+ B13,B14 L2+
Ch13 C13 I13
Ch14 C14 I14
- L2- A13,A14
L2-
L2+ B15,A16 L2+
Ch15 C15 I15
Ch16 C16 I16
L2- A15,A16 L2-
6.3 A
+24V L2+
L2+ Supervise
0V L2-
Fuse
L2- EM
3BSE 008 878R301 2-41

Compact MTU.
Process TU810 DI814

(or TU814)
+24V L1+
L1+ Supervise
0V L1-
L1+
Ch1 C1 I1
Ch2 B1 I2
L1- A1 L1-
+ L1+
Ch3 C2 I3
Ch4 B2 I4
- L1- A2 L1-
+ L1+
Ch5 C3 I5
Ch6 B3 I6
- L1- A3 L1-
L1+
Ch7 C4 I7
Ch8 B4 I8
L1- A4 L1-
L2+
Ch9 C5 I9
Ch10 B5 I10
L2- A5 L2-
+ L2+
Ch11 C6 I11
Ch12 B6 I12
- L2- A6 L2-
+ L2+
Ch13 C7 I13
Ch14 B7 I14
- L2- A7 L2-
L2+
Ch15 C8 I15
Ch16 B8 I16
L2- A8 L2-
+24V L2+
L2+ Supervise
0V L2-
EM
2-42 3BSE 008 878R301

MTU.
TU812 DI814
1 1 UP1 +24V
Supervise
14 14 UP1
2 2 ZP1 0V
L1+
15 15 ZP1 I1
I2
3 3 S1 Ch1 L1-
16 16 S2 Ch2 L1+
I3
4 4 S3 Ch3 I4
L1-
17 17 S4 Ch4
L1+
5 5 S5 Ch5 I5
I6
18 18 S6 Ch6 L1-
Process
6 6 S7 Ch7 L1+
Connection I7
19 19 S8 Ch8 I8
L1-
7 7 S9 Ch9
L2+
20 20 S10 Ch10 I9
I10
8 8 S11 Ch11 L2-
21 21 S12 Ch12
L2+
I11
9 9 S13 Ch13
I12
L2-
22 22 S14 Ch14
L2+
10 10 S15 Ch15 I13
I14
23 23 S16 Ch16 L2-
L2+
11 11 UP2 +24V I15
24 UP2
I16
24
L2-
12 12 ZP2 0V
25 25 ZP2 Supervise
13 13 EM
EM
3BSE 008 878R301 2-43


Process TU831 DI820
120V a.c.
Ch1.1 B1 I 1.1
Ch1.2 A1 I 1.2
Ch2.1 B2 I 2.1
Ch2.2 A2 I 2.2
Ch3.1 B3 I 3.1
Ch3.2 A3 I 3.2
Ch4.1 B4 I 4.1
Ch4.2 A4 I 4.2
Ch5.1 B5 I 5.1
120V a.c. Ch5.2 A5 I 5.2
Ch6.1 B6 I 6.1
Ch6.2 A6 I 6.2
Ch7.1 B7 I 7.1
Ch7.2 A7 I 7.2
Ch8.1 B8 I 8.1
Ch8.2 A8 I 8.2
EM
2-44 3BSE 008 878R301

MTU.
Process TU811 DI820
120V a.c.
Ch1.1 B1 I 1.1
Ch1.2 A1 I 1.2
Ch2.1 C2 I 2.1
Ch2.2 A2 I 2.2
Ch3.1 B3 I 3.1
Ch3.2 A3 I 3.2
Ch4.1 C4 I 4.1
Ch4.2 A4 I 4.2
Ch5.1 B5 I 5.1
120V a.c. Ch5.2 A5 I 5.2
Ch6.1 C6 I 6.1
Ch6.2 A6 I 6.2
Ch7.1 B7 I 7.1
Ch7.2 A7 I 7.2
Ch8.1 C8 I 8.1
Ch8.2 A8 I 8.2
EM
3BSE 008 878R301 2-45


Process TU831 DI821
230V a.c.
Ch1.1 B1 I 1.1
Ch1.2 A1 I 1.2
Ch2.1 B2 I 2.1
Ch2.2 A2 I 2.2
Ch3.1 B3 I 3.1
Ch3.2 A3 I 3.2
Ch4.1 B4 I 4.1
Ch4.2 A4 I 4.2
Ch5.1 B5 I 5.1
230V a.c. Ch5.2 A5 I 5.2
Ch6.1 B6 I 6.1
Ch6.2 A6 I 6.2
Ch7.1 B7 I 7.1
Ch7.2 A7 I 7.2
Ch8.1 B8 I 8.1
Ch8.2 A8 I 8.2
EM
2-46 3BSE 008 878R301

MTU.
Process TU811 DI821
230V a.c.
Ch1.1 B1 I 1.1
Ch1.2 A1 I 1.2
Ch2.1 C2 I 2.1
Ch2.2 A2 I 2.2
Ch3.1 B3 I 3.1
Ch3.2 A3 I 3.2
Ch4.1 C4 I 4.1
Ch4.2 A4 I 4.2
B5 I 5.1
Ch5.1
230V a.c. Ch5.2 A5 I 5.2
Ch6.1 C6 I 6.1
Ch6.2 A6 I 6.2
Ch7.1 B7 I 7.1
Ch7.2 A7 I 7.2
Ch8.1 C8 I 8.1
Ch8.2 A8 I 8.2
EM
3BSE 008 878R301 2-47


Process TU830 DI830
6.3 A
+24V L1+
L1+ Supervise
0V L1- Fuse
L1-
L1+ B1,B2 L1+
Ch1 C1 I1
Ch2 C2 I2
L1- A1,A2 L1-
+ L1+ B3,B4 L1+
Ch3 C3 I3
Ch4 C4 I4
- L1- A3,A4 L1-
+ L1+ B5,A6 L1+
Ch5 C5 I5
Ch6 C6 I6
- L1- A5,A6 L1-
L1+ B7,B8 L1+
Ch7 C7 I7
Ch8 C8 I8
L1- A7,A8 L1-
L2+ B9,B10 L2+
Ch9 C9 I9
Ch10 C10 I10
L2- A9,A10 L2-
+ L2+ B11,B12 L2+
Ch11 C11 I11
Ch12 C12 I12
- L2- A11,A12 L2-
+ L2+ B13,B14 L2+
Ch13 C13 I13
Ch14 C14 I14
- L2- A13,A14
L2-
L2+ B15,A16 L2+
Ch15 C15 I15
Ch16 C16 I16
L2- A15,A16 L2-
6.3 A
+24V L2+ Supervise
L2+
0V L2-
Fuse
L2- EM
2-48 3BSE 008 878R301

Compact MTU.
Process TU810 DI830

(or TU814)
+24V L1+
L1+ Supervise
0V L1-
L1+
Ch1 C1 I1
Ch2 B1 I2
L1- A1 L1-
+ L1+
Ch3 C2 I3
Ch4 B2 I4
- L1- A2 L1-
+ L1+
Ch5 C3 I5
Ch6 B3 I6
- L1- A3 L1-
L1+
Ch7 C4 I7
Ch8 B4 I8
L1- A4 L1-
L2+
Ch9 C5 I9
Ch10 B5 I10
L2- A5 L2-
+ L2+
Ch11 C6 I11
Ch12 B6 I12
- L2- A6 L2-
+ L2+
Ch13 C7 I13
Ch14 B7 I14
- L2- A7 L2-
L2+
Ch15 C8 I15
Ch16 B8 I16
L2- A8 L2-
+24V L2+
L2+ Supervise
0V L2-
EM
3BSE 008 878R301 2-49

MTU.
TU812 DI830
1 1 UP1 +24V
Supervise
14 14 UP1
2 2 ZP1 0V
L1+
15 15 ZP1 I1
I2
3 3 S1 Ch1 L1-
16 16 S2 Ch2 L1+
I3
4 4 S3 Ch3 I4
L1-
17 17 S4 Ch4
L1+
5 5 S5 Ch5 I5
I6
18 18 S6 Ch6 L1-
Process 6 L1+
6 S7 Ch7
Connection I7
19 19 S8 Ch8 I8
L1-
7 7 S9 Ch9
L2+
20 20 S10 Ch10 I9
I10
8 8 S11 Ch11 L2-
21 21 S12 Ch12
L2+
I11
9 9 S13 Ch13
I12
L2-
22 22 S14 Ch14
L2+
10 10 S15 Ch15 I13
I14
23 23 S16 Ch16 L2-
L2+
11 11 UP2 +24V I15
24 UP2
I16
24
L2-
12 12 ZP2 0V
25 25 ZP2 Supervise
13 13 EM
EM
2-50 3BSE 008 878R301


Process TU830 DI831
6.3 A
+48V L1+
L1+ Supervise
0V L1- Fuse
L1-
L1+ B1,B2 L1+
Ch1 C1 I1
Ch2 C2 I2
L1- A1,A2 L1-
+ L1+ B3,B4 L1+
Ch3 C3 I3
Ch4 C4 I4
- L1- A3,A4 L1-
+ L1+ B5,A6 L1+
Ch5 C5 I5
Ch6 C6 I6
- L1- A5,A6 L1-
L1+ B7,B8 L1+
Ch7 C7 I7
Ch8 C8 I8
L1- A7,A8 L1-
L2+ B9,B10 L2+
Ch9 C9 I9
Ch10 C10 I10
L2- A9,A10 L2-
+ L2+ B11,B12 L2+
Ch11 C11 I11
Ch12 C12 I12
- L2- A11,A12 L2-
+ L2+ B13,B14 L2+
Ch13 C13 I13
Ch14 C14 I14
- L2- A13,A14
L2-
L2+ B15,A16 L2+
Ch15 C15 I15
Ch16 C16 I16
L2- A15,A16 L2-
6.3 A
+48V L2+
L2+ Supervise
0V L2-
Fuse
L2- EM
3BSE 008 878R301 2-51

Compact MTU.
Process TU810 DI831

(or TU814)
+48V L1+
L1+ Supervise
0V L1-
L1+
Ch1 C1 I1
Ch2 B1 I2
L1- A1 L1-
+ L1+
Ch3 C2 I3
Ch4 B2 I4
- L1- A2 L1-
+ L1+
Ch5 C3 I5
Ch6 B3 I6
- L1- A3 L1-
L1+
Ch7 C4 I7
Ch8 B4 I8
L1- A4 L1-
L2+
Ch9 C5 I9
Ch10 B5 I10
L2- A5 L2-
+ L2+
Ch11 C6 I11
Ch12 B6 I12
- L2- A6 L2-
+ L2+
Ch13 C7 I13
Ch14 B7 I14
- L2- A7 L2-
L2+
Ch15 C8 I15
Ch16 B8 I16
L2- A8 L2-
+48V L2+
L2+ Supervise
0V L2-
EM
2-52 3BSE 008 878R301

MTU.
TU812 DI831
1 1 UP1 +24V
Supervise
14 14 UP1
2 2 ZP1 0V
L1+
15 15 ZP1 I1
I2
3 3 S1 Ch1 L1-
16 16 S2 Ch2 L1+
I3
4 4 S3 Ch3 I4
L1-
17 17 S4 Ch4
L1+
5 5 S5 Ch5 I5
I6
18 18 S6 Ch6 L1-
Process 6 L1+
6 S7 Ch7
Connection I7
19 19 S8 Ch8 I8
L1-
7 7 S9 Ch9
L2+
20 20 S10 Ch10 I9
I10
8 8 S11 Ch11 L2-
21 21 S12 Ch12
L2+
I11
9 9 S13 Ch13
I12
L2-
22 22 S14 Ch14
L2+
10 10 S15 Ch15 I13
I14
23 23 S16 Ch16 L2-
L2+
11 11 UP2 +24V I15
24 UP2
I16
24
L2-
12 12 ZP2 0V
25 25 ZP2 Supervise
13 13 EM
EM
3BSE 008 878R301 2-53


Process TU830
DI885
+ +
24V
_ 48V_
6.3 A
24V+ L1+
Pwr. L1+
Sup. 0V L1- Fuse
L1-
47K Ch1 C1 I1
48V C2 L+
L1- A1,A2 L-
Ch2 C3 I2
48V C4 L+
L1- A3,A4 L-
Ch3 C5 I3
48V C6 L+
L1- A5,A6 L-
Ch4 C7 I4
48V C8 L+
L1- A7,A8 L-
Ch5 C9 I5
48V C10 L+
A9,A10
Ch6 C11 I6
48V C12 L+
A11,A12
Ch7 C13 I7
48V C14 L+
A13,A14
47K Ch8 C15 I8

48V C16 L+
A15,A16
6.3 A
48V+ L2+
Pwr. L2+
Fuse
Sup. 0V L2-
L2- EM
2-54 3BSE 008 878R301

Compact MTU.
Process TU810
DI885
(or TU814)
+ +
24V
_ 48V_
24V+ L1+
Pwr. L1+
Sup. 0V L1-
47K Ch1 C1 I1
48V B1 L+
L1- A1 L-
Ch2 C2 I2
48V B2 L+
L1- A2 L-
Ch3 C3 I3
48V B3 L+
L1- A3 L-
Ch4 C4 I4
48V B4 L+
L1- A4 L-
Ch5 C5 I5
48V B5 L+
A5
Ch6 C6 I6
48V B6 L+
A6
Ch7 C7 I7
48V B7 L+
A7
47K Ch8 C8 I8
48V B8 L+
A8
48V+ L2+
Pwr. L2+
Sup. 0V L2-
EM
3BSE 008 878R301 2-55

2.1.8.15 Digital Output Module DO810 Process Connections

Figure 2-53 shows the process connections for the Digital Output Module DO810 when
DO810 TU830 Process
6.3 A
L1+ +24V
Supervise L1+
Fuse L1- 0V
L1-
L1+ B1,B2 L1+
O1 C1 Ch1
O2 C2 Ch2
L1- A1,A2 L1-
L1+ B3,B4 L1+
O3 C3 Ch3
O4 C4 Ch4
L1- A3,A4 L1-
L1+ B5,A6 L1+
O5 C5 Ch5
O6 C6 Ch6
L1- A5,A6 L1-
L1+ B7,B8 L1+
O7 C7 Ch7
O8 C8 Ch8
L1- A7,A8 L1-
L2+ B9,B10 L2+
O9 C9 Ch9
O 10 C10 Ch10
L2- A9,A10 L2-
L2+ B11,B12 L2+
O 11 C11 Ch11
O 12 C12 Ch12
L2- A11,A12 L2-
L2+ B13,B14 L2+
O 13 C13 Ch13
O 14 C14 Ch14
L2- A13,A14 L2-
L2+ B15,A16 L2+
O 15 C15 Ch15
O 16 C16 Ch16
L2- A15,A16 L2-
6.3 A
L2+ +24V
Supervise L2+
Fuse L2- 0V
EM L2-
Figure 2-53. DO810 with TU830 Extended MTU Process Connections
2-56 3BSE 008 878R301

Figure 2-54 shows the process connections for the DO810 when installed on a TU810 or TU814
Compact MTU.
DO810 TU810 Process

(or TU814)
L1+ +24V
Supervise L1+
L1- 0V
L1+
O1 C1 Ch1
O2 B1 Ch2
L1- A1 L1-
L1+
O3 C2 Ch3
O4 B2 Ch4
L1- A2 L1-
L1+
O5 C3 Ch5
O6 B3 Ch6
L1- A3 L1-
L1+
O7 C4 Ch7
O8 B4 Ch8
L1- A4 L1-
L2+
O9 C5 Ch9
O 10 B5 Ch10
L2- A5 L2-
L2+
O 11 C6 Ch11
O 12 B6 Ch12
L2- A6 L2-
L2+
O 13 C7 Ch13
O 14 B7 Ch14
L2- A7 L2-
L2+
O 15 C8 Ch15
O 16 B8 Ch16
L2- A8 L2-
L2+ +24V
Supervise L2+
L2- 0V
EM
Figure 2-54. DO810 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections
3BSE 008 878R301 2-57

DO810 TU812
+24V UP1 1 1
Supervise
UP1 14 14
0V ZP1 2 2
L1+
O1 ZP1 15 15
O2
L1- Ch1 S1 3 3
L1+ Ch2 S2 16 16
O3
O4 Ch3 S3 4 4
L1-
Ch4 S4 17 17
L1+
O5 Ch5 S5 5 5
O6
L1- Ch6 S6 18 18
Process
L1+ Ch7 S7 6 6
O7 Connection
O8 Ch8 S8 19 19
L1-
Ch9 S9 7 7
L2+
O9 Ch10 S10 20 20
O 10
L2- Ch11 S11 8 8
L2+ Ch12 S12 21 21
O 11
O 12 Ch13 S13 9 9
L2-
Ch14 S14 22 22
L2+
O 13 Ch15 S15 10 10
O 14
L2- Ch16 S16 23 23
L2+
O 15 +24V UP2 11 11
O 16
L2- UP2 24 24
0V ZP2 12 12
Supervise
ZP2 25 25
EM EM 13 13
Figure 2-55. DO810 with TU812 Compact MTU Process Connections
Please refer to Table A-43 for all DO810 process connections for each MTU type.
2-58 3BSE 008 878R301


Figure 2-56 shows the process connections for the Digital Output Module DO814 (current
sinking) when installed on an TU830 Extended MTU.
DO814 TU830 Process
6.3 A
L1+ +24V
Supervise L1+
Fuse L1- 0V
L1-
L1+ B1,B2 L1+
O1 C1 Ch1
O2 C2 Ch2
L1- A1,A2 L1-
L1+ B3,B4 L1+
O3 C3 Ch3
O4 C4 Ch4
L1- A3,A4 L1-
L1+ B5,A6 L1+
O5 C5 Ch5
O6 C6 Ch6
L1- A5,A6 L1-
L1+ B7,B8 L1+
O7 C7 Ch7
O8 C8 Ch8
L1- A7,A8 L1-
L2+ B9,B10 L2+
O9 C9 Ch9
O 10 C10 Ch10
L2- A9,A10 L2-
L2+ B11,B12 L2+
O 11 C11 Ch11
O 12 C12 Ch12
L2- A11,A12 L2-
L2+ B13,B14 L2+
O 13 C13 Ch13
O 14 C14 Ch14
L2- A13,A14 L2-
L2+ B15,A16 L2+
O 15 C15 Ch15
O 16 C16 Ch16
L2- A15,A16 L2-
6.3 A
L2+ +24V
Supervise L2+
Fuse L2- 0V
EM L2-
3BSE 008 878R301 2-59

Compact MTU.
DO814 TU810 Process

(or TU814)
24V Power Supply
L1+ +24V
Supervise L1+
L1- 0V
L1+
O1 C1 Ch1
O2 B1 Ch2
L1- A1 L1-
L1+
O3 C2 Ch3
O4 B2 Ch4
L1- A2 L1-
L1+
O5 C3 Ch5
O6 B3 Ch6
L1- A3 L1-
L1+
O7 C4 Ch7
O8 B4 Ch8
L1- A4 L1-
L2+
O9 C5 Ch9
O 10 B5 Ch10
L2- A5 L2-
L2+
O 11 C6 Ch11
O 12 B6 Ch12
L2- A6 L2-
L2+
O 13 C7 Ch13
O 14 B7 Ch14
L2- A7 L2-
L2+
O 15 C8 Ch15
O 16 B8 Ch16
L2- A8 L2-
L2+ +24V
Supervise L2+ 24V Power
L2- 0V Supply
EM
2-60 3BSE 008 878R301

DO814 TU812
+24V UP1 1 1
Supervise
UP1 14 14
0V ZP1 2 2
L1+
O1 ZP1 15 15
O2
L1- Ch1 S1 3 3
L1+ Ch2 S2 16 16
O3
O4 Ch3 S3 4 4
L1-
Ch4 S4 17 17
L1+
O5 Ch5 S5 5 5
O6
L1- Ch6 S6 18 18
Process
L1+ Ch7 S7 6 6
O7 Connection
O8 Ch8 S8 19 19
L1-
Ch9 S9 7 7
L2+
O9 Ch10 S10 20 20
O 10
L2- Ch11 S11 8 8
L2+ Ch12 S12 21 21
O 11
O 12 Ch13 S13 9 9
L2-
Ch14 S14 22 22
L2+
O 13 Ch15 S15 10 10
O 14
L2- Ch16 S16 23 23
L2+
O 15 +24V UP2 11 11
O 16
L2- UP2 24 24
0V ZP2 12 12
Supervise
ZP2 25 25
EM EM 13 13
3BSE 008 878R301 2-61


installed on an TU830 Extended MTU
DO815 TU830 Process
6.3 A
L1+ +24V
L1+
Fuse L1- 0V
L1-
L1+ B1,B2 L1+
C1 Ch1
O1 C2
L1- A1,A2 L1-
L1+ B3,B4 L1+
C3 Ch2
O2 C4
L1- A3,A4 L1-
L1+ B5,A6 L1+
C5 Ch3
O3 C6
L1- A5,A6 L1-
L1+ B7,B8 L1+
C7 Ch4
O4 C8
L1- A7,A8 L1-
L2+ B9,B10 L2+
C9 Ch5
O5 C10
L2- A9,A10 L2-
L2+ B11,B12 L2+
C11 Ch6
O6 C12
L2- A11,A12 L2-
L2+ B13,B14 L2+
C13 Ch7
O7 C14
L2- A13,A14 L2-
L2+ B15,A16 L2+
C15 Ch8
O8 C16
L2- A15,A16 L2-
6.3 A
L2+ +24V
L2+
Fuse L2- 0V
EM L2-
2-62 3BSE 008 878R301

Compact MTU
DO815 TU810 Process

(or TU814)
L1+ +24V
L1- 0V
L1+
C1 Ch1
O1 B1
L1- A1 L1-
L1+
C2 Ch2
O2 B2
L1- A2 L1-
L1+
C3 Ch3
O3 B3
L1- A3 L1-
L1+
C4 Ch4
O4 B4
L1- A4 L1-
L2+
C5 Ch5
O5 B5
L2- A5 L2-
L2+
C6 Ch6
O6 B6
L2- A6 L2-
L2+
C7 Ch7
O7 B7
L2- A7
L2+
C8 Ch8
O8 B8
L2- A8 L2-
L2+ +24V
L2- 0V
EM
3BSE 008 878R301 2-63


installed on a TU831 Extended MTU.
DO820 TU831 Process
5 - 250V
a.c/d.c.
O 1.1 B1 Ch1.1
O 1.2 A1 Ch1.2
O 2.1 B2 Ch2.1
O 2.2 A2 Ch2.2
O 3.1 B3 Ch3.1
O 3.2 A3 Ch3.2
O 4.1 B4 Ch4.1
O 4.2 A4 Ch4.2
O 5.1 B5 Ch5.1 5 - 250V

O 5.2 A5 Ch5.2 a.c/d.c.
O 6.1 B6 Ch6.1
O 6.2 A6 Ch6.2
O 7.1 B7 Ch7.1
O 7.2 A7 Ch7.2
O 8.1 B8 Ch8.1
O 8.2 A8 Ch8.2
EM
2-64 3BSE 008 878R301

Figure 2-62 shows the process connections for the DO820 when installed on a TU811 Compact
MTU.
DO820 TU811 Process
5 - 250V
a.c/d.c.
O 1.1 B1 Ch1.1
O 1.2 A1 Ch1.2
O 2.1 C2 Ch2.1
O 2.2 A2 Ch2.2
O 3.1 B3 Ch3.1
O 3.2 A3 Ch3.2
O 4.1 C4 Ch4.1
O 4.2 A4 Ch4.2
O 5.1 B5 Ch5.1
O 5.2 A5 Ch5.2 5 - 250V
a.c/d.c.
O 6.1 C6 Ch6.1
O 6.2 A6 Ch6.2
O 7.1 B7 Ch7.1
O 7.2 A7 Ch7.2
O 8.1 C8 Ch8.1
O 8.2 A8 Ch8.2
EM
3BSE 008 878R301 2-65

Figure 2-63 shows the process connections for the DO820 when installed on a TU836 Extended
MTU.
DO820 TU836 Process

L1
L1 5 - 250V
N1 a.c/d.c.
N1
3.15A
O 1.1 11 Ch1.1
O 1.2 12 Ch1.2
3.15A
O 2.1 21 Ch2.1
O 2.2 22 Ch2.2
3.15A
O 3.1 31 Ch3.1
O 3.2 32 Ch3.2
3.15A
O 4.1 41 Ch4.1
O 4.2 42 Ch4.2
3.15A
O 5.1 51 Ch5.1
O 5.2 52 Ch5.2
3.15A
O 6.1 61 Ch6.1
O 6.2 62 Ch6.2
3.15A
O 7.1 71 Ch7.1
O 7.2 72 Ch7.2
3.15A
O 8.1 81 Ch8.1
O 8.2 82 Ch8.2
L2
L2 5 - 250V
N2 a.c/d.c.
EM N2
2-66 3BSE 008 878R301

MTU.
DO820 TU837 Process

ZP1 N1 230V
N1
O 1.1 B1 Ch1.1
O 1.2 A1 Ch1.2
3.15A
11
O 2.1 B2 Ch2.1
O 2.2 A2 Ch2.2
3.15A
12 Bridging
O 3.1 B3 Ch3.1
O 3.2 A3 Ch3.2
3.15A
13
O 4.1 B4 Ch4.1
O 4.2 A4 Ch4.2
3.15A 14
230V
O 5.1 B5 Ch5.1
O 5.2 A5 Ch5.2
3.15A 25
O 6.1 B6 Ch6.1
O 6.2 A6 Ch6.2
3.15A 26 Bridging
O 7.1 B7 Ch7.1
O 7.2 A7 Ch7.2
3.15A
27
O 8.1 B8 Ch8.1
O 8.2 A8 Ch8.2
3.15A 230V
28
N2
230V
ZP2 N2
EM
3BSE 008 878R301 2-67


installed on a TU831 Extended MTU.
DO821 TU831 Process
5 - 250V
a.c/d.c.
O 1.1 B1 Ch1.1
O 1.2 A1 Ch1.2
O 2.1 B2 Ch2.1
O 2.2 A2 Ch2.2
O 3.1 B3 Ch3.1
O 3.2 A3 Ch3.2
O 4.1 B4 Ch4.1
O 4.2 A4 Ch4.2
O 5.1 B5 Ch5.1 5 - 250V

O 5.2 A5 Ch5.2 a.c/d.c.
O 6.1 B6 Ch6.1
O 6.2 A6 Ch6.2
O 7.1 B7 Ch7.1
O 7.2 A7 Ch7.2
O 8.1 B8 Ch8.1
O 8.2 A8 Ch8.2
EM
2-68 3BSE 008 878R301

Figure 2-66 shows the process connections for the DO821 when installed on a TU811 Compact
MTU.
DO821 TU811 Process
5 - 250V
a.c/d.c.
O 1.1 B1 Ch1.1
O 1.2 A1 Ch1.2
O 2.1 C2 Ch2.1
O 2.2 A2 Ch2.2
O 3.1 B3 Ch3.1
O 3.2 A3 Ch3.2
O 4.1 C4 Ch4.1
O 4.2 A4 Ch4.2
O 5.1 B5 Ch5.1
O 5.2 A5 Ch5.2 5 - 250V
a.c/d.c.
O 6.1 C6 Ch6.1
O 6.2 A6 Ch6.2
O 7.1 B7 Ch7.1
O 7.2 A7 Ch7.2
O 8.1 C8 Ch8.1
O 8.2 A8 Ch8.2
EM
3BSE 008 878R301 2-69

MTU.
DO821 TU836 Process

L1
L1 5 - 250V
N1 a.c/d.c.
N1
3.15A
O 1.1 11 Ch1.1
O 1.2 12 Ch1.2
3.15A
O 2.1 21 Ch2.1
O 2.2 22 Ch2.2
3.15A
O 3.1 31 Ch3.1
O 3.2 32 Ch3.2
3.15A
O 4.1 41 Ch4.1
O 4.2 42 Ch4.2
3.15A
O 5.1 51 Ch5.1
O 5.2 52 Ch5.2
3.15A
O 6.1 61 Ch6.1
O 6.2 62 Ch6.2
3.15A
O 7.1 71 Ch7.1
O 7.2 72 Ch7.2
3.15A
O 8.1 81 Ch8.1
O 8.2 82 Ch8.2
L2
L2 5 - 250V
N2 a.c/d.c.
EM N2
2-70 3BSE 008 878R301

MTU.
DO821 TU837 Process

ZP1 N1 230V
N1
O 1.1 B1 Ch1.1
O 1.2 A1 Ch1.2
3.15A
11
O 2.1 B2 Ch2.1
O 2.2 A2 Ch2.2
3.15A
12 Bridging
O 3.1 B3 Ch3.1
O 3.2 A3 Ch3.2
3.15A
13
O 4.1 B4 Ch4.1
O 4.2 A4 Ch4.2
3.15A 14
230V
O 5.1 B5 Ch5.1
O 5.2 A5 Ch5.2
3.15A 25
O 6.1 B6 Ch6.1
O 6.2 A6 Ch6.2
3.15A 26 Bridging
O 7.1 B7 Ch7.1
O 7.2 A7 Ch7.2
3.15A
27
O 8.1 B8 Ch8.1
O 8.2 A8 Ch8.2
3.15A 230V
28
N2
230V
ZP2 N2
EM
3BSE 008 878R301 2-71

2.1.8.20 Pulse Counter Module DP820 Process Connection

Figure 2-69 shows the process connections for DP820 when installed on a TU810 or TU814
MTU.
PROCESS +24V L1+ TU810 or

0V TU814 DP820
RS422 V+
+24V L1+ L1+
0V L1- L1-
0V
C1 CA+_1
+ VA_11
A
- B1 CA-_1
VA_12
A1
C2 CB+_1
+ VB_11
B
- B2 CB-_1
VB_12
A2
C3 CST+_1
+ VST_11
ST
B3 CST-_1
- VST_12
A3
C4 DI_1
L1+
B4 DO_1
L1+
A4
V+
+5V
0V
C5 CA+_2
A VA_21
B5 CA-_2
VA_22
A5
C6 CB+_2
B VB_21
B6 CB-_2
VB_22
A6
C7 CST+_2
ST VST_21
B7 CST-_2
VST_22
A7
C8 DI_2
L2+
B8 DO_2
L1+
A8
L2+
V+ +24V L2+ L2+
0V 0V L2- L2-
EM
Figure 2-69. DP820 with TU810 or TU814 MTU Process Connections
2-72 3BSE 008 878R301

Figure 2-70 shows the process connections for DP820 when installed on a TU812 MTU.
1 1 TU812
14 14 L1+ DP820
2 2 L1-
15 15 CA+_1
3 3 VA_11
16 16 CA-_1
VA_12
4 4 CB+_1
VB_11
17 17 CB-_1
VB_12
5 5 CST+_1
VST_11
18 18 CST-_1
VST_12
6 6 DI_1
L1+
PROCESS 19
19 DO_1
CONNECTION L1+
7 7 CA+_2
VA_21
20 20 CA-_2
VA_22
8 8 CB+_2
VB_21
21 21 CB-_2
VB_22
9 9 CST+_2
VST_21
22 22 CST-_2
VST_22
10 10 DI_2
L2+
23 23 DO_2
11 L2+
11
24 24 L2+
12 12 L2-
25 25
13 13 EM
Figure 2-70. DP820 with TU812 MTU Process Connections
3BSE 008 878R301 2-73

Figure 2-71 shows the process connections for DP820 when installed on a TU830 MTU, and
with RS422 transducer connected to channel 1 and +5V transducer to channel 2.
PROCESS L1+ TU830

+24V L1+ 6.3A
L1- Fuse L1+ DP820
RS422 0V L1- L1-
C1 CA+_1
+ B1 VA_11
A A1
- C2 CA-_1
B2 VA_12
A2
C3 CB+_1
+ B3 VB_11
B A3
- C4 CB-_1
B4 VB_12
A4
C5 CST+_1
+ B5 VST_11
ST A5
- B6 CST-_1
C6 VST_12
A6
C7 DI_1
B7 L1+
A7
C8 DO_1
B8 L1+
A8
V+
5V 0V
C1 CA+_2
A B1 VA_21
A1
C2 CA-_2
B2 VA_22
A2
C3 CB+_2
B
B3 VB_21
A3
C4 CB-_2
B4 VB_22
A4
C5 CST+_2
ST
B5 VST_21
A5
B6 CST-_2
C6 VST_22
A6
C7 DI_2
B7 L2+
A7
C8 DO_2
B8 L1+
A8
L2+
V+ +24V L2+ 6.3A L2+
0V 0V L2- Fuse L2-
L2- EM
Figure 2-71. DP820 with TU830 MTU Process Connections and with Transducer Connections
2-74 3BSE 008 878R301

Figure 2-72 shows the process connections for DP820 when installed on a TU830 MTU, and
with +24V transducer connected to channel 1 and +12V transducer to channel 2.
PROCESS L1+ TU830

+24V L1+ 6.3A
L1- Fuse L1+ DP820
24V
24V 0V 0V L1- L1-
C1 CA+_1
A B1 VA_11
A1
C2 CA-_1
B2 VA_12
A2
C3 CB+_1
B B3 VB_11
A3
C4 CB-_1
B4 VB_12
A4
C5 CST+_1
ST B5 VST_11
A5
C6 CST-_1
B6 VST_12
A6
C7 DI_1
B7 L1+
A7
C8 DO_1
B8 L1+
A8
12V
12V 0V
CA+_2
C1
A B1 VA_21
A1
1.8k CA-_2
C2
B2 VA_22
A2
C3 CB+_2
B B3 VB_21
A3
1.8k CB-_2
C4
B4 VB_22
A4
C5 CST+_2
ST B5 VST_21
A5
1.8k
B6 CST-_2
C6 VST_22
A6
C7 DI_2
B7 L2+
A7
C8 DO_2
B8 L1+
A8
L2+
+24V L2+ 6.3A L2+
POWER
SUPPLY 0V L2- Fuse L2-
12V L2- EM
Figure 2-72. DP820 with TU830 MTU Process Connections and Transducer Connections
3BSE 008 878R301 2-75

2.1.9 Hazardous Applications

Standard process I/O modules and MTUs can be used with isolators or barriers for hazardous
environments as required.
2.1.10 High Voltage Switch-gear Applications

ABB Advant equipment is not designed for direct connection to high voltage switch-gear.
Interposing relays are used for digital input and output signals as a connecting link. For analog
signals, special transmitters/converters are used.
2.1.11 Lightning Strike Protection

Industrial installations and power plants are normally provided with well-integrated grounding
networks installed together with the power distribution system. In installations with such
grounding systems, it is not necessary to install lightning strike protection unless overhead
wiring or suspended cables are used outdoors.
Large plants (water supply installations, refineries and so on) can however have an inadequate
grounding system and signal cables can be routed above ground. In such cases lightning strike
protection must be used.
Cables outside the grounding system (even for short distances such as 10 m) always require
lightning strike protection.
2.1.12 Mounting Dimensions

When placing a control cabinet, minimum distances to walls and ceiling must be followed to
ensure satisfactory results.
2-76 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 2.1.12 Mounting Dimensions
Overhead Clearances
Min 150 mm
(6 Inches)
Figure 2-73. Minimum Distance to Cabinetry
To ensure adequate ventilation, there should be a free space, 150 mm (6") high, between the top
of the cabinet and the ceiling, the underside of any beam, duct or similar object over the cabinet.
When cables enter the cabinet from above, the space available should be at least 1000 mm (40")
high to provide working space, see Figure 2-73.
3BSE 008 878R301 2-77

Rear and Side Clearance
(1.6 inches)
Min 40 mm
Standoffs for Wall
Mounted Enclosures
Min 40 mm
(1.6 inches)
Figure 2-74. Minimum Distance from Rear and Side of Cabinet to a Wall
The distance between the rear and the sides of the cabinet and an adjacent wall should be no less
than 40 mm (1.6 inches), see Figure 2-74. This will ensure good ventilation.
The free space in front of the cabinet should be the width of the door plus aisle width.
Wall mounted enclosures should use standoffs equal to the clearance requirements.
2.2 Setup
After some general information in the following section, you will find individual setup
descriptions for different parts of the system. The information is given under the following
headings if relevant.
• Assembly
• Electric Installation (including Power Supply)
• Functional Measures
• Preparation for Start Up
Standard installation drawings, terminal diagram forms, and connection documents for site
preparation and installation of electrical equipment may apply also.
Equipment Required
The following is a minimum requirement:
• Ordinary hand tools
• Universal instrument, for example, digital multimeter.
• Necessary parts of the documentation listed in Section 1.4, Related Documentation.
• Specific documentation enclosed with the equipment, drawings and so on.
2-78 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 2.2.1 Safety Regulations
2.2.1 Safety Regulations

The following instructions are to be followed when installing and operating an S800 I/O system
to minimize the risks of injury to personnel and damage to the equipment. Local statutory
regulations, to the degree that they are more strict than the following are to take precedence.
2.2.1.1 Personnel Safety

The following are to be observed:
• Voltage supply of a cabinet shall never be switched on during installation work.
DANGER
Work with care when supply voltage is applied in the system. The voltage in
the cabinet can cause serious injury or death.
• All who work in the installation must know the location of the main power supply switch
to the equipment and how it is operated.
• When the subsections of the process are checked and a test run has been performed,
interlocking links are to be checked by a responsible engineer. All assembly personnel
must be informed about test runs to be performed.
• Process technicians are to be present when testing and operating the process device.
2.2.1.2 Equipment Safety

Observe the following safety rules:
• Avoid direct contact with the bus connector of the I/O modules.
• Always switch off the voltage before extracting a module which can not to be exchanged
with power applied, for example, processor units, extension cable adaptors and extension
cables, see Chapter 5, Maintenance. Wait a sufficient time for the capacitors to discharge
before removing a power sensitive module.
• Switch off voltage to the system, unplug the connectors to the processor units and remove
all I/O modules before electrical welding is performed on or near the system.
2.2.2 Grounding
This section describes where and how grounding is to be done in a cabinet or small enclosures.
You should be aware of the common ABB Installation Rules manual which establishes the
principals of grounding, knowing when an equipment, a circuit or a cable shield should be
grounded. It also gives alternative solutions adapted to specific plant requirements.
General
When cabinets are connected together, it forms a stable ground plane for all equipment installed.
The signal processing electronics in the controller as well as all interference suppression for
external signals is normally directly grounded to chassis and plant ground.
3BSE 008 878R301 2-79

Protective Ground
The main power source distribution normally includes a protected ground wire. This shall be
connected to the PE (Protected Earth) terminal block on a primary power switch unit. Use cable
lug connectors when connecting on the ground screw.
Ground Line
The cabinet is to be grounded with a copper lead (≥35 mm, 2 AWG) to the plant ground line.
Cabinets in a row shall be individually connected to the plant ground plane as required.
Grounding of Process Cable Shields

Process cable shields are, as applicable, are attached directly to the cabinet ground.
Grounding of Communication Cable Shields

The shields of communication cables are to be connected directly to the modem or FCI module
in an I/O station. This pertains to conventional shielded multi-lead cable. Please refer to the
Advant Fieldbus 100 User’s Guide for more information.
Grounding of Process Signals

There are three applications of signal grounding directly to chassis. (High frequency grounding
by capacitors are always provided and not discussed in this context).
• Refer to Section 2.1.8, Process Connection for the grounding requirements of each I/O
module.
• Signals can be commonly grounded by grounding the reference 0V of centralized power
supply for loads and sensing. Such a power supply system must be grounded to the same
ground line as the system. If the power supply unit is placed in the I/O cabinet, 0V is
grounded to the protective ground screw. Field grounding of loads and sensors cannot be
done.
• Individual grounding of a signal in the controller cabinet is possible (if it is applicable with
respect to I/O module type). The requirement for such an application, is when the signal is
not grounded elsewhere, for example, not locally grounded at load/sensor or not grounded
via a power supply grounding.
NOTE
Do not ground a signal at different points in the plant.
2-80 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 2.2.3 Cable Routing in Enclosures
Grounding of Additional Equipment

Additional power supply units of different types used by loads or sensor, and modems and so
on, and are located in the controller or I/O cabinet, shall be treated in the following way with
respect to grounding:
• The apparatus chassis (or PE terminal) shall be connected to the protective ground or
directly to cabinet chassis.
• Grounding of power supply 0V should be considered. If desirable the 0V terminal can be
connected to chassis. Use preferably the protective ground screw.
2.2.3 Cable Routing in Enclosures

There are some restrictions in mixing cables within a cabinet due to the risk of interference.To
describe the simple rules applicable at site installation, cables are divided in categories. See
Table 2-2 and the following rules for custom cabinet installations:
• Within a category cables can be arbitrary mixed.
• The distance between cables belonging to different categories shall be kept > 50 mm (2").
• “Cabinet internal” junctions have their own defined spaces for routing.
Distance to other cables should always be > 50 mm (2").
Table 2-2. Cable Categories in a Cabinet
Cable / Application Category

Power supply (a.c. / d.c.) 1
Process I/O, shielded and unshielded cables 2
Communication (AF 100) 2
ModuleBus extension to S800 I/O 3
2.2.4 Power Connection
General
Cabinets erected side by side including a controller and I/O configuration are regarded as a unit,
and are connected to the a.c. (d.c.) power in one single connection point, the centralized Power
Switch unit. The switch unit is normally located in the controller cabinet bay.
3BSE 008 878R301 2-81

The power can be distributed to the I/O cabinets as required by the installed equipment
(Figure 2-75).
Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2
Controller S800 I/O
Power Supp.
Power Power
Supp. Supp.
Power
Switch
Power
Switch
Phase
Neutral
Phase
Neutral Ground
3-wire cables
Ground Cabinet Enclosure
Figure 2-75. Power Supply Connection and Distribution
2.2.5 I/O Station with S800 I/O
Assembly
Information regarding location of equipment may be found in the documentation delivered with
the equipment. Some general I/O Station information is presented below.
• Install a DIN-rail sized to allow installation of the FCI, ModuleBus Modem, MTUs,
terminator and power supply(s). Some extra DIN-rail should be allowed for expansion or
the moving of the FCI, ModuleBus Modem or MTUs during maintenance.
• Install the FCI, ModuleBus Modem on the left end of the DIN-rail leaving some room to
the left to allow removable from the first MTU. If vertical mounting is used, leave room to
the top of the FCI for removal.
• Install the first MTU to the right (below) of the FCI or ModuleBus Modem and all other
MTUs to the right (below) of the preceding MTU.
• The last MTU (12 max.) connected to the FCI or ModuleBus Modem will have the TB807
Terminator installed in the ModuleBus connector.
• Set each MTU mechanical keys to the correct setting for the I/O module that will be
located there.
• The power supply modules may be located on the same DIN-rail as the FCI or ModuleBus
Modem and the I/O modules, but should be always located on a horizontal DIN-rail
because of its weight.
• Install an end stop before the first module and after the last one on the DIN-rail.
• Then proceed with the electrical connections as necessary.
2-82 3BSE 008 878R301

Electric Installation
AF 100 Fieldbus Connection
The AF100 Fieldbus is connected to the terminals of a CI810 or a CI820. The incoming fieldbus
twisted pair cable is connected to a plug connector with four terminals, two for the signal wires
and two for the shield. The incoming and out going fieldbus signal + conductors are terminated
in the + terminal. The - conductors are both terminated in the - terminal. The cable shield drain
wires are terminated in the two SH terminals and they must be bridged to ensure a continuous
shield connection in case the fieldbus plug is removed from the FCI. Keep the drain wires as
short as possible (< 50mm). If the unit is at the end of the bus, a terminator (TK501Vxxx) must
be connected like the a cable would. Please refer to the Advant Fieldbus 100 User’s Guide for
complete details.
Profibus-DP Fieldbus Connection
The Profibus-DP fieldbus is connected to the terminals of a CI830. The incoming fieldbus cable
is connected to a 9 pin D-way connector. If the unit is at the end of the bus, a connector with
termination must be used. Please refer to the Profibus-DP Advant Controller 400 Series User’s
Guide for complete details.
I/O Clusters (1-7)
The TB820 ModuleBus Modem of an I/O cluster is connected to the CI810 FCI or TB815
Interconnection Unit by Optical Expansion cables. The optical ModuleBus can be a simplex,
duplex or mixed design.
• Optical cable length between each cluster must not exceed 15 meters with plastic fiber
cable and 200m with glass fiber cable.
• Refer to Section 3.1.3, TB820 ModuleBus Modem for optical ModuleBus configurations.
Distributed MTUs
The MTUs are joined to the I/O modules with plug-in connectors. An MTU can be extended to
another MTU by using a ModuleBus extension cable. The following instructions apply:
• Cable length and ModuleBus length must not exceed 2.5 meters.
• Cable routing in cabinets, see Section 2.2.3, Cable Routing in Enclosures.
Process Signals
Process signals are connected to the MTUs according to site installation drawings.
The following instructions also should apply:
• Cable routing in cabinets, see Section 2.2.3, Cable Routing in Enclosures.
• Grounding of cable shields and Process signals, see Section 2.2.2, Grounding.
A carefully done electrical installation is the basis for future interference-free operation.
3BSE 008 878R301 2-83

Functional Measures
Address Jumpering
All S800 I/O modules are automatically set to the correct addresses by the ModuleBus
interconnection scheme.
The CI810 FCI module station address should be set to the assigned AF 100 station number set
by the station address switches. Refer to Section 1.7.1.1, CI810/CI810A Fieldbus
Communication Interface as to location of address switches.
The ModuleBus Modem cluster address should be set to the assigned cluster number by the
cluster address switch. Refer to Section 1.7.1.6, TB820 ModuleBus Modem.
Preparation for Start-up

Check of the External Wiring
The level of workmanship must be judged case by case, and the results will determine the need
for a check of all connections before the system is powered up. It is possible to check, with a
buzzer, that the external wiring to the process equipment is correct and that all conductors are
intact. The check of the field wiring should be done before the I/O modules are installed. It is
also possible, without activating the control equipment, to check that transmitters, transducers
and actuators (including all process wiring) to see if they function correctly. This makes it
necessary to connect voltage to these units and develop suitable checking methods.
An alternative method, is to make an integrated check of the process equipment, wiring and the
corresponding controller functions. This should be done on a point by point basis. Preferably the
controller should be loaded with the application data base. The data base is then used as one
check-point. Status / values can be read and control signals to process devices can be simulated
by an operator station.
CAUTION
Be aware of the risk of “accidents”. Short-circuit and over-voltage can damage
the equipment, for example, a process I/O board or field element.
2.2.6 Checklists
The following checklists, Table 2-3 to Table 2-11, are a summary of important information that
should be checked on the Advant Controller.
2.2.6.1 Grounding Philosophy, Ground Plane System

Table 2-3. Grounding Philosophy, Grounding System
Item Concerning Action

Grounding philosophy Ground system Grounding only to power ground line network. Only
one ground system. No exceptions.
Ground plane system Design The ground line system of the installation must be
carefully installed and must incorporate the
switchgear.
2-84 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 2.2.6 Checklists
2.2.6.2 Process Cabling, Shielding, Grounding, Max. Length

Table 2-4. Process Cabling, Shielding, Grounding, Max. Length

Cables Prescribed type Communication cables
Pulse transducer cables
Shielded for AI Š 12 bit and for Low Level AI (RTD,
Pt, thermocouple), etc
Signal wire and return wire in same cable
Grounding: Should be made directly as it comes into the cabinet
Shielding: Single AI, AO, DI, DO,
shield Grounding: For AF 100 See the Advant Fieldbus 100 User’s
Communications Guide
pulse transducers
Cable without Grounding All signal circuits grounded at the same end
shield
A.C. digital inputs Max. cable length Approximately 200 m (656 ft.)
110V and 220V
Shield connections Connection Cable shields which are grounded in the cabinet
in radio proof must be immediately grounded when they enter the
cabinet cabinet
Unshielded cables Location In a metallic cable trunk
and shielded cables
not grounded in the
radio proof cabinet
3BSE 008 878R301 2-85

2.2.6.3 Power Supply

Table 2-5. Supply

Connection in cabinet Phase (check for correct voltage)
Return
Protective ground (if distributed)
Note: There must be no breaks in the protective
A.C. Power Mains
ground line to the PE terminal.
Fuse Incorporated in phase (phases) lines
Connection of network No unsuppressed load on same finale circuit from

distribution box
Use of interference- Special isolation transformer for electronics supply

sensitive power supply must be used
units
Internal distribution Incoming power supply (110, 230V) must be

separated from other cables by 50 mm (2") or more
D.C. (floating Grounding, supply Negative pole to PE terminal of cabinet directly at
battery) entry to cabinet. If grounding of the battery is not
permitted then an isolating d.c./d.c. converter is
required
D.C. (grounded Connection Via d.c./d.c. converter if not connected to the same
battery) ground network as the S800. A battery grounded to
the same ground as the S800, unless the battery is
local
I/O Station Supply Max. power output < 90% of regulator capacity
2.2.6.4 Lightning Protection

Table 2-6. Lightning Protection

Lightning Actions are compulsory for all circuits in:
protection Overhead lines
Cables that leave the general ground line network
2-86 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 2.2.6 Checklists
2.2.6.5 MTU, I/O Module

Table 2-7. MTU, I/O Module

Mounting rail Ground connection to If problems, check R < 100 mΩ, measured
(for MTUs) cabinet chassis via with equipment switched off and cables
mounting screws disconnected
MTU Ground connection DIN rail mounting screws (100 mm pitch)

fully tightened
Connections Quality Only correctly made, screwed or clamped

connections are approved
2.2.6.6 Cabinet, Internal Cables

Table 2-8. Cabinets, Internal Cables

Row of cabinets Electrical connection Through short 35 mm2 (2 AWG) copper
(grounding) conductors joining the PE terminals in each
cabinet.
Cabinet parts All parts electrically R < 100 mΩ
(plates) connected to each other
and to the copper bar
Grounding in Design Only a single grounding system for ABB
cabinet Advant equipment. NO EXCEPTIONS
Temperature in Max. permitted Max. permitted temperature for continued
cabinet temperature for continued operation in cabinet is +5 to +55°C
operation. (41 to 131°F).
Measured just below the I/O module.
Modules on compact MTUs on a vertical DIN
rail allow +5 to +40°C (41 to 104°F) ambient
temperature.
Radio emission Emission S800 equipment does not require radio
proof enclosures.
Shielded cable Design Communication, pulse transducers and
analog circuits for Low Level (RTD Pt,
thermocouples) must be shielded up to the
S800 I/O modules
Internal cables Routing See Section 2.2.3, Cable Routing in
Enclosures.
Check that there is no tension in the wiring.
3BSE 008 878R301 2-87

2.2.6.7 Communication, Communication Cables

Please refer to the Advant Fieldbus 100 User’s Guide for more information.
Table 2-9. Communication, Communication Cables

Communication Electrical connection Drain wire ð 50 mm (2") Directly connected
cables with shield (not to chassis at one point only along the fieldbus. All other
coaxial cables) points are connected to ground through a
capacitor. Please refer to the Advant
Fieldbus 100 User’s Guide for complete
details;
Max. permitted length Max. specified length must not be exceeded
Coaxial Electrical connection Galvanically grounded at one point only.

communication cables to chassis capacitive ground connection at all nodes.
AF100 modems provide capacitive
grounding. Radio proof enclosures may
require additional capacitive ground at cable
entry.
Max. length Max. specified length must not be exceeded
2.2.6.8 Environmental Data
Table 2-10. Immunity Requirements
Environmental
Standard Severity Level Test Class Test Signal Application
Phenomenon
Lightning IEC 1000-4-5 4kV CMV, 2kV NMV 4 1,2/50 - 8/20 us Power supply
2kV CMV, 1kV NMV 3 PI/O, Com.
Damped IEC 1000-4-12 1kV CMV, 0.5kV NMV 1 0,1; 1 MHz Power supply, PI/O. Com.
Oscillation
Fast transient IEC 1000-4-4 4 kV 4 Power supply.

2 kV PI/O, Com.
Continuous signal IEC 1000-4-6) 10V 3 PI/O, Com. Power supply
Voltage interruption IEC 255-11 20 ms 10-3000 ms Power supply
ESD IEC 1000-4-2 6 kV 3 Contact discharge

8 kV Air discharge
Electromagnetic IEC 1000-4-3 10V/m 3

field
Emission EN 55022 A
2-88 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 2.2.7 Final Procedure Before Start-up
2.2.6.9 Airborne Contaminants

Operation, Storage and Transportation
ISA 71.04-1985 class G2 and ITF SSG 4251 G2
Copper corrosion maximum 1000 Ångström, 28 days (1 month)
2.2.6.10 Miscellaneous
Table 2-11. Miscellaneous

Relays and contactors Suppression Cabling to non-suppressed inductive loads in
in cabinets ABB Advant cabinets must be kept more
than 100 mm (4") away from internal cables
Thermocouples Position of AI835 CJC RTD should be placed where the TCs’
“CJC” RTD Cold compensation cable is terminated.
Junction
Compensation)
Analog inputs / Type For externally grounded transmitters /

outputs receivers inputs must be differential or
isolated
2.2.6.11 External Cables

When selecting cables that are to be used in the plant environment, you should know that there
are some restrictions and rules to follow:
• Routing of communication cables.
• Mixing of signals and signal types within cables.
• Need of shielded cables.
Refer to Advant OCS Installation Rules for details.
2.2.7 Final Procedure Before Start-up

Remove all debris from the work performed and clean off all grease and dirt. Check that no
tools or assembly material are left in the cabinets. Vacuum clean the cabinets.
2.3 Shut-down Procedures

Before power is switched on, and start-up of the equipment, it is important to know how to shut-
down in different situations. This is described below.
3BSE 008 878R301 2-89


The instructions given in Section 2.2.1, Safety Regulations are applicable in all situations when
working with an Advant Controller and associated equipment. Please read the instructions
carefully.
DANGER
2.3.2 I/O Station
Emergency Shut Down

An emergency stop should always be available. It shall be controlled by local regulations. This
is a responsibility of the plant design and construction. The controller system does not supply
this special function.
Check the Location of the Emergency Stop and use it in an Emergency Situation.
From the electrical and functional point of view, an emergency stop will have the same
consequences to the controller and associated equipment as a safety shut down.
Safety Shut Down

The Advant Controller and its S800 I/O may be mounted in a row of joined cabinets and are
connected as a single unit to the mains power source. The I/O Station with S800 I/O may also be
located remotely in the process area and have its own power source. Safety shut down, by
disconnecting the controller or remote enclosure from the mains, can be carried out in two ways:
• As prescribed in the site planning Section 2.1.7, Power Requirements, there should be a
common safety switch installed within 3 m (10 feet) of the cabinets.
Check the Location of the Safety Switch and use it when working with the Equipment.
The safety switch should be arranged to shut down the power of not only the electronics system
but also transmitters, transducers and other process devices. In other words, a total power shut
down for the plant section controlled.
NOTE
Since the safety switch is a plant component this document can not stipulate and
describe the design exactly. Please check the plant documentation in this respect
carefully. Instructions, as to the extent of the power shut down, should preferably
be attached to the safety switch.
Regardless of the way, the results and consequences of a shut down will be:
– Zero output to the process devices (S800 I/O).
– De-energized output relays (S800 I/O).
– The system is ready for a restart. Restart can be performed when the reason for the
shut down is cleared away.
2-90 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 2.4 Start-up Procedures
Manual Stop
Beyond the most drastic way of shut down, by disconnecting power, there is an other way to
“stop” the controller and the S800 I/O.
Stop program execution is obtained by the following method:
• Using the operator’s interface on the Advant Controller’s Processor Module front.
– Set mode selector in the STOP position.
– Push the ENTER button and the system will stop.
The results of the manual stop method:
– Zero output or OSP state to the process devices.
– De-energized or OSP state of output relays.
– The system is ready for a restart. Restart can be performed by placing the Mode
selector in the AUTO position, and pushing the ENTER button.
After necessary measures, a restart can take place.
2.4 Start-up Procedures

This section includes power up for the very first definition/configuration of the system
resources. A visible result of the start-up procedures, are that all red LED on module fronts are
turned off and all green LED are turned on.

The instructions given in Section 2.2.1, Safety Regulations are applicable in all situations when
working with S800 I/O and associated equipment. Please read the instructions carefully.
DANGER
2.4.2 Controller and I/O

When the set-up activities are finished and after using Section 2.2.6, Checklists, the equipment
will be ready for start-up, but first read the following security guidelines before proceeding.
Security Guidelines
During the power up of S800 I/O there is always a risk of spurious output signals to the process
due to a faulty hardware module.
Critical process devices should always be identified and isolated in some way if the process is
energized. Examples of different methods are:
• Disconnected output power supply.
• Disconnect the process cables from outputs.
• Remove output S800 I/O modules.
Succeeding operations after power up, including necessary tests, must be performed carefully.
3BSE 008 878R301 2-91

2.4.2.1 Power Up on S800 I/O

S800 I/O will start under four different conditions.
1. Without configuration and without communication with the controller. Start the first time
or after a long power off.
2. Without configuration but with communication with the controller. Start the first time or
after a long power off.
3. With configuration but without communication with the controller. Start after a short
power off.
4. With configuration and with communication with the controller. Start after a short power
off.
Below follows a description how to start and how S800 behaves during start-up under different
conditions.
1. Check that the circuit breakers on the power switch units are switched off.
2. Switch on the mains power, and check for correct mains voltage with a multimeter.
3. Switch on the circuit breaker on the power switch unit(s).
Without configuration and without communications with the controller:
See timing diagram Figure 2-76.
Indications on FCI
F (fault): “on” at power up and “off” after self-test ok
R (run): “off”
P (pow ok): “on” if power supply ok
T1: “off”
T2: “off”
PR “on” (only primary FCI in a redundant configuration)
DU “off” (both FCI in a redundant configuration)
Indications on I/O modules
F (fault): “on”
R (run): “off”
W (warning): “off”
O (osp only outputs): “off”
Without configuration but with communications with the controller:
Indications on FCI
R (run): “off” at power up and “on” after configuration ok
and commanded operational from the controller
(can take about 1 to 4 minutes)
T1: “on” if cable 1 ok
2-92 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 2.4.2 Controller and I/O
The backup will be started up after the I/O. When the backup has started
DU “on” (both FCI in a redundant configuration)
F (fault): “on” at power up and “off” after the first access
from the FCI
R (run): “off” at power up and “on” for AI, DI after configuration and
for AO, DO after configuration and commanded operational
from the controller
W (warning): “off” at power up and after module operational
updated from the module
O (outputs only): “off” at power up and after module operational
With configuration but without communications with the controller:
Indications on FCI
R (run): “off”
T1: “off”
T2: “off”
F (fault): “on” at power up and “off” after the first access from
the FCI
R (run): “off” at power up and “on” for AI, DI after configuration from
the FCI. AO and DO remains in “off”
W (warning): “off” at power up and after module operational
O (osp only outputs): “off”
With configuration and communications with the controller:
Indications on FCI
R (run): “off” at power up and “on” after configuration and
commanded operational from the controller.
(can take about 1 to 4 minutes)
The backup will be started up after the I/O. When the backup has started
DU “on” (both FCI in a redundant configuration)
3BSE 008 878R301 2-93


F (fault): “on” at power up and “off” after the first access from
the FCI
R (run): “off” at power up and “on” for AI, DI after configuration and
for AO,DO after configuration and commanded operational
from the controller
W (warning): “off” at power up and after the module operational
O (osp only outputs): “off” at power up and after module is operational
it is handled by the module
Power up of backup FCI in a running system
Indications on FCI
Primary:
F (fault): “off”
R (run): “on”
P (pow ok): “on”
T1: “on”
T2: “on”
PR “on”
DU “off” (on when the backup is running)
Backup
F (fault): “off”
R (run): “off” (on when the backup is running)
P (pow ok): “on”
T1: “on”
T2: “on”
PR “off”
DU “off” (on when the backup is running)
2-94 3BSE 008 878R301

FCI
T1/T2
DU (both)
PR (primary)
PR (backup)
I/O module
OSP
Power up INIT in
S800 I/O FCI
Figure 2-76. Power-up Timing Diagram, No Configuration and No Communications to Controller
3BSE 008 878R301 2-95

FCI FCI operational
T1
T2
PR (primary)
DU (both)
PR (backup)
R (backup)
I/O module
R (AI, DI)
R (AO, DO)
W (AI, DI)
W, OSP (AO, DO)
Start of I/O
Power up INIT INIT
S800 I/O in FCI backup
Figure 2-77. Power-up Timing Diagram, No Configuration and Communications to Controller
2-96 3BSE 008 878R301

FCI
T1/T2
DU (both)
PR (primary)
PR (backup)
I/O module
R (AI, DI)
R (AO, DO)
W (AI, DI)
W (AO, DO)
Start of I/O
Power up INIT
S800 I/O in FCI
Figure 2-78. Power-up Timing Diagram, With Configuration and No Communications to Controller
3BSE 008 878R301 2-97

FCI FCI operational
T1
T2
PR (primary)
DU (both)
PR (backup)
R (backup)
I/O module
R (AI, DI)
R (AO, DO)
W (AI, DI)
W, OSP (AO, DO)
Start of I/O
Power up INIT INIT
S800 I/O in FCI backup
Figure 2-79. Power-up Timing Diagram, With Configuration and Communications to Controller
2-98 3BSE 008 878R301

FCI
Primary
F
P
T1/T2
PR
DU
Backup
P
T1/T2
PR
DU
Power-up INIT
backup backup
Figure 2-80. Power-up Timing Diagram, Power-up of Backup in a Running System
3BSE 008 878R301 2-99

2.5 Product Verification

As the test requirements vary considerably between different installations, the system engineer
is responsible for determining the functional requirements which apply.
Equipment Required
The following equipment is a minimum requirement:
• Necessary parts of the documentation listed in Section 1.3 Related Documentation.
• Specific documentation enclosed with the equipment.
In more complex installations which include closed loop control some additional test equipment
can be necessary/practical at tuning:
• Access to an operator station for loop tuning.
2.5.1 General
A general description of how to set the controller in operation and start the execution of
application program is presented in the Advant Controller manuals. Once the system is started
and ready for operation the I/O can be checked.
General information for some functional tests, which can be made to verify the S800 I/O are
presented in the following sections.
2.5.1.1 Check of Process Input/Output Systems

With the application program running in the controller, the inputs and outputs can be checked.
This should be done by using a signal by signal procedure. The data base is then used as a final
check-point.
It may be necessary to simulate digital and analog input signals which are normally generated
by the process. Suitable methods are:
• Digital inputs: Activate the input by connecting a voltage which corresponds to the
nominal value of the input. The “1” and “0” status is simulated by opening and closing the
terminal connections. Activate the input as close to the process transducer as possible to
test the process wiring as far as possible. Manual operation of transducers, for example,
limit switches can also give the required change for the input signals.
• Analog input signals: Use a signal generator for analog signals. A simple test coupling can
be used as a voltage source. This can consist of a potentiometer across a suitable voltage
source which gives +/- voltage. A current source, which can give sufficient current, for
example, 20 mA, is required for current signals. Analog input test signals should be
entered as close to the transmitter/transducer as possible to test the process wiring.
Digital and analog output signals are obtained by setting the required values in the data base via
the Advant Station Tool.
2-100 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 2.5.1 General
Input Signals
Figure 2-81 shows where an input signal can be checked in an S800 I/O application.
DI modules provide a field input connector and DI channel LED’s, and AI modules provide a
field input connector.
Operator Station
or
Advant Station Tool
Process Advant Controller
MTU
FCI
Process Fieldbus
Input Data Base
Device Interface
Module
DI/AI ch.
Figure 2-81. Block Diagram of S800 I/O Input Channel, Test Points
• Digital Input Signals

A digital input signal can be checked as shown in Figure 2-81. Use the following
procedure as a guide:
– Simulate the digital input signal as close to the process transducer as possible or
activate the transducer itself.
– Check that the corresponding yellow LED on the input module concerned illuminates
and that the change is shown on the display screen in the operator station or Advant
Station Tool.
– Change the input signal to a low level. Check that the yellow LED on the input board
extinguishes and that the display value has changed.
3BSE 008 878R301 2-101

• Analog Input Signals

Figure 2-81 shows where an analog input signal of an input channel can be checked.
Proceed as follows to check an analog input channel:
– Simulate the analog input signal as close to the process transmitter/transducer as
possible.
– Check that the simulated signal is available at the screw terminal of the
corresponding connection.
– Check that the value shown on the display screen corresponds to the simulated value
set in the field. Check the complete signal range.
Output Signals
Figure 2-82 shows where an output signal can be checked in an S800 I/O application.
DO Modules provide a field output connector and DO channel LED’s.
AO Modules provide a field output connector.
Operator Station
or
Advant Station Tool
Advant Controller Process
FCI MTU
Fieldbus Process
Data Base Interface Output
Device
Module
DO/AO ch.
Figure 2-82. Block Diagram of S800 I/O Output Channel, Test Points
2-102 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 2.5.2 Final Check
• Digital Output Signals

Typical digital output channels and where the signals can be tested are shown in
Figure 2-82. Digital output signals in a specific plant are shown in the terminal diagrams
for the plant.
Proceed as follows to check digital channels:
– Check that the corresponding output shows that it is set to on. Then check the value
on the screw terminal block of the corresponding MTU, and if practical, at the
process device also.
– Check that the corresponding yellow LED on the digital output board illuminates.
• Analog Output Signals
When checking analog output signals, use a multimeter to test for an output signal over the
complete signal range.
Typical analog output channels and where the signals can be tested are shown in
Figure 2-82. Analog output signals in a specific plant are shown in the connection
diagrams for the plant.
Proceed as follows to check analog channels:
– Set the output value, and check that the corresponding output shows this value on the
display. Then measure the value on the screw terminal block of the corresponding
MTU, and if practical, at the process.
– When checking analog output signals use a multimeter to test that an output signal is
obtained over the complete signal range.
2.5.2 Final Check

When the test of the control system is complete, and the plant functions satisfactorily, the
following actions should be taken:
• Check that all S800 I/O modules are properly inserted in the MTUs.
• Check that all terminal screws on MTUs are properly tightened and that all grounds are
good.
• Check that all cable connectors are properly mated.
• Check that all cable coverings or tie wraps are installed properly to avoid cable wear.
• Check that no tools or debris from installation remain in the cubicle. Clean the cabinet.
3BSE 008 878R301 2-103

2-104 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 3.1 Design Considerations
Chapter 3 Configuration
3.1 Design Considerations

This section provides guidelines and other information that you need to know before designing
and configuring the S800 I/O. This information includes an overview of the hardware and
database configuration guidelines.
3.1.1 I/O Station Layout Hardware Configuration Guidelines

The S800 I/O is DIN rail mounted. The rail can be any practical length to fit the needs of that
particular I/O Station. A S800 I/O cluster can use a maximum of 2.5 (8.2 feet) meters on the
rail. This is the maximum length of the ModuleBus from the FCI, TB815 Interconnection Unit,
or ModuleBus Modem to the ModuleBus terminator. See Figure 3-1 for maximum layout of
station using Compact MTUs.
Cable Adaptor, out Cable Adaptor, in Terminator

TB805 TB806 TB807
84 mm 58.5 mm
(3.3”) (2.3”)
TK801V0xx
Bus Cable
20 mm
22 mm (0.8”)
(0.86”)
Maximum 2.5 meters (98.4”)
162 mm
(6.4”)
806 mm (37.7”)
Figure 3-1. Maximum Layout of I/O Cluster with Compact MTUs
3BSE 008 878R301 3-1

See Figure 3-2 for maximum layout of I/O cluster using Extended MTUs.
467.5 mm (18.4)
84 84 120.5
(3.3) 22 mm
(0.86)
162 mm
(6.37)
120.5
(4.74)
Bus Cable
Length = 300 mm
(11.8)
1550 mm
(61)
1126.5 mm
(44.4)
mm
(inches)
20
(0.8) 109 mm
(4.3)
Figure 3-2. Maximum Layout of I/O Cluster with Extended MTUs
3-2 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 3.1.1 I/O Station Layout Hardware Configuration Guidelines
An I/O cluster may be divided into smaller parts to fit a particular requirement, but the 2.5 meter
(8.2 feet) maximum must be observed at all times. The cluster may be distributed because of
space limitations or to keep signal types together. See Figure 3-3 for a example of an I/O cluster
divided up into four groups.
Terminator
TB807
Digital Inputs
Analog Inputs
TK801V0xx
Cable Adaptor, out

TB805
Cable Adaptor, in
TB806
Analog Outputs Digital Outputs
Figure 3-3. I/O Cluster in Small Groups
The first unit of the I/O Station is the Fieldbus Communications Interface (FCI). It connects to
the Advant Fieldbus 100 and is the communications interface to the I/O modules. The FCI
controls the ModuleBus and provides power to the logic-side of the I/O modules. The FCI is a
node on the Advant Fieldbus 100 and must be set to the correct address. Refer to Section
3.1.2.1, Address Switches for more information.
The FCI connects to the first MTU. Additional MTUs connect to each other or through the
ModuleBus Extension cable, up to a maximum of 12. The ModuleBus is terminated by the
TB807 Bus Terminator module. The I/O Modules are installed onto the MTUs and connected to
the process in the field.
3BSE 008 878R301 3-3

Redundant FCIs
An I/O Station with redundant CI820 FCIs requires that the ModuleBus Extension cable be
connected to the TB815 Interconnection Unit and then to the first I/O Module. The maximum
ModuleBus length from the TB815 to the ModuleBus terminator is 2.5 meters. See Figure 3-4
for layout of a station.
Terminator
CI820 FCI TB807
TK801V0xx
TB815
Interconnection
Unit
Cable adaptor, in
TB806
Figure 3-4. I/O Station with Redundant CI820 FCIs
3-4 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 3.1.1 I/O Station Layout Hardware Configuration Guidelines
I/O Clusters
I/O clusters 1-7 connect to the Optical ModuleBus port on the FCI or TB815 Interconnection
Unit by Optical Expansion cables. Each I/O station can have up to 24 I/O modules and each I/O
cluster can have up to 12 I/O modules. The 24V power supply has to be connected to each
cluster. See Figure 3-5 for an example of optical ModuleBus Expansion cabling.
CI810 FCI CI820 FCI
Base I/O Cluster TB815 Base I/O Cluster

Interconnection
Optical ModuleBus Unit Optical ModuleBus
Port TB810 Port TB810
I/O Cluster 1 I/O Cluster 1

ModuleBus Modem TB820 ModuleBus Modem TB820
Figure 3-5. Optical ModuleBus Extension
3BSE 008 878R301 3-5

3.1.2 CI810/CI810A/CI820/CI830 FCI

The FCI needs to be connected to the Advant Fieldbus 100 or Profibus-DP and have an address
selected. It is also connected to a 24V d.c. power source to provide power to the I/O Station.
Also refer to Section 3.2, Capacity and Performance for information on how to estimate the
fieldbus and power loading of each I/O station configuration.
3.1.2.1 Address Switches

The CI810/CI810A is equipped with two rotary switches used as station address selectors for
Advant Fieldbus 100 connection. If the station address is not in the range of 01 to 79, the FCI
enters the error state. There can be up to 32 stations per Advant Fieldbus 100 twisted-pair section.
Figure 3-6 shows the front panel of the CI810/CI810A.
F R
P
T1 T2
SERVICE
STN. ADDR.
4 56 Address
3 7 x 10
2 8 Switch #1
109 (Address 04
4 56
Address shown)
3 7x1
1) 2 8 Switch #2
CI810 109
SWX.X/Y
AF100 Tx Rx
L+ L+ SA 1 2
L- L- SB
+ + Tx
- -
SH SH
SH SH Rx
1) or CI810A
Figure 3-6. Front Panel of the CI810/CI810A FCI
3-6 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 3.1.2 CI810/CI810A/CI820/CI830 FCI
The CI820 also has two rotary switches used as station address selectors for Advant Fieldbus 100
connection. Both CI820s must have the same station address (in the range of 01 to 79) for
redundant operation. There can be up to 32 stations per Advant Fieldbus 100 twisted-pair section.
Figure 3-7 shows the front panel of the CI820.
F R
P
T1 T2
PR DU
STN. ADDR.
4 56 Address
3 7 x 10
2 8 Switch #1
109 (Address 04
4 56 shown)
3 7 x1 Address
CI820
2
109
8 Switch #2
L+ L+ SA AF100
L- L- SB
+
-
SH
SH
Figure 3-7. Front Panel of the CI820 FCI
3BSE 008 878R301 3-7

The CI830 is also equipped with two rotary switches used as station address selectors for
Profibus-DP connection. If the station address is not in the range of 01 to 99, the FCI enters the
error state. There can be up to 32 stations per Profibus-DP segment. Figure 3-8 shows the front
panel of the CI830.
F R
P
RX TX
PROFIBUS
SERVICE
STN. ADDR.
4 56 Address
3 7 x 10
2 8 Switch #1
109 (Address 04
5
4 6 shown)
3 7x1 Address
CI830
2
109
8 Switch #2
SWX.X/Y PROFIBUS Tx Rx
L+
Tx
L-
SA
SB Rx
Figure 3-8. Front Panel of the CI830 FCI
3-8 3BSE 008 878R301

3.1.2.2 Advant Fieldbus 100 Connections

The FCI connects to the Advant Fieldbus 100 via the terminals on the front. The fieldbus wires
are connected to removable terminal headers. This allows the FCI to be removed from the
Advant Fieldbus 100 without disconnecting the other nodes of the fieldbus. The Advant
Fieldbus 100 can have dual media which is connected to channels 1 and 2 of the CI810/CI810A
FCI or to each CI820 for redundant FCIs. See Figure 3-9 for CI810/CI810A connection details
and Figure 3-10 for the CI820 connections.
4 56 1) or CI810A
1) 3 7x1
2 8
CI810 109
Channel 2
AF100 Tx Rx (X3)
L+ L+ SA 11 2
L- L- SB
FCI + + Tx
- -
SH SH
SH SH Rx
Terminal
Channel 1 Headers
(X2)
1
2
3
4 1
Fieldbus Cable #1 3
2
4
Fieldbus Shield Jumper

Cable #2
Figure 3-9. CI810/CI810A FCI Fieldbus Terminal Connections
Table 3-1 shows the fieldbus connection assignments.
Table 3-1. FCI Fieldbus Connections, Channel 1 X2, Channel 2 X3
Pin Designation Description

1 + + Signal
2 - - Signal
3 SH Shield (1)
4 SH Shield
(1) Should be jumpered to Pin 4 Shield
3BSE 008 878R301 3-9

STN. ADDR STN. ADDR

4 56 4 56
3 7 x 10 3 7 x 10
2 8 2 8
109 109
4 56 4 56
3 7x1 3 7x1
2 8 2 8
CI820 109 TB815 CI820 109
L- L- SB L- L- SB
+ Tx +
- -
SH SH
SH Rx SH
1
2
3 1
4 2
Fieldbus Cable #1 3
4
Fieldbus
Cable #2
Figure 3-10. CI820 Redundant FCIs - Fieldbus Terminal Connections
Table 3-2. CI820 FCI Fieldbus Connections

1 + + Signal
2 - - Signal
3 SH Shield (1)
4 SH Shield
(1) Should be jumpered to Pin 4 Shield
3-10 3BSE 008 878R301

3.1.2.3 Advant Fieldbus 100 Twisted Pair Connection

The Advant Fieldbus 100 segment that connects to the CI810 or CI820s of an S800 I/O Station
uses shielded twisted pair cables. This twisted pair segment comes from either a TC512, TC516
or a modem. There can be up to 32 stations on a twisted pair segment of the Advant
Fieldbus 100, and the segment can be from 4 meters (13’) minimum and up to 750 meters
(2450’) long. Figure 3-11 shows a single segment connected to a TC512 modem and 1 CI810
FCI. Connection to the Advant Fieldbus 100 and each FCI can be made through a Advant
Fieldbus 100 Connection Unit (TC505). The TC505 can be DIN rail mounted.
TC512
TC 512
CI810 F R
P
T1 T2
P
CI522 Note: TX
RX
CI520 should be X4
CI520
connected with SDB X4
F R cable TK515/TK593
SERVICE STN. ADDR.
4 56
X3 + 3 7 x 10
2 8
- 109
X8 LDB
SH X3 3
4 56
7x1
SH CI810 2 8
109
Modem Cable X1
24V
1 L1+
2 L- X1 AF100 Tx Rx
L+ L+ SA 1 2
X2 L2+ L- L- SB
24V L- X2 + +
X9 TK803/TK804 1 2 3 - -
Tx
SH SH
Rx
1 2 3 SH SH
24V 24V
_ _ Tap Cable _ _
TC505
TC501V150
Termination + SH SH + + SH SH +
Unit TC501V150
+ SH SH + + SH SH +
GND S2 S1
4 m (13’) minimum
_ _
750 m (2450’) maximum _ _
S1 S2 GND
Ground connection
Trunk Cable at one end only
Figure 3-11. Typical Advant Fieldbus 100 Twisted Pair Segment Connections -
Single Cable Media
At the beginning and end of each Advant Fieldbus 100 twisted pair segment a TC501V150
Termination Unit is required. The bus cable must be grounded, but in one end only. This is done
by grounding the termination unit GND wire. Dual media requires the same termination
principles for each cable.
NOTE
For the main trunk cable, a twisted pair cable type (IBM Type 1) similar to Belden
number 9182 is recommended and for the local tap cable a double twisted pair
(2-pairs) cable (IBM Type 6A) similar to Belden number 1215A should be used.
For detail information about cables, please refer to the Advant Fieldbus 100
User’s Guide.
3BSE 008 878R301 3-11

Figure 3-12 shows the connections for dual media to an I/O Station with redundant FCIs.
ABB TC 516
CI522
P RX F R F R
No.1 TX I TX II P
M
O
P
TC516 ST I ST II
PR
T1 T2
DU
D
U
L
T1
PR
T2
DU
E
B
CI522 U
S
CI52x
F R X4 I
Modem Cable
TK803/TK804 SERVICE SERVICE
X8 CI52x
X5 II
STN. ADDR STN. ADDR

4 5 6 4 5 6
3 7 3 7
+ 2 8 x 10 2 8 x 10
1 0 9 1 0 9
- AF 100
X3 4 5 6 4 5 6
SH TWP 3 7 3 7
X9 2 8 x1 2 8 x1
SH CI820 1 0 9 TB815 CI820 1 0 9
24V
L1+
X1
L- L+ L+ SA AF100 L+ L+ SA AF100
L- L- SB L- L- SB
L2+
X2 + +
L- Tx
- -
SH SH
SH Rx SH
24V 24V
Tap Cable
_ _
Tap Cable
TC505 _ _
_ _
+ SH SH + + SH SH +
+ SH SH +
TC505
TC501V150
+ SH SH + + SH SH +
+ SH SH +
GND S2 S1
_ _
4 m (13’) minimum _ _
S1 S2 GND
_ _
CI522 750 m (2450’) maximum S1 S2 GND
TC501V150
No.2 Ground connection
Termination
Unit at one end only
CI522 ABB TC 516
F R
P RX Trunk Cable
TX I TX II
TC516 ST I ST II
X8 CI52x
X4 I
CI52x
X5 II
X9
Modem Cable Tap Cable
TK803/TK804 +
- AF 100
X3
SH TWP
SH
1 L1+24V
X1
2 L-
_ _
L2+
X2
L-
Note: + SH SH +
CI522 No. 2 should be

located in a different
+ SH SH +
Trunk Cable
_ _
SC510 associated
with a PM510 CPU(s)
Figure 3-12. Dual Twisted Pair Advant Fieldbus 100 Media to Redundant FCIs
3-12 3BSE 008 878R301

Figure 3-13 illustrates the termination of the Advant Fieldbus 100 twisted pair cable. It shows
the termination in the first and the last stations. At the first station the terminator GND wire is
connected to ground. At the last station the terminator GND wire is not connected at all. It is
only the outermost, that is, the first and the last stations, on the bus segment that are terminated.
To first Tap
Station To last
Station IBM Type 6 Cable
Drain Wire (2 - pairs)
(shield)
< 50 mm
_ _ _ _
TC503 TC505 Connection Unit
Termination + SH SH + + SH SH +
Unit TC503
Termination
+ SH SH +
Unit
+ SH SH +
GND S2 S1
_ _ Trunk _ _
IBM Type 1 Cable S1 S2 GND
(1 - pair)
Drain Wire GND

(shield) connection in
< 50 mm one end only
Max. 750 m (2450 ft)
Figure 3-13. Connection Details to the TC505
For detail information on designing the Advant Fieldbus 100, please refer to the Advant
Fieldbus 100 User’s Guide which describes the equipment and contains information required to
install and commission the system.
3BSE 008 878R301 3-13

3.1.2.4 Profibus-DP Connections

The FCI connects to the Profibus-DP via the 9 pin D-way connector on the front. This allows
the FCI to be removed from the Profibus-DP without disconnecting the other nodes of the
fieldbus. See Figure 3-14 for CI830 connection details.
109
4 56
3 7x1
2 8
CI830 109
PROFIBUS Tx Rx
FCI L+
Tx
L-
SA
SB Rx
Profibus Cable
Figure 3-14. CI830 FCI Profibus-DP Terminal Connections
Table 3-3. FCI Profibus-DP Connections

1 Shield Shield/protective ground
2 - Not used
3 RxD/TxD-P Receive/Transmit data - plus
4 - Not used
5 DGND Data ground
6 VP Supply voltage for the
terminating resistors
7 - Not used
8 RxD/TxD-N Receive/Transmit data - minus
9 - Not used
3-14 3BSE 008 878R301

3.1.2.5 Optical ModuleBus Connections

The CI810/CI810A FCI and the TB815 Interconnection Unit have a connection to the optical
ModuleBus expansion by the TB810/TB811 ModuleBus Optical Port connection on its front.
The fiber optic cable(s) connect to the Tx and Rx ports of the TB810TB811. The optical
ModuleBus can be connected to duplex or simplex fiber optic cables. See Figure 3-15 for
CI810/CI810A connection details.
0
4 56
3 7 x1
2 8
CI810 109
TB810/TB811
AF100
Optical ModuleBus Port
Tx Rx
L+ L+ SA 1 2
L- L- SB
FCI
+ + Rx
- -
SH SH
SH SH Tx
Duplex Fiber Optic Cable Connector
Simplex Fiber Optic Cable Connector
Figure 3-15. CI810/CI810A FCI Optical ModuleBus Connections
The TB815 Interconnection Unit also connects the same way to the TB810/TB811 ports.
The connector style, either simplex or duplex, all provide snap-in action when mated to the
TB810/TB811 ports. Simplex connectors are color coded to facilitate identification of
transmitter (Tx) or receiver (Rx) connections. Duplex connectors are keyed so that proper
orientation is ensured during insertion.
NOTE
For simplex cables by convention, the gray connector is the transmitter end and
the blue connector is the receiver end.
3.1.2.6 Power Supply Connections

The FCI requires 24V d.c. (19.2 - 30V) with a maximum current requirement of 1 Ampere. The
FCI can be powered by either a single or redundant power supply. If a redundant power supply
is used, the FCI can monitor the status of each supply. See Figure 3-16 for power supply
connections.
3BSE 008 878R301 3-15

4 56
3 7 x1
2 8
CI810 109
AF100
FCI L+ L+ SA 1 2
L- L- SB
+ + Tx
X1A - -
SH SH
X1B SH SH Rx
Terminal
Headers
Power Supply “B”

Monitor
3
2
Power Supply “A” 1
Monitor +24V d.c.
To MTUs
+24V d.c. 0V d.c. (I/O Modules)
3
2
1
From Power Supply
0V d.c.
Jumper
Figure 3-16. FCI Power Supply Connections
The power supply connections are the same for the CI810 and the CI820.
The incoming power can then be distributed to other FCIs or the I/O modules if desired. Refer
to Figure 3-22 and Figure 3-23 for power supply connection diagrams.
NOTE
If the distributed power needs to be independent of whether the power plugs are
removed or not, then the L+ and L- terminals should be bridged.
Power connections can accept up to 0.2 - 2.5 mm2 (24 - 14 AWG) wire size.
FCI power supply connections are presented in Table 3-4 and Table 3-5.
Table 3-4. FCI Power Connection Terminal X1A

1 L+ +24V d.c. Supply In (can be jumpered to pin 2)
2 L+ +24V d.c. Supply Out
3 SA Redundant Power Supply Monitoring Input
3-16 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 3.1.3 TB820 ModuleBus Modem
Table 3-5. FCI Power Connection Terminal X1B

1 L- 0V d.c. Supply In (can be jumpered to pin 2)
2 L- 0V d.c. Supply Out
3 SB Redundant Power Supply Monitoring Input
3.1.3 TB820 ModuleBus Modem

The TB820 ModuleBus Modem needs to be connected to the CI810/CI810A FCI, or the TB815
Interconnection Unit, and have an I/O cluster address selected. It is also connected to a 24V d.c.
power source to provide power to the I/O modules of the cluster.
F R
P
ORx1 ORx2
ERx
CLUSTER
4 56
3 7 Cluster Address
2 Switch
1
(Address 4 shown)
TB820
L+ L+ SA
L- L- SB
X4 X5
Rx Rx
Tx Tx
Optical ModuleBus
Interface Connector (X4, X5)
Figure 3-17. Front Panel of the TB820 ModuleBus Modem
3BSE 008 878R301 3-17

3.1.3.1 Cluster Address Switch

The TB820 is equipped with a rotary switch used as the I/O cluster address selector for the I/O
cluster. The I/O cluster address is in the range of 1 to 7. The FCI is base cluster address 0 (zero).
Figure 3-17 shows the front panel of the TB820.
CAUTION
Care must be taken that no I/O clusters have the same address setting. This could
result in output modules in the same ModuleBus position but in different I/O
clusters putting out the same value.
NOTE
A new cluster address should not be set during operation. If the address changes
during operation the cluster is disconnected from the ModuleBus, and no
communications is possible with the I/O modules on that cluster address. The new
address is set at reset or power up.
3.1.3.2 Optical ModuleBus Connections

The TB820 has a connection to the optical ModuleBus by the optical ports on its front. The fiber
optic cable(s) connect to the X4 (Tx and Rx ports) and X5 (Tx and Rx ports) connectors of the
TB820. The optical ModuleBus can be connected to duplex or simplex fiber optic cables. See
Figure 3-18 for connection details.
TB820
L+ L+ SA
L- L- SB Optical ModuleBus
Interface Connectors
X4 X5
Rx Rx (X4, X5)
Tx Tx
Rx
X4
Tx
Duplex Fiber Optic Cable Connector
Rx
X5
Tx
Simplex Fiber Optic Cable Connector

Front View
Figure 3-18. TB820 Optical ModuleBus Connections
3-18 3BSE 008 878R301

The connector style, either simplex or duplex, all provide snap-in action when mated to the
X4/X5 ports. Simplex connectors are color coded to facilitate identification of transmitter (Tx)
or receiver (Rx) connections. Duplex connectors are keyed so that proper orientation is ensured
during insertion.
Figure 3-19 shows a duplex, simplex and mixed configuration of the optical ModuleBus.
Duplex (two-way) is normally the best communication design, but may not apply to all
requirements. Duplex design allows additional TB820s to be added down-stream on-line.
Simplex (one-way) connections provide a ring configuration from the FCI to the first TB820, to
the next TB820 and etc. and then back to the FCI. Simplex designs will require that the “home-
run” cable from the last TB820 back to the FCI, or another TB820, be limited to the 15 meter
(49 ft.) plastic fiber or 200 meter (667 ft.) HCS fiber cable length. The 15 meter (49 ft.) cable
length or 200 meter (667 ft.) maximum applies from FCI to TB820, to TB820, etc. and back to
the FCI.
Also, duplex and simplex configurations can be mixed in the same optical ModuleBus if
required.
3BSE 008 878R301 3-19

CI810/
CI810A Example of a “duplex” connection of the optical “ring”.
FCI
Rx Tx X4-Tx X4-Tx X4-Tx
X5-Rx TB820 TB820 TB820 TB820
X5-Rx X5-Rx X5-Rx
X4-Rx X4-Rx X4-Rx
X5-Tx
X5-Tx X5-Tx X5-Tx
max. 15 m (49 ft.)

or 200 m (667 ft.)
CI810/
CI810A Example of a “simplex” connection of the optical ring.
FCI
Rx Tx
TB820 TB820 TB820 TB820
X5-Rx X4-Tx X4-Tx X4-Tx X4-Tx
X5-Rx X5-Rx X5-Rx
max. 15 m (49 ft.)

or 200 m (667 ft.)
CI810/
CI810A Example of a mixed “simplex/duplex” connection of the optical “ring”.
FCI
Rx Tx
X4-Tx X4-Tx X4-Tx
X5-Rx TB820 TB820 TB820 TB820
X5-Rx X5-Rx X5-Rx
X4-Rx X4-Rx
X5-Tx
X5-Tx X5-Tx
max. 15 m (49 ft.)

or 200 m (667 ft.)
Figure 3-19. Typical Optical ModuleBus Designs
In a “duplex connection” and in a “mixed connection” a cable break or loss of a TB820 will
only affect the clusters down-stream of the break. In a “simplex connection” a cable break or
loss of a TB820 will affect all I/O expansion clusters on the ModuleBus.
3-20 3BSE 008 878R301

3.1.3.3 Power Supply Connections

The TB820 requires 24V d.c. (19.2 - 30V) with a maximum current requirement of 1 Ampere.
The TB820 can be powered by either a single or redundant power supply. If a redundant power
supply is used, the TB820 can monitor the status of each supply and send the status back to the
FCI of the I/O Station. See Figure 3-20 for power supply connections.
TB820
L+ L+ SA
L- L- SB
X4 X5
X1B Rx Rx
Tx Tx
X1A
Terminal
Headers
Power Supply “B”

Monitor
3
2
Power Supply “A” 1
+24V d.c.
Monitor To MTUs
+24V d.c. 0V d.c. (I/O Modules)
3
2
1
From Power Supply
0V d.c.
Jumper
Figure 3-20. TB820 Power Supply Connections
The incoming power can then be distributed to other TB820s or the I/O modules if desired.
Refer to Figure 3-22 and Figure 3-23 for power supply connection diagrams.
NOTE
If the distributed power needs to be independent of whether the power plugs are
removed or not, then the L+ and L- terminals should be bridged.
Power connections can accept up to 0.2 - 2.5 mm2 (24 - 14 AWG) wire size.
3BSE 008 878R301 3-21

FCI power supply connections are presented in Table 3-6 and Table 3-7.
Table 3-6. TB820 Power Connection Terminal X1A

1 L+ +24V d.c. Supply In (can be jumpered to pin 2)
2 L+ +24V d.c. Supply Out
3 SB Redundant Power Supply Monitoring Input
Table 3-7. TB820 Power Connection Terminal X1B

1 L- 0V d.c. Supply In (can be jumpered to pin 2)
2 L- 0V d.c. Supply Out
3 SA Redundant Power Supply Monitoring Input
3.1.4 SD811 and SD812 Power Supply Configurations

The SD811 (24V d.c. @ 2.5A) and the SD812 (24V d.c. @ 5.0A) can be used alone or together
for redundancy (Figure 3-21). The supplies can operate in a parallel configuration which can be
used to increase the total output current capacity. The DCOK signal of the supplies can be
connected to the supply monitoring inputs (SA, SB) of the FCI in the case of redundant
supplies.
The SD811 provides enough logic power to support a fully loaded I/O Station. The SD812 is
mainly used when field devices need to be powered.
SD811
SD812
L1
L1
L2 (N)
L2 (N)
PE
PE
a.c. 110-240V
104VA a.c. 110-240V
207VA
DCOK
DCOK
DC Adj.
DC Adj.
+24V
2.5A +24V
0V 5A
0V
DCOK
DCOK
Figure 3-21. SD811 and SD812 Power Supply Connections
3-22 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 3.1.4 SD811 and SD812 Power Supply Configurations
Figure 3-22 shows a typical wiring diagram for parallel operation when more capacity is
needed. Figure 3-23 shows a wiring diagram for redundant mains.
CI810/
CI810A
L+ L- SA SB
SD811/812
L L+ +
a.c. To MTUs
N L- - or Field
PE DCOK
24V
d.c.
SD811/812
L L+
a.c.
N L-
PE DCOK
24V
d.c.
Figure 3-22. SD811 or SD812 Wiring Diagram for Parallel Operation
CI810/
CI810A
L+ L- SA SB
Mains A SD811/812
L L+ +
a.c. To MTUs
N L- - or Field
PE DCOK
24V
d.c.
Mains B
SD811/812
L L+
a.c.
N L-
PE DCOK
24V
d.c.
Figure 3-23. SD811 or SD812 Wiring Diagram for Redundant Mains
3BSE 008 878R301 3-23

Figure 3-24 shows the connections to redundant CI820 FCIs.
CI820 TB815 CI820
SA
SB
SA
SB
L+
L+
L-
L-
Circuit
Breaker Fuse
SD811/812
or MCB
+24V
0V
PowOK Optional
Power to
field circuits
via MTUs
SD811/812
+24V
0V
PowOK
CI820
Diode
Voting
Unit
SA
SB
L+
L-
SD811/812
+24V
0V
PowOK
SD811/812
+24V
0V
PowOK
Figure 3-24. Connection Diagram for Redundant Power Supplies to Redundant FCIs
This power supply can be utilized for non-redundant and redundant applications and does not
require additional load-sharing control equipment such as diode voting units.
NOTE
Circuit breakers or a diode voting unit at the power supplies output are required if
hot replacement of supplies is required.
3-24 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 3.1.5 Module Termination Units (MTU)
3.1.5 Module Termination Units (MTU)

Each MTU is used with certain types of I/O Modules. Refer to Table 3-8 for a cross-reference
between MTU and I/O Modules. Each MTU has two mechanical keys that have to be set for the
type of I/O module that will be installed on it.
Table 3-8. MTU Usage and Key Settings
TU810 Mech. Key Setting

TU836
Module TU812 TU811 TU830 TU831 TU835
TU837
Type TU814 Compact Extended Extended Extended Key 1 Key 2
Extended
Compact
AI810 X - X - X - A E
AI820 X - X - - - B B
AI830 X - X - - - A F
AI835 X - X - - - B A
AO810 X - X - - - A E
AO820 X - X - - - B C
DI810 X - X - - - A A
DI811 X - X - - - B D
DI814 X - X - - - B E
DI820 - X - X - - A B
DI821 - X - X - - A C
DI830 X - X - - - A A
DI831 X - X - - - B D
DI885 X - X - - - B F
DO810 X - X - - - A A
DO814 X X B E
DO815 X (1) - X - - - A A
DO820 - X - X - X A D
DO821 - X - X - X C A
DP820 X - X - - - C B
(1) TU812 not recommended.
Connecting an MTU to the FCI or to another MTU automatically sets-up the address selection
of that MTU. There are no jumpers or switches that need to be set before installing an I/O
module.
MTUs are placed on the DIN rails and then connected to the preceding MTU or FCI. Once
connected, the MTU is locked in place by the bottom latch which also bonds it to the chassis
ground.
3BSE 008 878R301 3-25

3.1.6 I/O Modules

Each I/O module is installed onto an MTU. See Table 3-8 for which MTU to use with each I/O
module type. I/O modules do not have any jumpers or switches that need to be set before
installing on an MTU. Refer to Section 2.1.8, Process Connection for details on each I/O
module type and how it connects to the process. Also refer to Appendix A, General
Specification for more information.
I/O modules are installed by aligning the connectors of the MTU and I/O module and then
pushing the units together. After connected to the MTU, the I/O module is then locked in place
by the I/O Module Lock/Switch which also activates a switch to enable power to the I/O
module.
3.1.7 Power Supply Load Calculation

Appropriate Hardware
Different power supply systems are available for the S800 I/O Station. The number of power
supply units is calculated with respect to actual number of S800 I/O modules supported by the
Station, see Section 3.2.4, Power Supply Requirements for details.
Normally you don’t have to deal with current consumption calculations, however there are
occasions with special requirements, or designs when detailed information regarding current
consumption is valuable. Please find a description of special power supply usage under the
guidelines below.
Guidelines
• A summary of the main requirements of the plant supply, from a planning point of view, is
found in Chapter 2, Installation, Section 2.1, Site Planning Environment.
• Auxiliary equipment in the controlled system is normally powered separately from the
S800 I/O power supplies.
• If field devices are grounded, be sure to use galvanic isolation.
• Heavy current on/off loads are always powered separately
• It is possible to use the system power supply for transmitters/transducers
– There is idle capacity in the available power supply units
– The transducer is grounded directly in the control system chassis
Number of Power Supply Units/Power Consumption
The I/O Station requires 24V d.c. @ 1 amp for the FCI and 12 I/O modules. Additional power
may be required for field devices.
3-26 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 3.1.8 Heat Dissipation
3.1.8 Heat Dissipation
3.1.8.1 Cabinet Ventilation

To avoid overheating, when ambient temperatures are high, the heat dissipated in the electronics
cabinet must be taken into consideration. This is particularly the case with sealed cabinets
(IP54) or tropicalized cabinets (IP41).
The frequency of faults is estimated to be doubled for each 10°C increase in temperature. It is
therefore important to maintain a low temperature where the equipment is installed.
The different hardware modules in the controller and the I/O system have different outputs of
heat. Accurate calculation of the heat produced by the system requires knowledge of the
modules and the work cycle.
3.1.8.2 Heat Dissipation Permitted in Cabinets

The maximum permitted temperature below the I/O station in the cabinet is 55 °C. The
permissible amount of heat generated depends on the type of cabinet and its location.
In critical applications with an I/O station fully equipped and cabinets arranged in groups, it
may be necessary to make a calculation of the actual power dissipation and an estimation of the
temperature rise within the cabinet. It is recommended that you re-calculate when you expand
the system as well.
3.1.8.3 Calculation of Heat Generated in a Cabinet

When calculating the heat generated in a cabinet, the heat generated by the different I/O
modules must be summed, and then added to the heat generated by the power supply units and
other equipment such as an extra modem, extra unit for supply of power to transmitters etc.
Section 3.2.5, Power and Cooling gives the power dissipated as heat by hardware modules in the
S800 I/O system.
The total power dissipated in the cabinet can thus be written:
P Total = ( ∑ P FCI ) + ( ∑ P IO ) + ( ∑ P Voltagesupplyunit ) + ( ∑ P Sundry )
PFCI = Power of the CI810 FCI Module

PIO = Power of each S800 I/O Module (about 1 Watt)
PVoltagesupplyunit = Power loss of the power supply unit(s)
PSundry = Miscellaneous power using equipment installed in the cabinet.
3.1.9 Maintenance and Repair

From the maintenance point of view, use as few module types as possible in the hardware
disposition of a control system. This is most relevant with the process I/O design.
Standardization of I/O signal types and other electrical qualities is important to minimize the
spare part stock.
Your solutions must make sense to the maintenance people in the event of disturbances and
following trouble-shooting.
3BSE 008 878R301 3-27

3.1.10 Expansion Considerations

A new S800 I/O station can be connected to an existing Advant Fieldbus 100 without affecting
other stations and controllers. The new I/O is automatically incorporated in the communication
system. Spare Advant Fieldbus 100 connections must be pre-installed as to not disturb the
existing bus.
The system can be expanded in the following ways:
• Process I/O or MTU unit
New I/O modules can be added on line. It is recommended to have approximately 10 - 20% of
total capacity as spare channels, and spare space in subracks.
NOTE
Spare MTUs need to be pre-mounted to add I/O modules on-line.
3.2 Capacity and Performance
3.2.1 Advant Fieldbus 100 Loading

Due to the organization of the Advant Fieldbus 100 scans some constraints are imposed on the
transmissions. In order to guarantee that message transfer is possible, at least 25% of the
fieldbus load is reserved for transfers. The remaining load (70%) of the fieldbus can be used for
S800 I/O Station loading.
To calculate the %loading, at the required Cycle Time, the CI810/CI810A (FCI) loading per
station and the I/O Module Type quantity times the per cent loading, use Table 3-9 and the
following formula:
AF100%load = CI810load + S800 I/O Module 1load + S800 I/O Module nload +......
Table 3-9. % of Load on the Advant Fieldbus 100 by S800 I/O (up to 2000 m Bus Length)
Module Cycle Time (ms)

Type 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096
CI810 0.058%(1) 0.033%(2)
CI810A
CI820
AI810 25.2% 12.6% 6.3% 3.15% 1.575% 0.788% 0.394% 0.197% 0.098% 0.049% 0.025% 0.012% 0.006%
AI820 15.6% 7.8% 3.9% 1.95% 0.975% 0.488% 0.244% 0.122% 0.061% 0.03% 0.015% 0.008% 0.004%
AI830 25.3% 12.6% 6.3% 3.15% 1.575% 0.788% 0.394% 0.197% 0.098% 0.049% 0.025% 0.012% 0.006%
AI835
AO810 25.23% 12.63% 6.325% 3.175% 1.6% 0.812% 0.418% 0.221% 0.123% 0.074% 0.049% 0.037% 0.031%
AO820 15.62% 7.815% 3.915% 1.965% 0.99% 0.503% 0.259% 0.137% 0.076% 0.046% 0.03% 0.023% 0.019%
3-28 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 3.2.1 Advant Fieldbus 100 Loading
Table 3-9. % of Load on the Advant Fieldbus 100 by S800 I/O (up to 2000 m Bus Length) (Continued)
Module Cycle Time (ms)

Type 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096
DI810, 8.8% 4.4% 2.2% 1.1% 0.55% 0.275% 0.138% 0.069% 0.034% 0.017% 0.009% 0.004% 0.002%
DI811
DI814,
DI820
DI821,
DI830
DI831,
DI885
DO810 8.809% 4.409% 2.209% 1.109% 0.559% 0.284% 0.146% 0.077% 0.043% 0.026% 0.017% 0.013% 0.011%
DO814
DO815
DO820
DO821
DP820(3) 25.2% 12.6% 6.3% 3.15% 1.575% 0.788% 0.394% 0.197% 0.098% 0.049% 0.025% 0.012% 0.006
INSCANT
DP820(3) 15.6% 7.8% 3.9% 1.95% 0.975% 0.488% 0.244% 0.122% 0.061% 0.030% 0.015% 0.008% 0.004%
OUT-
SCANT
(1) FCI cycle time MOD 300.
(2) FCI cycle time Master.
(3) Total load = (load generated by INSCANT) + (load generated by OUTSCANT)
The total load if INSCANT is 32 ms and OUTSCANT is 64 ms is:
Total load = 0.788 + 0.244 = 1.032%.
The following example is for one I/O Station with: One CI810/CI810A (FCI), 2 AI810s,
2 AO810s, 4 DI810s and 4 DO810s using 128ms cycle times for the AI and AO modules; and
using 64ms cycle times for the DI and DO modules.
Example:
AF100%load = 0.033% + (2 x 0.197%AI810) + (2 x 0.221%AO810) + (4 x 0.138%DI810) +
(4 x 0.146%DO810) = 2.005% Load
Please refer to the Advant Fieldbus 100 User’s Guide for complete details of Advant
Fieldbus 100 load calculations and principals.
3BSE 008 878R301 3-29

3.2.1.1 Bus Load Calculation on 8,500 Meters

For bus length 8,500 m (9,300 yards) use Table 3-10.
NOTE
AF 100%load must be equal to or less than 50%.
1 ms cycle time is not allowed.
Table 3-10. % of load on the Advant Fieldbus 100 by S800 I/O (8,500 m Bus Length)
I/O Cycle Time (ms

Module 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096
AI810 16.60% 8.300% 4.150% 2.075% 1.038% 0.519% 0.259% 0.130% 0.065% 0.032% 0.016% 0.008%
AI820 11.80% 5.900% 2.950% 1.475% 0.738% 0.369% 0.184% 0.092% 0.046% 0.023% 0.012% 0.006%
AI830 16.60% 8.300% 4.150% 2.075% 1.038% 0.519% 0.259% 0.130% 0.065% 0.032% 0.016% 0.008%
AI835
AO810 16.63% 8.332% 4.182% 2.107% 1.070% 0.551% 0.292% 0.162% 0.097% 0.065% 0.049% 0.041%
AO820 11.82% 5.923% 2.973% 1.498% 0.761% 0.392% 0.207% 0.115% 0.069% 0.046% 0.035% 0.029%
CI810 0.081%(1) 0.049%(2)

CI810A
CI820
DI810 8.40% 4.200% 2.100% 1.050% 0.525% 0.263% 0.131% 0.066% 0.033% 0.016% 0.008% 0.004%
DI811
DI814
DI820
DI821
DI830
DI831
DI885
DO810 8.416% 4.216% 2.116% 1.066% 0.541% 0.279% 0.148% 0.082% 0.049% 0.033% 0.025% 0.021%
DO814
DO815
DO820
DO821
DP820(3) 16.60% 8.300% 4.150% 2.075% 1.038% 0.519% 0.259% 0.130% 0.065% 0.032% 0.016% 0.008%
INSCANT
DP820(3) 11.80% 5.900% 2.950% 1.475% 0.738% 0.369% 0.184% 0.092% 0.046% 0.023% 0.012% 0.006%
OUT-
SCAN
Total load = 0.788 + 0.244 = 1.032%.
3-30 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 3.2.1 Advant Fieldbus 100 Loading
3.2.1.2 Bus Load Calculation on 15,000 Meters

For bus length 15,000 m (16,400 yards) use Table 3-11.
NOTE
AF 100%load must be equal to or less than 50%
1 ms cycle time is not allowed.
Table 3-11. % of Load on the Advant Fieldbus 100 by S800 I/O (15,000 m Bus Length)
I/O Cycle Time (ms)

Module 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096
AI810 20.60% 10.30% 5.150% 2.575% 1.288% 0.644% 0.322% 0.161% 0.080% 0.040% 0.020% 0.010%
AI820 15.80% 7.900% 3.950% 1.975% 0.988% 0.494% 0.247% 0.123% 0.062% 0.031% 0.015% 0.008%
AI830 20.60% 10.30% 5.150% 2.575% 1.288% 0.644% 0.322% 0.161% 0.080% 0.040% 0.020% 0.010%
AI835
AO810 20.64% 10.34% 5.190% 2.615% 1.328% 0.684% 0.362% 0.201% 0.121% 0.080% 0.060% 0.050%
AO820 15.83% 7.931% 3.981% 2.006% 1.018% 0.525% 0.278% 0.154% 0.093% 0.062% 0.046% 0.039%
CI810 0.105%(1) 0.064%(2)

CI810A
CI820
DI810 12.40% 6.200% 3.100% 1.550% 0.775% 0.388% 0.194% 0.097% 0.048% 0.024% 0.012% 0.006%
DI811
DI814
DI820
DI821
DI830
DI831
DI885
DO810 12.42% 6.224% 3.124% 1.574% 0.799% 0.412% 0.218% 0.121% 0.073% 0.048% 0.036% 0.030%
DO814
DO815
DO820
DO821
DP820(3) 20.60% 10.30% 5.150% 2.575% 1.288% 0.644% 0.322% 0.161% 0.080% 0.040% 0.020% 0.010%
INSCANT
DP820(3) 15.80% 7.900% 3.950% 1.975% 0.988% 0.494% 0.247% 0.123% 0.062% 0.031% 0.015% 0.008%
OUT-
SCANT
Total load = 0.788 + 0.244 = 1.032%.
In the Advant Controller 400 Series, the data base is updated according to selected
SCANT-value (10 ms to 6 s).
3BSE 008 878R301 3-31

3.2.2 Limitations caused by Profibus-DP

Due to the Profibus-DP specification it is not possible to connect 24 analog I/O modules to one
FCI. The reason is that the S800 I/O system includes more data and user parameters than
Profibus-DP can handle. Table 3-12 shows maximum number of analog modules that can be
connected to one CI830.
Table 3-12. Maximum Number of Modules on CI830
Module Type Number of Modules

AI810 12
AI820 20
AI830 12
AI835 12
AO810 13
AO820 21
In order to find out if a given configuration of analog and digital modules can be used the
following method should be used:
• Fill in number of modules in table Table 3-13.
• Calculate the sum in the three columns:
– Sum User Parameters
– Sum Input Bytes
– Sum Output Bytes
• Calculate the three total sums for:
– ParamSize
– InSize
– OutSize
• Check that:
– ParamSize is less than or equal to 237
– InSize is less than or equal to 244
– OutSize is less than or equal to 244244
If any of these three values is too high then the configuration can not be used.
• Round up the values to the nearest multiple of eight (8), for example, 233 is rounded
to 240.
• Finally calculate the memory size with the formula:
MemSize = 672 + 2x(8 + RoundParamSize) + 3x(RoundInSize + RoundOutSize)
NOTE
Check that MemSize is less than or equal to 2048. If not, the configuration can
not be used.
3-32 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 3.2.3 Data Scanning
Table 3-13. Calculation of Number of Modules
Sum Sum Sum

Module User Input Output Number of
User Input Output
Type Parameters Bytes Bytes Modules
Parameters Bytes Bytes
CI830 3 4 0 1 3 4 0
AI810 11 20 4
AI820 7 12 4
AI830 11 20 4
AI835 13 20 4
AO810 16 4 18
AO820 10 4 10
DI810 4 6 4
DI811 4 6 4
DI814 4 6 4
DI820 4 6 2
DI821 4 6 2
DO810 8 4 4
DO814 8 4 4
DO820 6 4 4
ParamSize InSize OutSize

Total sum - - -
Rounded Round Round Round

- - -
sum ParamSize InSize OutSize
3.2.3 Data Scanning

The ModuleBus data is scanned (read or written) cyclically, depending on the I/O module
configuration. To calculate the I/O scan cycle time in the FCI do as follows:
3BSE 008 878R301 3-33

Totalize the number of module type x * used execution time for type x (see Table 3-14) increase
total value to the nearest higher multiple of 2 to get the I/O scan cycle time.
Table 3-14. I/O Scan Cycle Time in the FCI
Execution Time Used in ms

Module Type
Single FCI Redundant FCI
AI810 3.00 4.5
AI820 1.50 2.25
AI830, AI835 0.40 0.6
AO810 1.20 1.8
AO820 0.60 0.9
DI810, DI811, DI814, DI820, DI821, DI830, 0.43 0.65
DI831, DI885
DO810, DO814, DO815, DO820, DO821 0.43 0.65
FCI (CI810)/CI810A) 1.40 -
FCI (CI820) redundant - 2.1
DP820 1.72 2.16
AI810, AI820 and AO810 and AO820 modules will be scanned every fourth I/O scan cycle
time.
AI830 and AI835 modules will be scanned every tenth I/O scan cycle time.
DI and DO modules will be scanned each I/O scan cycle time.
For example, a non redundant station with 2 AI810, 1 AO810, 2 DI810, 2 DO820 and 1 AI830
will give the following I/O scan cycle time:
2 AI810 => 2*3.00 = 6.00
1 AO810 => 1*1.20 = 1.20
2 DI810 => 2*0.43 = 0.86
2 DO810 => 2*0.43 = 0.86
1 AI830 => 1*0.40 = 0.40
1 CI810 => 1*1.40 = 1.40
-----------------------------------------
10.72 + (nearest higher value dividable by 2) = 12 ms
That will give an I/O scan cycle time of 12 ms between the FCI and its I/O modules. This means
that the DIs and DOs will be scanned every 12 ms, the AI810s and the AO810 every
(4*12 ms) 48 ms and the AI830 every (10*12 ms) 120 ms.
NOTE
Minimum I/O scan cycle time = 4 ms single FCI.
Minimum I/O scan cycle time = 6 ms redundant FCI.
3-34 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 3.2.4 Power Supply Requirements
3.2.4 Power Supply Requirements

A quick guide for power consumption to be used in a preliminary phase of a project work or
whenever you need estimated figures is provided in Table 3-15.
Table 3-15. Estimated System Power Consumption
24V d.c. Power

I/O Station
Consumption
Base Cluster (single FCI) and 6 I/O Modules 0.5A
Base Cluster (single FCI) and 12 I/O Modules 1.0A
Redundant FCIs (2) and 6 I/O Modules 1.0A
Redundant FCIs (2) and 12 I/O Modules 1.5A
Additional I/O Clusters and 6 I/O Modules 0.5A
Additional I/O Clusters and 12 I/O Modules 1.0A
NOTE
The above estimates are based on an I/O Station with a mixed configuration of
AI/AO and DI/DO. Only power consumption on the 24V d.c. distributed via the
ModuleBus are included. External 24V connected directly to the I/O modules, for
external loads and transmitters, are not included. When using large quantities of
AO820s and/or DO820s, these load figures may be exceeded.
3.2.5 Power and Cooling

Table 3-16 shows the typical power and cooling values that can be used when designing the
S800 I/O.
Table 3-16. I/O Station Power and Cooling (Typical)
Power
5 Volts 24 Volts 24 Volts Cooling Load (1) Maximum Ambient
Device Dissipation
ModuleBus ModuleBus External (BTU/H Typical) Temperature
(Watts)
AI810 70 mA 40 mA - 1.5 5.1 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2)
AI820 80 mA 70 mA - 1.7 5.8 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2)
AI830 80 mA 80 mA - 2.2 10 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2)
AI835 75 mA 50 mA - 1.6 5.4 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2)
AO810 70 mA - 200 mA 3.0 10 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2)
AO820 100 mA 200 mA - 2.8 9.6 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2)
DI810 50 mA - - 1.8 6.1 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2)
DI811 50 mA - - 2.7 9.2 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2)
DI814 50 mA - - 1.8 6.1 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2)
3BSE 008 878R301 3-35

Table 3-16. I/O Station Power and Cooling (Typical) (Continued)
Power
5 Volts 24 Volts 24 Volts Cooling Load (1) Maximum Ambient
Device Dissipation
ModuleBus ModuleBus External (BTU/H Typical) Temperature
(Watts)
DI820 50 mA - - 2.8 9.6 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2)
DI821 50 mA - - 2.8 9.6 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2)
DI830 120 mA - - 2.3 7.8 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2)
DI831 120 mA - - 3.2 10.9 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2)
DI885 160 mA 91 mA(3) 91 mA(3) 3.0 10 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2)

(4)
DO810 80 mA - 2.1 7.2 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2)
(4)
DO814 80 mA - 2.1 7.2 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2)
DO815 130 mA - 2 A (5) 4.0 13.6 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2)
DO820 60 mA 140 mA - 2.9 9.9 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2)
DO821 60 mA 140 mA - 2.9 9.9 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2)

DP820 120 mA - (4) 2.5 8.5 55/40°C (131/104°F)
CI810 - - 110 mA 2.6 8.9 55°C/(131°F)
CI820 - - 250 mA (6) 6.0 20 55°C/(131°F)
CI830 - - 110 mA 2.6 8.9 55°C/(131°F)
TB810 100 mA 20 mA - 0.5 1.7 55°C/(131°F)
TB811 100 mA 20 mA - 0.5 1.7 55°C/(131°F)
TB820 - - 100 mA 2.4 8.2 55°C/(131°F)
SD811 - - 11 37 55°C/(131°F)(7)
SD812 - - 22 75 55°C/(131°F)(7)
(1) Cooling load is the heat (BTU/H) produced by the equipment that may be required to meet room or enclosure cooling specifications.
(2) 40°C (104°F) applies to Compact MTUs with I/O modules mounted on a vertical DIN rail.
(3) 24V from ModuleBus (91 mA) or 24V external (91 mA) or 48V external (22 mA).
(4) 500 mA per channel with maximum load per channel.
(5) 2A per channel with maximum load per channel.
(6) CI820 in redundant configuration 2 x 250 mA
(7) Horizontal mounting only.
Calculation of 24V d.c. Power Consumption

Total 24V d.c. power consumption = Σ 24V load ModuleBus + Σ 5V load ModuleBus*0.3 +
Σ 24V external load.
The calculated 24V ModuleBus load should not exceed 1.3A.
3.3 Application Start-up

Please see Advant Controller 410 and Advant Controller 450 User’s Guides for application
start-up procedures.
3-36 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 4.1 Product Operation
Chapter 4 Runtime Operation
4.1 Product Operation
4.1.1 FCI Functionality on Advant Fieldbus 100

This section describes the functionality and services that the FCI (Fieldbus Communication
Interface) offers for an Advant Controller via the Advant Fieldbus 100. This includes a general
description of the data flow on the Advant Fieldbus 100, and how the S800 I/O modules are
operated and treated.
The FCI controls all operations of an S800 I/O station. The FCI acts as a pure slave station on
the Advant Fieldbus 100 fieldbus. It is the bus-master on the S800 I/O ModuleBus. It does this
by handling all communications between the Advant Controller and the S800 I/O modules.
The FCI scans all dynamic input data from the input modules and sends it on the Advant
Fieldbus 100, and writes all dynamic output data received from the Advant Fieldbus 100 to the
output modules.
The FCI is responsible for:
• Module configuration and supervision.
• Performing signal conditioning on input and output values.
• Dynamic data transfer.
4.1.1.1 Module Configuration and Supervision

The FCI stores the configuration for all configured I/O Modules in the station.
The FCI will continuously supervise all I/O modules being configured by the Advant Controller.
It sends the status of all modules to the Advant Controller via the Advant Fieldbus 100.
When the FCI detects an I/O module without configuration, which it has configuration data for,
it will automatically load the parameters to the module. An input module is automatically set
into operation by the FCI. An output module is commanded into operation by the Advant
Controller.
In a I/O station with redundant FCI the Primary FCI configured the Backup FCI.
Both the Primary and Backup supervise each other.
4.1.1.2 Signal Conditioning

The FCI performs the signal conditioning (for example, linearization and filtering) for the more
basic I/O modules. This means that the FCI has to make some computation before moving the
value to the module or after reading the value from the module. The type of signal conditioning
to perform depends on the module type and its configuration (parameter settings).
Intelligent I/O modules do signal conditioning themselves. In this case the FCI only has to move
the value to or from the module. This means less load on the FCI which can be used on other
modules or services.
3BSE 008 878R301 4-1

4.1.1.3 Dynamic Data Transfer

Figure 4-1 gives an overview of how the exchange of dynamic process data is transferred back
and forth between the user application and the actual process.
AC 400 Series - Controller Dynamic Data Exchange

Application
Program
Communication Interface (CI)
& Data Base
Dual Port Memory
IN OUT 5.
4 and 5
Cycle times for scanning input values are
4. configured in the Advant Controller.
Output values are directly written to the
CI memory.
Advant Fieldbus 100
3. 3 and 6
Cycle times for transfer of input and
6. output values on AF 100 are configured
in the Advant Controller
Fieldbus Communication
Interface (FCI)
Dual Port Memory
Input Module Output Module
2 and 7
Input and output values are updated 2. Chan x Chan x
as fast as possible (depends on the
configuration). Signal conditioning is 7. Values Values
also performed in this loop. 8.
1.
1 and 8
Input and output values are updated
“as fast as possible” (depends on the
S800 I/O module configuration)
Process
Figure 4-1. Dynamic Data Exchange for Advant Fieldbus 100 in Runtime
The transportation of dynamic data between the Advant Fieldbus 100 and the ModuleBus is the
main task for the FCI. The FCI has a dedicated memory area where it sends the output values
and reads the input values. The CPU in the FCI performs the rest of the data transportation. It
reads output values from the memory and writes to the I/O Modules via the ModuleBus and vice
versa.
4-2 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 4.1.2 FCI Functionality on Profibus-DP
Data Scanning Principles

The data transfer between Advant Fieldbus 100 and the ModuleBus is not synchronized. Read
and write operations are performed from and to a dual port memory in the FCI.
configuration. On one scan all digital modules, 1/4 of the analog modules and 1/10 of the slow
analog modules are scanned. It takes 4 scans to read all analog modules and 10 scans to read all
slow analog modules.
4.1.2 FCI Functionality on Profibus-DP

This section describes the functionality and services that the FCI (Fieldbus Communication
Interface) offers for a Profibus Master via Profibus-DP. This includes a general description of
the data flow on Profibus-DP, and how the S800 I/O modules are operated and treated.
The FCI controls all operations of an S800 I/O station. The FCI acts as a pure slave station on
Profibus-DP. It is the bus-master on the S800 I/O ModuleBus. It does this by handling all
communications between the Profibus Master and the S800 I/O modules.
The FCI scans all dynamic input data from the input modules and sends it on Profibus-DP, and
writes all dynamic output data received from Profibus-DP to the output modules.
The FCI is responsible for:
• Module configuration and supervision.
• Performing signal conditioning on input and output values.
• Dynamic data transfer.
4.1.2.1 Module Configuration and Supervision

The FCI stores the configuration for all configured I/O Modules in the station.
The FCI will continuously supervise all I/O modules being configured by the Profibus Master. It
sends the status of all modules to the Profibus Master via Profibus-DP.
When the FCI detects an I/O module without configuration, which it has configuration data for,
it will automatically load the parameters to the module. The module is then automatically set
into operation by the FCI.
4.1.2.2 Signal Conditioning

The FCI performs the signal conditioning (e.g. linearization and filtering) for the more basic I/O
modules. This means that the FCI has to make some computation before moving the value to the
module or after reading the value from the module. The type of signal conditioning to perform
depends on the module type and its configuration (parameter settings).
Intelligent I/O modules do signal conditioning themselves. In this case the FCI only has to move
the value to or from the module. This means less load on the FCI which can be used on other
modules or services.
3BSE 008 878R301 4-3

4.1.2.3 Dynamic Data Transfer

Figure 4-2 gives an overview of how the exchange of dynamic process data is transferred back
and forth between the user application and the actual process.
Dynamic Data Exchange

Profibus Master (Class 1)
The Profibus Master uses Data Exchange

request towards the FCI according to it’s
scheduling scheme.
Profibus-DP
3. 3 and 4
Data exchange with Profibus-DP is
4. cyclic and consists of both writing of
data from Master to FCI as well as data
read from FCI to Master.
Fieldbus Communication
Interface (FCI)
Communication Memory
Input Module Output Module
2 and 5
Input and output values are updated 2. Chan x Chan x
as fast as possible (depends on the
configuration). Signal conditioning is 5. Values Values
also performed in this loop. 6.
1.
1 and 6
Input and output values are updated
“as fast as possible” (depends on the
S800 I/O module configuration).
Process
Figure 4-2. Dynamic Data Exchange for Profibus-DP in Runtime
The transportation of dynamic data between Profibus-DP and the ModuleBus is the main task
for the FCI. The FCI has a dedicated memory area where it sends the output values and reads
the input values. The CPU in the FCI performs the rest of the data transportation. It reads output
values from the memory and writes to the I/O Modules via the ModuleBus and vice versa.
4-4 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 4.1.3 I/O Module Functionality on Advant Fieldbus 100
Data Scanning Principles

The data transfer between Profibus-DP and the ModuleBus is not synchronized. Read and write
operations are performed from and to a dual port memory in the FCI.
configuration. On one scan all digital modules, 1/4 of the analog modules and 1/10 of the slow
analog modules are scanned. It takes 4 scans to read all analog modules and 10 scans to read all
slow analog modules.
4.1.3 I/O Module Functionality on Advant Fieldbus 100

All S800 I/O modules have some common functionality. This makes it easier for the other parts
in the system, that is, the Advant Controller, the I/O Station, the configuration tools and above
all for the user. This section describes these common functions of the I/O modules.
An S800 I/O module complies with the following framework:
• General:
– It has a Module Identity (see Section 4.1.3.1, Module Identity for Advant
Fieldbus 100)
– It has a state that can be controlled (see Section 4.1.3.2, Module States for Advant
Fieldbus 100)
– It reports status for modules and channels
• Parameters:
– It may have configuration parameters for the module and the channels.
– It may have non-volatile parameters for each channel (factory settings)
• Dynamic values:
– All channels have dynamic values including quality indications.
– All output channels can be read for verification of the performance and health.
4.1.3.1 Module Identity for Advant Fieldbus 100

All S800 I/O modules contains a module identity. The module identity is used to verify that an
I/O module of the expected (user configured) type is mounted before taking it operational. It
protects the system from performing unexpectedly.
3BSE 008 878R301 4-5

4.1.3.2 Module States for Advant Fieldbus 100

The figure below shows the states of the I/O modules.
NOT Reset AND 5V OK
From ALL states:

Restart-Command
Init
Error
Not
Configured
From all other states:
Fatal error detected by module
Parameter loaded
Commanded to
not configured Ready
state
Commanded to Operational state

Commanded to
Operational state Ope-
rational
OSP Communication time-out
Output modules only
Figure 4-3. I/O Module States
The states are described in more detail below:
Init State
In the Init state the actual initialization of the module is performed, including a self-test.
Inputs: Not scanned
Outputs: Inactive: 0V
LEDs: Fault
4-6 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 4.1.3 I/O Module Functionality on Advant Fieldbus 100
Not Configured State

In the Not Configured state the module waits to be configured. The FCI performs the parameter
download to the module. All channels on a module need not be configured. (See Section 4.1.3.3,
Configuration and Parameters for Advant Fieldbus 100)
Inputs: Not scanned
Outputs: Inactive:0V
LEDs: Fault until first ModuleBus dialog, then None
(and/or Warning if diagnostic warning)
Ready State
Entering the Ready state starts input channel scanning. All active channels are scanned before
the state is completely entered. In this state the module just waits to be commanded to the
Operational state.
Inputs: Scanned
LEDs: None (or Warning if diagnostic warning)
Operational State
This is the state for normal operation. After entering the Operational state (from Ready or OSP),
output channels are still unchanged until a valid output value is written.
Inputs: Scanned
Outputs: Active
LEDs: Run (and Warning if diagnostic warning)
OSP (Outputs Set as Predefined) State

The OSP state is only used by modules with output channels. It is entered from the Operational
state if the OSP-watchdog (see Section 4.1.3.4, OSP-Watchdog for Advant Fieldbus 100)
expires or via a command.
Entering the OSP state the module sets its outputs to the predetermined values. This means
“Keep value” or output the configured OSP value. The outputs are kept unchanged as long as
the module stays in the OSP state.
To change the outputs the module first has to leave this state. This is done with an explicit
command. A re-configuration of the OSP parameters will only be seen if the module first exits
this state and then re-enters it.
After re-entering the Operational state, the outputs are still unchanged until valid values are
written.
Inputs: Not applicable
Outputs: According to configuration (keep value or OSP value)
LEDs: Run, OSP (and Warning if diagnostic warning)
3BSE 008 878R301 4-7

Error State
This the state that will be entered if a fault is detected.
Inputs: Not Scanned
Outputs: Inactive (0V)
LEDs: Fault
4.1.3.3 Configuration and Parameters for Advant Fieldbus 100

Configuring an I/O module is equal to writing the parameters to it.
The parameters for a module can mainly be divided into configuration parameters and
non-volatile parameters.
Loading Parameters
At start-up, the configuration parameters are loaded by the FCI in the Not Configured state.
When valid configuration parameters are written to the module, it will change from the Not
Configured state to the Ready state. After entering the Ready state the module may be set to
Operational.
A parameter block that is not loaded is undefined (there is no such thing as default parameters).
The only property that may be seen as a default, is that a channel that is not configured (has not
gotten its parameters) is inactive. This makes it possible to configure only channels that should
be used without bothering about the others.
The parameters do not need to be remembered on the modules after a reset of the module.
Loading Invalid Parameters

If parameters that are in some way invalid are sent to a module, this is indicated with a warning
in the module status and by a diagnostic message. If channel parameters are invalid an error on
the channel is indicated.
Non-volatile Parameters
Each channel may, apart from the configuration parameters, also have non-volatile parameters
that are written during production and are not changed by a running system.
4.1.3.4 OSP-Watchdog for Advant Fieldbus 100

The OSP-watchdog is a watchdog timer that all I/O modules with output channels have. It
supervises the communication to discover if the traffic on the bus is interrupted. The
OSP-watchdog is refreshed when the module is accessed. If this is not done within the time
limit the watchdog will force the module to the OSP state (see Section 4.1.3.5, Module Status
for Advant Fieldbus 100).
4-8 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 4.1.4 I/O Module Functionality on Profibus-DP
4.1.3.5 Module Status for Advant Fieldbus 100
Module Status
Each module has a status that summarizes the status for the whole module. It contains
information about its working state and if any non-fatal or fatal error is detected. The status
information can be read and evaluated by the Advant Controller cyclically.
Channel Status (Data Quality)

Each input value is delivered together with a status information about the channel.
4.1.4 I/O Module Functionality on Profibus-DP

All S800 I/O modules have some common functionality. This section describes these common
functions of the I/O modules.
An S800 I/O module complies with the following framework:
• General
– It has a Module Identity (see Section 4.1.4.1, Module Identity for Profibus-DP).
– It has a state that can be controlled
(see Section 4.1.4.2, Module States for Profibus-DP).
– It reports status for modules and channels.
• Parameters
– It may have configuration parameters for the module and the channels.
– It may have non-volatile parameters for each channel (factory settings).
• Dynamic values
– All channels have dynamic values including quality indications.
– All output channels can be read for verification of the performance and health.
4.1.4.1 Module Identity for Profibus-DP

All S800 I/O modules contains a module identity. The module identity is used to verify that an
I/O module of the expected (user configured) type is mounted before taking it operational. It
protects the system from performing unexpectedly.
3BSE 008 878R301 4-9

4.1.4.2 Module States for Profibus-DP

The figure below shows the states of the I/O modules.
NOT Reset AND 5V OK
From ALL states:

Restart-Command
Init
Error
Not
Configured
From all other states:
Fatal error detected by module
Parameter loaded
Commanded to
Not Configured Ready
state
Commanded to Operational state

Commanded to
Operational state Ope-
rational
OSP Communication time-out
Output modules only
Figure 4-4. I/O Module States
The states are described in more detail below:
Init State
In the Init state the actual initialization of the module is performed, including a self-test.
Inputs: Not scanned
LEDs: Fault
4-10 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 4.1.4 I/O Module Functionality on Profibus-DP
Not Configured State

In the Not Configured state the module waits to be configured. The FCI performs the parameter
download to the module.
Inputs: Not scanned
Outputs: Inactive:0V
LEDs: Fault until first ModuleBus dialog, then None
(and/or Warning if diagnostic warning)
Ready State
Entering the Ready state starts input channel scanning. All active channels are scanned before
the state is completely entered. In this state the module just waits to be commanded to the
Operational state.
Inputs: Scanned
LEDs: None (or Warning if diagnostic warning)
Operational State
This is the state for normal operation. After entering the Operational state (from Ready or OSP),
output channels are still unchanged until a valid output value is written.
Inputs: Scanned
Outputs: Active
LEDs: Run (and Warning if diagnostic warning)
OSP (Outputs Set as Predefined) State

The OSP state is only used by modules with output channels. If OSP is activated it is entered
from the Operational state in two cases:
• The supervision time-out on Profibus-DP has elapsed.
• The OSP-watchdog expires, no access has been done to the module within 1024 ms
(analog) 256 ms (digital).
See Section 4.1.4.4, OSP-Watchdog for Profibus-DP.
Entering the OSP state the module sets its outputs to the predetermined values. This means
“Keep value” or output the configured OSP value. The outputs are kept unchanged as long as
the module stays in the OSP state.
To change the outputs the module first has to leave this state. This is done when the Profibus-DP
Master restarts the FCI after detecting that it’s watchdog has expired. A re-configuration of the
OSP parameters will only be seen if the module first exits this state and then re-enters it.
3BSE 008 878R301 4-11

After re-entering the Operational state, the outputs are still unchanged until valid values are
written.
Inputs: Not applicable
Outputs: According to configuration (keep value or OSP value)
LEDs: Run, OSP (and Warning if diagnostic warning)
Error State
This the state that will be entered if a fault is detected.
Inputs: Not scanned
Outputs: Inactive (0V)
LEDs: Fault
4.1.4.3 Configuration, Parameters for Profibus-DP

Configuring an I/O module is equal to writing the parameters to it.
The parameters for a module can mainly be divided into configuration parameters and non-
volatile parameters.
Loading Parameters
At start-up, the configuration parameters are loaded by the FCI in the NotConfigured state.
When valid configuration parameters are written to the module, it will change from the Not
Configured state to the Ready state. After entering the Ready state the module may be set to
Operational.
The parameters do not need to be remembered on the modules after a reset of the module since
they are saved in the FCI.
Loading Invalid Parameters

If parameters that are in some way invalid are sent to a module, this is indicated with a warning
in the module status and by a diagnostic message. If channel parameters are invalid an error on
the channel is indicated.
Non-volatile Parameters
Each channel may, apart from the configuration parameters, also have non-volatile parameters
that are written during production and are not changed by a running system.
4-12 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 4.2 Operating Overview
4.1.4.4 OSP-Watchdog for Profibus-DP

The OSP-watchdog is a watchdog timer that all I/O modules with output channels have. It
supervises the communication to discover if the traffic on the bus is interrupted. The
OSP-watchdog is refreshed when the module is accessed. If this is not done within the time
limit the watchdog will force the module to the OSP state (see Section 4.1.4.5, Module Status
for Profibus-DP).
The OSP-watchdog is also activated when the Profibus-DP watchdog has elapsed. The
supervision time for Profibus-DP is defined in the Profibus configuration tool.
4.1.4.5 Module Status for Profibus-DP
Module Status
Each module has a status that summarizes the status for the whole module. It contains
information about its working state and if any non-fatal or fatal error is detected. The status
information can be read by the Profibus-DP Master cyclically.
Channel Status (Data Quality)

Each input value is delivered together with a status information about the channel.
4.2 Operating Overview

An I/O station is an autonomous station which normally is not handled by an operator. Of
course, it is started and sometimes stopped manually. This is done, however, in specific
situations such as the time of installation work and maintenance.
Accordingly, operating instructions are spread out in this manual. See where the specific
activity is treated.
For general descriptions, see the beginning of this chapter. For concrete instructions, see
Chapter 2, Installation and Chapter 5, Maintenance.
4.3 Runtime Tutorial

See the reference made in Section 4.2, Operating Overview.
4.4 Operating Instructions

See the reference made in Section 4.2, Operating Overview.
4.5 Runtime Operations Menu

Runtime operation menus are not presented in this document. The Advant Controller is
maintained by an engineering station. Please find these aspects in separate documentation of the
engineering station.
3BSE 008 878R301 4-13

4-14 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 5.1 Preventive Maintenance
Chapter 5 Maintenance
5.1 Preventive Maintenance

This chapter describes routine maintenance, replacement and installation procedures necessary
to maintain the operation of the S800 I/O equipment. The S800 I/O modules do not need special
adjustments such as zero and span of analog I/O modules.
Analog I/O modules are factory calibrated and have calibration parameters for all ranges stored
in memory on the module. The FCI uses those calibration parameters for calculations of the
correct input and output signals.
Thermocouple and RTD modules use internal references for calibrations of the measured
values.

Safety regulations are to be followed when installing and operating the S800 I/O to minimize
the risks of injury to personnel and damage to the equipment. Local statutory regulations, to the
degree that they are more strict than the following, are to take precedence. Please refer to
Section 2.2.1, Safety Regulations for more information.
5.1.2 Visual Inspection

The S800 I/O equipment is to be inspected at regular intervals as determined by environmental
factors such as vibration, high ambient temperatures and so on. The following items can be
checked as required.
Safety
Check that all screwed joints and connections within the cabinets are tightened effectively.
Ensure that wiring, modules and other electrical components are undamaged. Pay particular
attention to overheating, damaged insulation or signs of wear.
Cleanliness
Remove dust and other fouling from the cabinet with compressed air or a vacuum cleaner. Use a
lint-free cloth, dampened with methylated spirits to remove stubborn fouling.
Power Supply Units

The power supplied to the S800 I/O can be configured in two ways. It can be a non-redundant
power supply, or redundant power supplies. Both configurations can be easily checked by
looking at the status LED - P of the Fieldbus Communications Interface (FCI). The status LED
illuminates to indicate that 5V, and 24V are available on the I/O Station and within the required
operating range. If the status LED is not illuminated then further checking of the supply system
must be performed. Refer to Section 5.3.3.4, Check of Power Supply for more information.
3BSE 008 878R301 5-1

5.2 Hardware Indicators

Various visual indications (LEDs) are used in the I/O-system. Some common examples are:
• Run indication of the device
• Error indication of the device
• Warning indication of the device (only on I/O modules)
• Status display of digital inputs or outputs
• OSP indication on output modules
These indications serve the purpose of informing the user about status or fault in the system or
in the process. They are intended to be a simple and easy to use help. They should allow to spot
faults in the station easily.
5.2.1 Color
A fixed meaning is assigned to the colors red, yellow and green:
RED: Danger or alarm Warning of potential danger or a situation which requires
immediate action
YELLOW: Caution Change or impending change of condition
GREEN: Safety Indication of a safe situation or authorization to proceed,
clear way.
For digital I/O on-states a definite meaning can not be assigned. For them the color yellow is
chosen. The Table 5-1 shows the meaning and colors of LED's.
Table 5-1. Meaning and Colors of LED’s
Meaning/Purpose Color Examples

Fault; Error Red “FAULT”
Warning, I/O State Indications Yellow OSP, Process error,
and OSP (Outputs Digital I/O on-state,
Set as Predetermined) Process voltage low, Traffic.
Normal Operation Green “RUN”, Normal operation,
Power OK.
5-2 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 5.2.2 Location
5.2.2 Location
For the location of LEDs the following rules are applied:
• Indications having the same meaning on every I/O module (for example, FAULT, RUN,
WARNING, OSP) are at the same position.
• The standard indications FAULT, RUN, WARNING and OSP (only output modules), are
always on the topmost position on every device (top: FAULT, RUN, then WARNING,
OSP).
• On the FCI: FAULT, RUN, POWER OK, TRAFFIC and for redundant FCI also
PRIMARY and REDUNDANCY OK.
5.2.3 Identification
LED's shall be identified by an appropriate symbol or abbreviation of an English term. For the
standard indications the abbreviation is as follows:
• Fault in the module FAULT or F
• Device is in operation RUN or R
• External fault or minor fault in the module WARNING or W
• Output Set as Predetermined, OSP or O
• Digital I/O on-state 1, 2,... (channel number)
• Power supply ok internal and/or external ok POWER OK or P
5.2.4 CI810/CI810A FCI Module LEDs

The CI810 FCI has indicators for FAULT, RUN, POWER OK, one for each fieldbus
communication cable and optical ModuleBus communications. For color and functions see
Table 5-2. and the for the location see Figure 5-1.
Table 5-2. Standard LEDs on CI810/CI810A FCI Module with TB810/TB811
LED Marking Color Description

F (Fault) Red Fault in the module (1)
R (Run) Green Operational state
P (Power ok) Green Internal power ok
T1 (Traffic 1) Yellow Traffic on AF 100 cable 1
Tx (TB810/TB811) Yellow Transmit data on the optical ModuleBus
Rx (TB810/TB811) Yellow Receive data on the optical ModuleBus
(1) The F-LED will switch on at power up, restart of the module or when the module goes to Error
state. At start-up the module will do a self test, if the self test has gone OK the module will switch
off the F-LED.
3BSE 008 878R301 5-3

F R
P
T1 T2
LED Status
SERVICE Indicators
STN. ADDR.
4 56
3 7 x 10
2 8
109
4 56
3 7 x1
1) 2 8
CI810 109
SWX.X/Y TB810/TB811
AF100 Tx Rx
L+ L+ SA 1 2
L- L- SB
+ + Tx
- -
SH SH
SH SH Rx
1) or CI810A
Figure 5-1. CI810/CI810A FCI with TB810/TB811 Status LEDs Location
5-4 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 5.2.5 CI820 FCI Module LEDs
5.2.5 CI820 FCI Module LEDs

The CI820 FCI has indicators for FAULT, RUN, POWER OK, one for each fieldbus
communication cable and status of redundant communications. For color and functions see
Table 5-3. and the for the location see Figure 5-2.
Table 5-3. Standard LEDs on CI820 FCI Module

PR Yellow Indicates Primary FCI
DU Green Dual; configured for redundancy, other FCI OK
(1) The F-LED will switch on at power up, restart of the module or when the module goes to Error state.
At start-up the module will do a self test, if the self test has gone OK the module will switch off the F-
LED.
3BSE 008 878R301 5-5

F R
P
T1 T2
PR DU
LED Status
Indicators
STN. ADDR.
4 56
3 7 x 10
2 8
109
4 56
3 7 x1
2 8
CI820 109
SWX.X/Y
L+ L+ SA AF100
L- L- SB
+
-
SH
SH
Figure 5-2. CI820 FCI Status LEDs Location
5-6 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 5.2.6 CI830 FCI Module LEDs
5.2.6 CI830 FCI Module LEDs

The CI830 FCI has indicators for FAULT, RUN, POWER OK, two for Profibus-DP
communication and two for optical ModuleBus communications. For color and functions
seeTable 5-4. and the for the location see Figure 5-3.
Table 5-4. Standard LEDs on CI830 FCI Module with TB810/TB811

P (Power ok) Green Internal power OK
RX (Receive) Yellow Receive data on Profibus-DP
TX (Transmit) Yellow Transmit data on Profibus-DP
Tx (TB810/TB811) Yellow Transmit data on the optical ModuleBus
Rx (TB810/TB811) Yellow Receive data on the optical ModuleBus
(1) The F-LED will switch on at power up, restart of the module or when the module goes to Error
state. At start up the module will do a self test, if the self test has gone OK the module will switch
off the F-LED.
3BSE 008 878R301 5-7

F R
P
RX TX
PROFIBUS
LED Status
SERVICE Indicators
STN. ADDR.
4 56
3 7 x 10
2 8
109
5
4 6
3 7x1
2 8
CI830 109
SWX.X/Y TB810/TB811
PROFIBUS Tx Rx
L+
L- Tx
SA
SB Rx
Figure 5-3. CI830 FCI with TB810/TB811 Status LEDs Location
5-8 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 5.2.7 TB820 ModuleBus Modem LEDs
5.2.7 TB820 ModuleBus Modem LEDs

The TB820 has indicators for FAULT, RUN, POWER OK and data activity on the optical and
electrical ModuleBus. For color and functions see Table 5-5. and the for the location see
Figure 5-4.
Table 5-5. LEDs on TB820 ModuleBus Modem

ORx1 Yellow Receiving data on optical ModuleBus X5 (Rx)
ORx2 Yellow Receiving data on optical ModuleBus X4 (Rx)
ERx Yellow Receiving data on the electrical ModuleBus
channel and that the ModuleBus channel is
supervised
(1) The F-LED will switch on at power up, restart of the module or when the module goes to Error state.
At start-up the module will do a self test. If the self test has gone OK and after the first access to the
module, the module will switch off the F-LED.
3BSE 008 878R301 5-9

LED Status
F R Indicators
P
ORx1 ORx2
ERx
CLUSTER
4 56
3 7
2
1
TB820
L+ L+ SA
L- L- SB
X4 X5
Rx Rx
Tx Tx
Figure 5-4. TB820 ModuleBus Modem Status LEDs Location
5.2.8 I/O Module LEDs

Figure 5-5 shows examples of front panels for different types of I/O modules. On the front of
each I/O module there are three LEDs (FAULT, RUN and WARNING) indicating the module
status. One additional LED (OSP) is included on output modules. See Table 5-6 and Table 5-7
for information on the meaning and indications for these modules. For modules with special
LED indications see respectively module in Appendix A, General Specification.
The FAULT LED shall indicate when the I/O module detect a fatal error or before first access
after power up. The RUN LED shall indicate when the I/O module is operational. The
WARNING LED shall indicate when a non-fatal error is detected and the module continues to
run. The OSP LED shall indicate when the I/O module is commanded to OSP state or when the
module detects that there is no communication to the module.
5-10 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 5.2.8 I/O Module LEDs
Each digital channel has one LED indicating current state (on/off).
Table 5-6. Standard LEDs on I/O Modules
Marking Color Description

W (Warning) Yellow External fault or minor fault in the module,
that is, low process voltage
O (OSP) Yellow OSP state (Outputs Set as Predetermined)
Digital I/O on state Yellow Digital I/O signal on-state
(1) Modules without self test function e.g. DI/DO modules: The F-LED will switch on at power up or
restart of the module and switch off after the first successful access to the module.
Modules with self test function for example, AI/AO modules: The F-LED will switch on at power up,
restart of the module or when the module goes to Error state. If the module has not gone to Error
state it will switch off the F-LED after the first successful access to the module.
Table 5-7. I/O Module LED Indications in Different States
Module State Run Fault Warning OSP Signal status

Init off on off off DI on/off (1), DO off
Not Configured off on/off (2) on/off off DI on/off (1), DO off
Ready off off on/off off DI on/off, DO off
Operational on off on/off off on/off
OSP on off on/off on on/off
Error off on off off DI on/off, DO off
(1) The DI signal status for module DI885 is only OFF.
(2) Will be switched off after the first successful access to the module.
Normally when an I/O module has been removed from the configuration, the FCI will do a
restart of the module. The module will end up in the NOT CONFIGURED mode.
3BSE 008 878R301 5-11

F F F F F
R R R R R
W W W W W
O O O
1 1 PX1
2 2 UP1
3 3 ST1
4 4 DI1
5 5 SY1
6 6 DO1
7 7 TP1
8 8 UL1
9 9 PX2
10 10 UP2
11 11 ST2
12 12 DI2
13 13 SY2
14 14 DO2
15 15
16 16 TP2
UL2
DO810 DI810 AO810 AI810 DP820
Figure 5-5. Examples of I/O Module LED Locations
5.3 Fault Finding and User Repair
5.3.1 Introduction
Diagnostics are available in different forms for rapid localization of the source of the equipment
malfunction. Hardware error is usually corrected by replacing the faulty module which is
returned to ABB Service for repairs. The smallest replaceable unit is normally a module or an
apparatus like a power supply unit.
Disturbances and system halt caused by software error is commonly solved by a manual system
restart.
External faults in process wiring and transducers can also affect the function of the S800 I/O
system. However, this type of fault is not discussed in this manual.
5-12 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 5.3.2 Diagnostics and Fault Indications
5.3.2 Diagnostics and Fault Indications

Hardware and software in a S800 I/O system is provided with supervision against system faults.
The following indicating facilities apply on different levels:
The Controller and I/O Cabinet

• LED indicators on modules:
– Green LED, RUN, indicates normal function.
– Yellow LED indicates an active signal, for example, status of digital input (DI) or
digital output (DO).
– Red LED, FAULT, indicates malfunction
Operator Station
If the controller is included in a control network with an Advant Operator Station the following
facilities apply.
• System diagnostic messages:
– Give information about probable cause of malfunction in coded form or plain
language.
• System status displays:
– Showing fatal and non-fatal error in the I/O system.
Process Control
Certain controller faults, for example, those related to S800 I/O module channels, will probably
be detected indirectly when a control function goes wrong. For some S800 I/O module types
there is limited system diagnostics support on a channel level.
To minimize the down time, it is important that the operator has a good overview and
knowledge of the plant functions.
It is also essential that the control system design, besides the normal control functions, include
supervision of important process objects and their system inputs and outputs as well.
5.3.3 List of General Fault Finding Procedures and Hints
5.3.3.1 Location of Malfunction

Sometimes, you lack the information from the controller diagnostics, that tells you where the
fault is located. Suspicion about a fault is raised by the process behavior.
Experience indicates that approximately 85% of all faults occur in the process, 10% in the
control program and 5% in the control system hardware.
It is always advisable to localize the malfunction with these figures in mind to minimize the
down-time.
3BSE 008 878R301 5-13

5.3.3.2 External Factors

In an electronics system which has given satisfactory service, most malfunctions have external
causes. It is therefore important, when tracing a fault, to determine if any external factor such as
incorrect handling of the equipment, short circuits, welding work, lightning strike and/or power
failure has caused the malfunction.
5.3.3.3 Safety at Start/Stop

Voltage failure, component fault or manual restart usually affect the control system function. I/O
system failure affects the process in different ways:
• In a system which is monitoring the process only, changes in the process status are not
registered but there is no immediate danger to the process operation.
• In a system which is controlling a continuous processes (rolling mills and paper
manufacture) demands a high degree of continuity of the control system functions.
WARNING
A restart of the Advant Controller can have very serious consequences. It is
important to be aware of the local requirements for safety when starting and
stopping the Advant Controller.
5.3.3.4 Check of Power Supply
Check of Non-redundant Power Supply

The CI810/CI810A, CI820 Fieldbus Communications Interface (FCI), or TB820 status LED - P
is illuminated when 24V d.c. is supplied to the FCI, and 5V (from the FCI) is supplied to the rest
of the I/O Station.
The supply system consists at least of one power supply.
Power can be checked at the FCI or TB820 on terminals L+ and L- with a voltmeter. The value
should be 24V d.c. (19.2 to 30). Power can also be checked at the power supply or on the
distribution strip.
Check of Redundant Power Supply

The CI810/CI810A, CI820 Fieldbus Communications Interface (FCI), or TB820 status LED - P
is illuminated when 24V d.c. is supplied to the FCI, and 5V (from the FCI) is supplied to the rest
of the I/O Station.
The supply system consists at least of two power supplies.
Power can be checked at the FCI or TB820 on terminals L+ and L- with a voltmeter. The value
should be 24V d.c. (19.2 to 30). Power can also be checked at the power supplies, diode unit or
on the distribution strip.
5-14 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 5.3.4 User Repair
5.3.4 User Repair
5.3.4.1 I/O Module Replacement
General
All I/O modules can be exchanged on-line an with the process power supply connected. This is
possible because the module deactivates when the I/O module lock switch is turned to unlock.
It is important to understand the consequences of a module exchange on-line and how it affects
the process. Replacement of an S800 I/O module affects all channels on the module. It also
sometimes indirectly affects the outputs via some application function, on another module.
The system software in the FCI checks automatically that all I/O modules function correctly. In
the event of module fault, and module exchange, the module and associated signals are marked
as faulty. While the fault marking is present, the value is not updated in the data base.
The system software checks that the module is inserted and correct. If this is the case, the
Fault-indicator (LED) extinguishes (after 10 seconds), the fault marking in the data base is reset
and the module resumes its normal function.
The following headings include general instructions for replacement of modules and aspects on
the handling of individual modules are presented in Table 5-8.
Practical Execution
Replace faulty or suspect I/O modules in the following way:
1. Read Section 2.2.1, Safety Regulations.
2. Special restrictions apply to each module type. See descriptions in Table 5-8 for useful
information on individual module types.
3. Check that the new module can replace the old.
4. Provide access to the module by loosening the module locking.
5. Grip the module firmly and extract the module.
6. Insert the new module carefully.
7. Store extracted modules in envelopes.
8. Ensure that the module contacts mate properly with the contacts in the MTU and activate
the locking mechanism in place.
9. Modules initialized automatically by the system and the fault indicating LED extinguishes
automatically after approximately 10 seconds.
10. Perform a function test on the new module.
3BSE 008 878R301 5-15

Additional Aspects on Individual S800 I/O Modules

Table 5-8 lists S800 I/O modules. Descriptions of these types are referred individually in the
table.
Table 5-8. Replacement Aspects of S800 I/O Modules
Module Type - Settings Comments

AI810, AI820 No settings Replacement with power applied is possible.
Analog Input Turning locking mechanism deactivates the
module.
AI830, AI835 No settings Replacement with power applied is possible.
Analog Input Turning locking mechanism deactivates the
module.
AO810,AO820 No settings Replacement with power applied is possible.
Analog Output It may be necessary to disconnect the output
connection to the process or set the process
device manually to a safe state before the
module is extracted.
Turning locking mechanism deactivates the
module.
DI810, DI811, No settings Replacement with power applied is possible.
DI814 Turning locking mechanism deactivates the
Digital Input module.
DI820, DI821 No settings Replacement with power applied is possible.
Digital Input Turning locking mechanism deactivates the
module.
DI830, DI831 No settings Replacement with power applied is possible.
DI885 Turning locking mechanism deactivates the
Digital Input module.
with SOE
DO810, DO814 No settings Replacement with power applied is possible.
DO815 It may be necessary to disconnect the output
Digital Output connection to the process or set the process
module.
5-16 3BSE 008 878R301

Table 5-8. Replacement Aspects of S800 I/O Modules (Continued)

DO820 No settings Replacement with power applied is possible.
Digital Output It may be necessary to disconnect the output
module.
DO821 No settings Replacement with system power applied is
Digital Output possible.
Caution!
Since the module has normally closed relay
contacts the field power must be removed
before replacement.
module, that is, relay contacts will close.
DP820 No settings Replacement with power applied is possible.
Pulse Counter It may be necessary to disconnect the output
module.
TU810, TU811, No settings Cannot be replaced or repaired with power
TU812, TU814, applied.
TU830, TU831, Disconnecting an MTU breaks the
TU835, TU836 ModuleBus communications bus and
and TU837 removes power to the MTUs that follow.
MTUs
MTUs mounted in the middle (between the
FCI and the number 12 MTU) need to have
the preceding or following MTUs moved in
order to disconnect the ModuleBus
connector.
3BSE 008 878R301 5-17

5.3.4.2 Power Supply Module Replacement
General
In single or parallel operation of power supplies, there will always be a disturbance of the
function when a power supply must be replaced; the station will not have power.
In a redundant power supply configuration, it is be possible to replace a power supply module
without disturbance of the function. To achieve that the installation see Section 3.1.4, SD811
and SD812 Power Supply Configurations and the correct replacement procedure that follows.
Practical Execution
Replace faulty or suspect power supply module in the following way:
For single or parallel operation do steps 1, 2 and 4 to13.
For redundant configuration do steps 1 to 14.
2. Check that the new module can replace the old.
3. Switch off the output from the module (only redundant configuration).
4. Switch off input power to the module.
5. Disconnect the wires.
6. Unmount the module by loosening the module locking.
7. Mount the new module.
8. Connect the input wires.
9. Switch on input power to the module.
10. Perform a function test on the new module.
11. Switch off input power to the module.
12. Connect the output wires.
13. Switch on input power to the module.
14. Switch on the output from the module (only redundant configuration).
5-18 3BSE 008 878R301

5.3.4.3 Communication Module Replacement
General
Normally communications modules can’t be exchanged on-line, the only exception is the CI820
in a redundant configuration.
It is important to understand the consequences of a module exchange and how it affects the
process.
• Replacement of a communication module type CI810/CI810A/CI830 or a CI820 in a
single configuration affects all channels on all the modules in an I/O station. The station
will loose power.
• Replacement of a single communication module type CI820 in a redundant configuration
has no affects on channels in an I/O station.
• Replacement of a communication module type TB810/TB811 affects all channels on all
the modules in all clusters except cluster 0. The communication will be broken to all
clusters except for cluster 0.
• Replacement of a communication module type TB815 affects all channels on all the
modules in an I/O station. The station will loose power.
• Replacement of a communication module type TB820, connected via a simplex optical
cable, affects all channels on all the modules in all clusters except cluster 0. The
communication will be broken to all clusters except for cluster 0. The cluster where the
TB820 should be replaced will be power less.
• Replacement of a communication module type TB820, connected via a duplex optical
cable, affects all channels on all the modules in all clusters after and including the cluster
where the replaced TB820 is located. The communication will be broken to all clusters
after where the replaced TB820 is located. The cluster where TB820 should be replaced
will be power less.
The following headings include general instructions for replacement of modules and aspects on
the handling of individual modules are presented in Table 5-9.
3BSE 008 878R301 5-19

Practical Execution
Replace faulty or suspect communication modules in the following way:
2. Special restrictions apply to each module type. See descriptions in Table 5-9 for useful
information on individual module types.
3. Check that the new module can replace the old for CI810/CI810A, CI820 and CI830, also
check the software version. If the wrong software version is found, then load new
software; see Section 5.3.5, Field Upgrade of CI810/CI810A/CI820/CI830 Basic Software
4. Disconnect the power supply/supplies from the module (both CI820s if TB815).
5. Disconnect the Advant Fieldbus 100/Profibus-DP and ModuleBus cables from the
module.
6. Extract the module.
7. Set the current Station address or Cluster address on the new module
8. Insert the new module carefully.
9. Connect the Advant Fieldbus 100/Profibus-DP and ModuleBus cables to the module.
10. Connect the power supply/supplies to the module.
11. Store extracted modules in protective envelopes.
12. Modules are initialized automatically by the system and it will takes approximately
60 seconds for a CI810/CI810A/CI820/CI830 to start up.
5-20 3BSE 008 878R301

Additional Aspects on Individual S800 Communications Modules

Table 5-9 lists S800 I/O modules. Descriptions of these types are referred individually in the
table.
Table 5-9. Replacement Aspects of S800 I/O Modules

CI810/CI810A Switch setting for AF 100 Fieldbus Can not be replaced with power applied.
FCI address Needs room to the left in order to be removed.
F R
P
In normal operation mode, before a CI810 is
T1 T2
replaced, the supply to the S800 I/O is to be

switched off. Power connections can be
removed by pulling the header terminals out of
SERVICE STN. ADDR.
4 56
the unit.
3
2
1 0 9
7
8
x 10
Station Address
CI810
3
2
4 56
1 0 9
7
8
x1 Switches Optical ModuleBus port for TB810/TB811 can be
L+ L+ SA
L- L- SB 1
AF100
2
Tx Rx
removed by pulling the connector(s) out of the
+
-
SH SH
+
-
Rx
Tx
unit.
SH SH
Fieldbus connections can be removed by pulling

the header terminals out of the unit.
CI820 Switch setting for AF 100 Fieldbus Can not be replaced with power applied.
FCI address Needs room to the left (or right) in order to be
F R
P
removed.
T1 T2

PR DU
replaced, the supply to the CI820 is to be

STN. ADDR.
3
2
4 56
10 9
7
8
x 10
Station Address
CI820
3
2
4 56
10 9
7 x1
8 Switches the unit.
L+ L+ SA
L- L- SB
AF100 Fieldbus connections can be removed by pulling
the header terminals out of the unit.
+
-
SH
SH
Address settings must be the same for

redundant FCI operation
CI830 Switch setting for Profibus-DP address Can not be replaced with power applied.
FCI Needs room to the left in order to be removed.
F R
P
RX
PROFIBUS
TX
replaced, the supply to the S800 I/O is to be
SERVICE STN. ADDR.
4 56
the unit.
3
2
1 0 9
7 x 10
8 Station Address
CI830
3
2
4 56
1 0 9
7 x1
8
Switches Optical ModuleBus port for TB810/TB811 can be
L+
PROFIBUS Tx Rx
removed by pulling the connector(s) out of the
L-
SA
SB Rx
Tx
unit.
Fieldbus connections can be removed by pulling
the D-way connector out of the unit.
3BSE 008 878R301 5-21

Table 5-9. Replacement Aspects of S800 I/O Modules (Continued)

TB810/811 No settings Optical ModuleBus cable can be removed by
pulling the connector(s) out of the unit.
Extract the module.
TB815 No settings Can not be replaced with power applied.
Interconnection One CI820 FCI needs to be moved in order to be
Unit removed.
In normal operation mode, before a TB815 is
replaced, the supply to the S800 I/O Station is to
be switched off. Power connections can be
the CI820 FCI.
TB820 Switch setting for I/O Cluster address Can not be replaced with power applied.
ModuleBus F R
P Needs room to the left of an MTU in order to be
ORx1 ORx2
Modem ERx
removed.
In normal operation mode, before a TB820 is
CLUSTER
3
4 56
7
Cluster Address replaced, the supply to the S800 I/O is to be
Switch
2
TB820
1

L+ L+ SA
L- L- SB removed by pulling the header terminals out of
X4 X5
Rx TxRx Tx
the unit.
Optical ModuleBus connections can be removed
by pulling the connector(s) out of the unit.
5-22 3BSE 008 878R301

Section 5.3.5 Field Upgrade of CI810/CI810A/CI820/CI830 Basic Software
5.3.4.4 Application Memory Reset

An FCI can keep an application program in memory for a long time even with the power supply
disconnected. To avoid a problem with an FCI that may have an “old application” program, the
application memory should be cleared. To clear the application memory in an FCI:
1. Set the address switches to 99.
2. Take away the power supply for a short moment.
3. Apply power and let the FCI restart -- waiting 45 seconds.
Now the application memory is cleared.
4. Set the address switches to the desired station address.
5. Take away the power supply for a short moment.
6. Apply power and let the FCI restart -- waiting 45 seconds.
Now the FCI is cleared and ready for application programming.
5.3.5 Field Upgrade of CI810/CI810A/CI820/CI830 Basic Software

The CI810/CI810A/CI820/CI830 software upgrade kit contains the following items:
• 1 pcs Diskette 3.5” with CI810/CI810A/CI820/CI830 basic system software and loading
software
• 2 pcs Update label
• 1 pcs Upgrade Description (same as this section)
Hardware Required
• PC with WINDOWS 3.1x
• Connection cable TK527
PC CI810/CI810A
CI820 or
CI830 (TB815)
COM1 RS232
Figure 5-6. Hardware Configuration
3BSE 008 878R301 5-23

5.3.5.1 Load the CI810/CI810A Software Upgrade

It is assumed that the PC communication port is COM1: and the diskette drive is A.
Procedure
1. Switch the power off at CI810/CI810A.
2. Set up an invalid Advant Fieldbus 100 address (90-99) at CI810/CI810A address switch.
3. Disconnects the Advant Fieldbus 100 cable.
4. Switch power on at CI810/CI810A and wait 45 seconds.
5. Switch the power off at CI810/CI810A.
6. Set the Station address on CI810/CI810A to a valid address (1 - 79).
7. Switch power on at CI810/CI810A and wait 45 seconds.
8. Connect the PC and the CI810/CI810A, using a TK527 cable between the RS232 service
port on the CI810/CI810A and the COM1 port of the PC.
9. Start WINDOWS on the PC.
10. Select <Run . . . > in the program manager’s <File> menu.
11. Type a:\setup_c1.pif
*If you are using drive b, type b:\setup.....
*If the serial port you are using is COM2, type a:\setup_c2.pif
12. You are asked:
‘CAUTION: Loading BASE software will stop all applications!
‘OK to load (Y/N) ?
Enter Y<CR>
13. Loading (takes about 10 minutes).
14. Press any Key (to finish).
What to do in Case of Problems?

Cable was disconnected during download or the power went down.
Solution
Restart CI810/CI810A by switching power off and on again.
Repeat the process described above.
Put the largest label on the back of the CI810/CI810A and the smaller one on the front of
CI810/CI810A according to Figure 5-7.
5-24 3BSE 008 878R301

F R
P
T1 T2
STN. ADDR.
4 56
3 7
x 10
2 8
1 0 9
4 56
3 7
1) x1
2 8 1) or CI810A
CI810 1 0 9
Label
Software SW*1.1/0 AF100
Version L+ L+ SA 1 2
L- L- SB
+ +
- -
SH SH
SH SH
Figure 5-7. CI810/CI810A Software Label Location
3BSE 008 878R301 5-25

5.3.5.2 Load the CI820 Software Upgrade

Software can be loaded on line to a CI820 in backup mode.
Procedure
To be able to load both CI820’s with new software without disturbance Advant Fieldbus 100
must be working on both AF 100 cables.
To be able to load one of the CI820’s with new software without distrubance the Advant
Fieldbus 100 cable must be connected to the other CI820, and the AF 100 must be working.
Load of the backup CI820
1. Connect the PC and the CI820 in backup state, using a TK527 cable between the
appropriate RS232 service port on the TB815 and the COM1 port of the PC.
2. Start WINDOWS on the PC.
3. Select <Run . . . > in the program manager’s <File> menu.
4. Type a:\setup_c1.pif
*If you are using drive b, type b:\setup....
*If the serial port you are using is COM2, type a:\setup _c2.pif
5. You are asked:
Enter Y<CR>
6. The backup CI820 will go to Fault state.
7. Power off/on on the backup CI820.
8. Loading (takes about 10 minutes).
9. Press any Key (to finish).
10. Put the largest label on the back of the CI820 and the smaller one on the front of CI820
according to Figure 5-8.
Load of the Primary CI820
1. Before loading start, be sure that the backup is up running (LED DU is on).
2. The best way is to make a commanded switch over first and then load the CI820 as
backup.
3. If it is impossible to make a commanded switch over, load the CI820 according to the
instruction above for Load of the backup CI820.
4. Put the largest label on the back of the CI820 and the smaller one on the front of CI820
5-26 3BSE 008 878R301


Solution
Restart CI820 by switching power off and on again.
F R
P
T1 T2
PR DU
STN. ADDR.
4 56
3 7 x 10
2 8
109
4 56
3 7x1
2 8
CI820 109
Label
SW*2.0/0
Software
L+ L+ SA AF100
Version L- L- SB
+
-
SH
SH
3BSE 008 878R301 5-27

5.3.5.3 Load the CI830 Software Upgrade

Procedure
• Switch the power off at CI830
• Set up an invalid station address (90-99) at CI830 address switch
• Disconnects the Profibus-DP cable
• Switch power on at CI830 and wait 45 seconds
• Switch the power off at CI830
• Set the Station address on CI830 to a valid address (1 - 79)
• Switch power on at CI830 and wait 45 seconds
• Connect the PC and the CI830, using a TK527 cable between the RS232 service port on
the CI830 and the COM1 port of the PC.
• Start WINDOWS on the PC.
• Select <Run . . . > in the program manager’s <File> menu.
• Type a:\setup_c1.pif
*If you are using drive b, type b:\setup.....
*If the serial port you are using is COM2, type a:\setup_c2.pif
• You are asked:
Enter Y<CR>
• Loading (takes about 10 minutes).
• Press any Key (to finish).

Solution
Restart CI830 by switching power off and on again.
Put the largest label on the back of the CI830 and the smaller one on the front of CI830
5-28 3BSE 008 878R301

F R
P
RX Tx
PROFIBUS
STN. ADDR.
4 56
3 7
x 10
2 8
1 09
5
4 6
3 7
x1
2 8
CI830 1 09
Label SW*1.1/0 PROFIBUS
L+
L-
SA
SB
Figure 5-9. CI830 Software Label Location
3BSE 008 878R301 5-29

5-30 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.1 AI810 Analog Input Module, 0...20 mA, 0...10V
Appendix A General Specification
A.1 AI810 Analog Input Module, 0...20 mA, 0...10V
Features
• 8 channels for 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, 0...10V
or 2...10V d.c., single ended unipolar inputs
• 1 group of 8 channels isolated from ground
F
• 12 Bit resolution
R
• Input shunt resistors protected to 30V by PTC resistor W
• Analog inputs are short circuit secured to ZP or +24V
• EMC protection 1
• DIN rail mounting
2
Description
The AI810 Analog Input Module has 8 channels. Each 3
channel can be either a voltage or current input.
The current input is able to handle a short circuit to the 4
transmitter supply at least 30V d.c without damage. Current
limiting is performed with a PTC resistor. The input 5
resistance of the current input is 250 ohm, PTC included.
The voltage input is able to withstand an over or 6
undervoltage of at least 30V d.c. Input resistance is
290k ohm. The EMC protection is placed on the module.
7
Transmitter supply can be connected to L1+, L1- and/or L2+,
L2-. 8
The module distributes the external transmitter supply to
each channel. This adds a simple connection to distribute the AI810
supply to 2- or 3-wire transmitters. There are no current 0..20 mA, 0..10V
limiting on the transmitter power terminals. Fused MTUs
TU830 and TU835 provides groupwise and channelwise
fusing.
All eight channels are isolated from the ModuleBus in one
group. Power to the input stages is converted from the 24V
on the ModuleBus.
(continued on next page)
3BSE 008 878R301 A-1

Description (continued)
Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green) and Warning (Yellow). The RUN LED indicates normal
operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in
Init state or Not configured state. In Not configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the
module.
The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK
signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The
POWOK comes from the FCI after power is applied.
Five different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU enables three wire connection to the devices
without additional terminals. The TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU has terminals for 24V process voltage inputs, but
requires external terminals for distribution of 24V power supply to the field devices. The extended MTU, TU835,
provides a fuse (3A max.) per channel for process power out. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male)
connector for connection to the process.
Technical Data
Table A-1. AI810 Analog Input Module Specifications at 25°C
AI810
Feature
Analog Input Module
Number of channels 8
Type of input Unipolar single ended
Measurement range 0...20 mA, 0...10V
Over/under range -5% / +15%
Input impedance (at voltage input) 290K Ω
Input impedance (at current input) ≥230 Ω, ≤275 Ω

(including PTC)
Maximum field cable length 600 meters
Voltage input, maximum non-destructive 30V d.c.

NMRR, 50 Hz, 60 Hz >40 dB
Intrinsic error (IEC51-1) Max. 0.1%
Resolution 12 bit
Temperature drift Current Typ. 50 ppm/°C

Max. 80 ppm/°C
Voltage Typ. 70 ppm/°C
Max. 100 ppm/°C
Update cycle time 5 ms
Current consumption 24V 40 mA
Power dissipation 1.5 W
A-2 3BSE 008 878R301

Table A-1. AI810 Analog Input Module Specifications at 25°C (Continued)
AI810
Feature
Analog Input Module
Voltage supervision Internal process supply
Fusing of transmitter supply on MTU
Input filter (rise time) 75 ms
Isolation Groupwise isolated from

ground (RIV=50V)
Mounting termination units TU810, TU812, TU814,

TU830 or TU835
MTU keying code AE
Safety Classification Mechanical Data

Class I according to IEC 536; (earth protected) Width 45 mm (1.77”)
Protection Rating Depth 97 mm (3.8”), 106 mm (4.2”) including connector
IP20 according to IEC 529, (IEC 144) Height 119 mm (4.7”)
Insulation Weight 0.2 kg (0.44 lbs.)
Rated insulation voltage 50V
Dielectric test voltage 500V a.c.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-3

Block Diagram AI810
FAULT
RUN
WARNING
L1+
ZP
L1+ Pos
I1U
I1I LP
ZP Block
L1+
I4U Mux FCI
I4I LP
ZP #
5VS
5V
0V
L2+ Power_ok
I5U
I5I LP
ZP
+UPInt +24V
ZP
L2+ -UPInt 0V24V
I8U
I8I LP
ZP
L2+
ZP
EM
A-4 3BSE 008 878R301

Process Connections
Table A-2. AI810 Process Connections
TU810 TU812
TU830 TU835
Process Connection (or TU814) D-Sub 25 male
Terminal Terminal
Terminal Connector (1)
+24V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) L1+ (2)
0V d.c. (ZP) L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) L1- (2)
Ch1, L1+ - - B1, B2 11 (F1)
Ch1, Voltage Input C1 3 C1 -
Ch1, Current Input B1 16 C2 12
Ch1, Return (ZP) A1 - A1, A2 -
Ch 2, L1+ - - B3, B4 21 (F2)
Ch 2, Voltage Input C2 4 C3 -
Ch 2, Current Input B2 17 C4 22
Ch 2, Return (ZP) A2 - A3, A4 -
Ch 3, L1+ - - B5, B6 31 (F3)
Ch 4, L1+ - - B7, B8 41 (F4)
Ch 5, L2+ - - B9, B10 51 (F5)
Ch 6, L2+ - - B11, B12 61 (F6)
Ch 6, Return (ZP) A6 - A11, A12 -
Ch 7, L2+ - - B13, B14 71 (F7)
Ch 7, Return (ZP) A7 - A13, A14 -
Ch 8, L2+ - - B15, B16 81 (F8)
Ch 8, Return (ZP) A8 - A15, A16 -
+24V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) L2+ (2)
0V d.c. (ZP) L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) L2- (2)
(1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-5

A-6 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.2 AI820 Differential Analog Input Module, +/- 20 mA, +/- 10V, +/- 5V
A.2 AI820 Differential Analog Input Module, +/- 20 mA, +/- 10V, +/- 5V
Features
• 4 channels for -20...+20 mA, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA,
-10...+10V, 0...10V, 2...10V, -5...+5V, 0...5V, 1...5V d.c.
bipolar differential inputs
• One group of 8 channels isolated from ground F
R
• Configurable on a per channel basis
W
• 14 Bit resolution plus sign
• Input shunt resistors protected to 30Vd.c. 1
• EMC protection
Description 2
The AI820 Analog Input Module has 4 differential, bipolar
current/voltage inputs. Each channel can be either a voltage
or current input.
The current inputs can withstand an accidental maximum 3
normal mode 30V d.c. connection. To protect the current
input circuit against dangerous input levels, that is, by
accidentally connecting a 24V source, the resistor rating of
the 250Ω current sense resistors is about 5 Watts. This is
4
intended only to temporarily protect one channel at a time.
The module distributes the external transmitter supply to
each channel. This adds a simple connection (with
extended MTUs) to distribute the supply to external 2 wire
transmitters. There is no current limiting on the transmitter AI820
power terminals. ±20 mA, ±10V Diff
All 4 channels are isolated from the ModuleBus in one
group. Power to the input stages is converted from the 24V
on the ModuleBus.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-7

operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any diagnostic condition is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the
module is in Init state or Not configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid
access to the module.
Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU enables three wire connection to the devices
without additional terminals. The TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU has terminals for 24V process voltage inputs, but
requires external terminals for distribution of 24V power supply to the field devices. The TU812 Compact MTU has a
D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process.
Technical Data
Table A-3. AI820 Differential Analog Input Module Specifications at 25°C
AI820
Feature
Analog Input Module
Type of input Bipolar differential
Measurement ranges (nominal) -20...+20 mA, 0...20 mA,

4...20 mA, -10...+10V, 0...10V,
2...10V, -5...+5V, 0...5V,
1...5V d.c.
Over/under range ± 15%
Input impedance (at voltage input) 200kΩ +/− 25% Common mode
800kΩ +/− 25% Normal mode
Input impedance (at current input) 250 Ω
Max. Differential d.c. input (Fault) 30V
Common mode voltage input 50V d.c.
CMRR, 50 Hz, 60 Hz 80 dB (>60 dB d.c.)
NMRR, 50 Hz, 60 Hz 33 dB
Intrinsic error (IEC51-1) Max. 0,1%
Resolution 14 bit plus sign
Temperature drift Current Max.50 ppm/°C

Voltage Max.70 ppm/°C
Update cycle time (all four channels) <26 ms
A-8 3BSE 008 878R301

Table A-3. AI820 Differential Analog Input Module Specifications at 25°C (Continued)
AI820
Feature
Analog Input Module
Power dissipation 1.7W
Voltage supervision Internal process supply
Input filter (rise time) 40 ms
Fusing of transmitter supply on Extended MTU
Isolation Groupwise isolated from ground

(RIV=50V)
Mounting termination units TU810, TU812, TU814 or

TU830
MTU keying code BB

3BSE 008 878R301 A-9

Block Diagram AI820
FAULT
RUN
WARNING
L1+
L1-
L1+
L1- Pos
I1U+
I1IB AMP
+ Block
I1I+
LPF
ModuleBus
I1- PGA CLK +/-
Mux
G=1/2 MBI-2
Data +/-
L1+ #
L1-
5VS
I2U+ CPU 5V
I2IB AMP
+ 0V
I2I+
LPF
I2- Power_ok
I3U+ +24V
+UPInt
I3IB AMP ZP
+ +0V24
I3I+ -UPInt
LPF
I3-
L2+
L2-
I4U+
I4IB AMP
I4I+ +
LPF
I4-
L2+
L2-
L2+
L2-
ZP
EM
A-10 3BSE 008 878R301

Process Connections
TU810 TU812
TU830
Terminal
Terminal Connector(1)
+24V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
0V d.c. (ZP) L1- 2, 15 L1- (2)
Ch1, L1+ - - B1, B2
Ch1, Voltage Input + C1 3 C1
Ch1, Current Bridge B1 16 C2
Ch1, L1- A1 - A1, A2
Ch 1, L1+ - - B3, B4
Ch 1, Current Input + C2 4 C3
Ch 1, Return - B2 17 C4
Ch 1, L1- A2 - A3, A4
Ch 2, L1+ - - B5, B6
Ch 2, Voltage Input + C3 5 C5
Ch 2, Current Bridge B3 18 C6
Ch 2, L1- A3 - A5, A6
Ch 2, L1+ - - B7, B8
Ch 2, L1- A4 - A7, A8
Ch 3, L2+ - - B9, B10
Ch 3, L2- A5 - A9, A10
Ch 3, L2+ - - B11, B12
Ch 3, L2- A6 - A11, A12
Ch 4, L2+ - - B13, B14
Ch 4, L2- A7 - A13, A14
Ch 4, L2+ - - B15, B16
Ch 4, L2- A8 - A15, A16
+24V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2)
0V d.c. (ZP) L2- 12, 25 L2- (2)
3BSE 008 878R301 A-11

A-12 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.3 AI830 RTD Input Module
A.3 AI830 RTD Input Module
Features
• 8 channels for RTD (Pt100, Cu10, Ni100 and Ni120 and
resistor) inputs
• 3-wire connection to RTDs
F
• 14 Bit resolution R
• Inputs are monitored for open-circuit, short-circuit and has a W
input grounded sensor
2
Description
The AI830 RTD Input Module has 8 channels for 3
measurement of temperature with resistive elements
(RTDs). Only 3-wire connections are possible. All the
4
RTDs must be isolated from ground.
The AI830 can be used with Pt100, Cu10, Ni100, Ni120 or 5
resistive sensors. Linearization and conversion of the
temperature to Centigrade or Fahrenheit is performed on
the module. Every channel can be individually configured. 6
The diagnostic is updated in a cyclic manner and can be

7
read any time. Diagnostics include: open circuit, short
circuit, error in reference channels, signal over range,
signal under range and power supply low. 8
The MainsFreq parameter is used to set mains frequency

filter cycle time. This will give a notch filter at the AI830
frequency specified (50 Hz or 60 Hz). RTD
Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run

(Green) and Warning (Yellow). The RUN LED indicates
normal operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any
error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the
module is in Init state, Error state or Not configured state.
In Not configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after
the first valid access to the module.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-13

Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU and the TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU
enables three wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin
(male) connector for connection to the process.
Technical Data
Table A-5. AI830 RTD Input Module Specifications at 25°C
AI830
Feature
RTD Input Module
Type of input 3-wire RTD:

Pt100, Cu10, Ni100, Ni120 and
resistive potentiometer
Measurement range See Table A-6
Voltage input, maximum ± 30V
CMRR, 50 Hz, 60 Hz >80 dB

Intrinsic error (IEC 51-1) See Table A-6
Resolution See Table A-6
Temperature drift See Table A-6
Update cycle time See Table A-6
Supervision Open-circuit (1), short-circuit,

reference channel, internal
power supply
ground (RIV=50V)

TU830
MTU keying code Advant Fieldbus

(1) For Cu10, Open-Circuit only
A-14 3BSE 008 878R301

Table A-6. AI830 Signal Range
Temperature Intrinsic Temperature

Sensor Type Resolution Update Cycle Time (1)
Range Error Drift
-80...80°C Pt100 (2) Max. 0.08% >12 bit Max. 5 ppm/°C 360 ms + n x 100 ms
-112...176°F Typ. 0.05%
-328...482°F Typ. 0.05%
-328...1562°F Typ. 0.05%
-60...180°C Ni100 (3) Max. 0.08% >12 bit Max. 5 ppm/°C 360 ms + n x 100 ms
-76...356°F according to Typ. 0.05%
DIN 43760
-80...260°C Ni120 (4) Max. 0.08% >13 bit Max. 5 ppm/°C 360 ms + n x 80 ms
-112...500°F Typ. 0.05%
-100...260°C Cu10 (5) Max. 0.2% >10 bit Max. 5 ppm/°C 360 ms + n x 100 ms
-148...500°F Typ. 0.15%
0...400Ω Resistor Max. 0.08% 14 bit Max. 5 ppm/°C 360 ms + n x 80 ms

Typ. 0.05%
(1) n = Number of active channels
(2) According to IEC 751
(3) According to DIN 43760
(4) According to MIL-T-24388C, TCR = 0, 00672
Ro = 120 ohms (MINCO)
(5) According to TRC = 0.00427, R25 = 10 ohms (MINCO)

3BSE 008 878R301 A-15

Block Diagram AI830
FAULT
RUN
WARNING
ZP
Pos
I1+
I1- LP
ZP Block
Mux CPU MBI

I4+ #
I4- LP 5VS
ZP
ModuleBus
5V
I5+ 0V
I5- LP Power_ok
ZP
+12V +24V
I8+ ZP
I8- LP -12V 0V24V
ZP
Ref:s
ZP
EM
A-16 3BSE 008 878R301

Process Connections
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
(or TU814) D-Sub 25 male
Connection Terminal
- L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
0V d.c. (ZP) L1- 2, 15 L1- (2)
- - - B1, B2
Ch1, + Input C1 3 C1
Ch1, - Input B1 16 C2
Ch1, Return (ZP) A1 - A1, A2
- - - B3, B4
Ch 2, + Input C2 4 C3
Ch 2, - Input B2 17 C4
Ch 2, Return (ZP) A2 - A3, A4
- - - B5, B6
- - - B7, B8
- - - B9, B10
Ch 5, - Input B5 20 C10
- - - B11, B12
Ch 6, - Input B6 21 C12
- - - B13, B14
Ch 7, - Input B7 22 C14
- - - B15, B16
Ch 8, + Input C8 10 C15
Ch 8, - Input B8 23 C16
- L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2)
0V dc (ZP) L2- 12, 25 L2- (2)
3BSE 008 878R301 A-17

A-18 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.4 AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module
A.4 AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module
Features
• 8 differential input channels for thermocouple/mV
• Channel 8 can be designated as the CJ-channel
(4-wire Pt100 RTD)
F
• Variety of thermocouples with the following characteristics: R
B, C, E, J, K, N, R, S an T
W
• 15 Bit resolution (A/D)
• Inputs are monitored for wire-break open-circuit
1
• EMC protection
• DIN rail mounting 2
Description 3
The AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module is part of the
S800 I/O. It provides 8 differential input channels for 4
Thermocouple/mV measurements. Measurement ranges
configurable per channel are: -30mV to +75mV linear, or
TC Types B, C, E, J, K, N, R, S an T. 5
One of the channels (Channel 8) may be configured for

6
“Cold Junction” (ambient) temperature measurements, thus
serving as CJ-channel for Ch. 1...7. The junction
temperature may be measured locally on the MTUs screw 7
terminals, or on a connection unit distant form the device.
Alternatively, a fix junction temperature for the module 8
may be set by the user (as parameter). Channel 8 may be
used in the same manner as Ch. 1...7 when no
CJ-temperature measurement is needed. AI835
TC/mV
Each input-channel can measure a mV type of signal source
(Thermocouple or linear), and may be grounded or
ungrounded.
Full self-calibration is obtained by means of 0V, 50 mV and
100 ohm references, which are regularly updated.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-19

operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in
Init state, Error state or Not configured state. In Not configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid
access to the module.
Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU or the TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU enables
three wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male)
connector for connection to the process.
Technical Data
Table A-8. AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Specifications at 25°C
AI835
Feature
Thermocouple/mV Input Module
Number of channels 8 (Differential)
Type of input -30 mV to 75 mV linear, or TC types B,

C, E, J, K, N, R, S an T
Measurement range See Table A-9
Input impedance > 1 MΩ
CJ-temperature measurement reference 4-wire connected IEC-751/Pt100 RTD
Maximum field cable length 600 meters (656 yd.)
CMV between channels, max. 25V RMS
CMRR, 50 Hz, 60 Hz 120 dB
Resolution (A/D) 15 bits

Intrinsic error (IEC51-1) 0.1%
Temperature drift Typ. 5 ppm/°C

Max. 30 ppm/°C
Filter, analog (1st order Low-pass) 10 Hz
Filter (integration) 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Update cycle time, max. 280 ms + n*80 ms

(n = active channels)
A-20 3BSE 008 878R301

Table A-8. AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Specifications at 25°C (Continued)
AI835
Feature
Thermocouple/mV Input Module
Supervision Module: reference channels, power
supply low
Channel TC: open-circuit
Linear: none
Pt100 (CH8): <-40°C (-40°F) and
>100°C (212°F)
Current consumption 24 V 50 mA
Current consumption 5 V 75 mA

(RIV=50V)
Mounting termination units TU810, TU812, TU814 or TU830
MTU keying code BA
Table A-9. AI835 Range /Linearization
Input Type Temperature Range

TC type B (1) 44...1820oC, 111...3308oF
TC type C 0...2300oC, 32...4172oF
TC type E (1) -270...1000oC, -454...1832oF
TC type J (1) -210...1200oC, -346...2192oF
TC type K (1) -270...1372oC, -454...2501oF
TC type N (1) -270...1300oC, -454...2372oF
TC type R (1) -50...1768oC, -58...3214oF
TC type S (1) -50...1768oC, -58...3214oF
TC type T (1) -270...400oC, -454...752oF
Linear range -30...75 mV
Pt100 RTD (for CJC) (2) -40...100oC, -40...212oF

(1) Linearization per IEC 584-1 1995, and following ITS 90 requirements.
(2) Sensor Type 11 applies to Channel 8 only, for the measuring of the
Cold Junction Compensation temperature.
NOTE
From the 11 Sensor Types above, one choice is to be selected by the user per channel.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-21


Block Diagram AI835
Fault
Run REFs MB = Modulebus

FIC = Full protocol module Interface Circuity
Warning MTI = Main Timer Interface
SPI = Serial Peripheral Interface
+CH1
EMC/
-CH1 LP
+CH2
EMC/
-CH2 LP
Data
Differential A/D
ANA-
CLK
LOG
MB
FIC
MUX #
Amplifier CTRL
+CH7
EMC/ (MTI) Pos(6:0)
-CH7 LP
ADR(SPI) pow_ok
+PCJC +5V
(low)
+CH8 EMC/ 0V
Pt100 LP
-CH8
+UPint ² +24V
-PCJC GNDA ²
0V_24V
ZP ² -UPint
EM
² ²
A-22 3BSE 008 878R301

Process Connections
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
Connection Terminal
Pt100, PCJC- L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
- L1- 2, 15 L1- (2)
- - - B1, B2
Ch1, + Input C1 3 C1
Ch1, - Input B1 16 C2
Ch1, Return (ZP) A1 - A1, A2
- - - B3, B4
- - - B5, B6
- - - B7, B8
- - - B9, B10
Ch 5, - Input B5 20 C10
- - - B11, B12
Ch 6, - Input B6 21 C12
- - - B13, B14
Ch 7, - Input B7 22 C14
- - - B15, B16
Ch 8, + Input C8 10 C15
Ch 8, - Input B8 23 C16
Pt100, PCJC+ L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2)
- L2- 12, 25 L2- (2)
3BSE 008 878R301 A-23

A-24 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.5 AO810 Analog Output Module, 0...20 mA
A.5 AO810 Analog Output Module, 0...20 mA
Features
• 8 channels of 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA outputs
• OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon error detection
• Analog Output is to be short circuit secured to ZP or +24V F
• EMC protection R
W
O
Description 1
The AO810 Analog Output Module has 8 unipolar analog
output channels. 2
To supervise the communication to the AD-converters the

serial data is read back and verified. The open-circuit 3
diagnostic is received during the readback.
4
Four LEDs are used to indicate the state of the device. The
RUN (green) LED indicates that the device is in
operational state. The FAULT (red) LED indicates that the 5
device is in error state. In Not configured state the FAULT
LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. 6
The WARNING (yellow) LED indicates that there is some
kind of process error such as an open circuit, or power 7
supply fault. OSP (yellow) LED indicates that the output
value is set to the OSP value.
8
The module performs self-diagnostic cyclically. Module
diagnostics include: Process power supply supervision
which is reported when supply voltage to output circuitry is
to low. The error is only reported, but the module will AO810
0..20 mA
continue to measure. Channel diagnostic include: Fault
detection of the channel. (Only reported on active
channels). The error is reported if the output current is less
than configured.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-25

The outputs of the module will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState
command is received. The watchdog timer is set by the controller (OSP timer) and is used for ModuleBus supervision.
The watchdog timer is re-triggered every time the correct node address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog
timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state and the active outputs (if any)
are set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or to use the last good value sent.
The output values will be kept as long as the module stays in the OSP state. To change the outputs the module first has to
leave this state. When reentering Operational State, the outputs are still kept with their OSP value until new valid values
are written.
enables wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin
Technical Data
Table A-11. AO810 Analog Output Module Specifications at 25°C
AO810
Feature
Analog Output Module
Output range 0(4)...20 mA
Over range 15%
Output load <500 ohms (1), 250 - 850 ohms (2)
Rise time 4 ms
Cycle time <2 ms
Propagation delay <6 ms
Intrinsic error (IEC51-1) Max. 0.1% at 0 - 500 ohms
Resolution 14 bit
Output Set as Predetermined (OSP) timer 256, 512, 1024 ms (3)

Temperature drift Typ. 30 ppm/°C
Max. 60 ppm/°C

(external supply), maximum
A-26 3BSE 008 878R301

Table A-11. AO810 Analog Output Module Specifications at 25°C (Continued)
AO810
Feature
Supervision Module: Power low
Channel: Open-circuit (current
output only)
Current consumption 5V, maximum 70 mA

(4)
Power dissipation 3W

(RIV=50V)
Mounting termination units TU810, TU812, TU814 and TU830
MTU keying code AE

(1) With supply connected to L1+ only
(2) With supply connected to L2+ only.
Note: RL = 250...850 ohms (with power supply connected to L2+)
Power supply min.= U drop + I max. x RL = 7.7V + 0.023*RL(>19.2V)
Power Supply max. = 30V
(3) 1024 ms are used for Master. Set by the user for MOD.
(4) 250 ohm load, 70% of nominal currrent, all channels activated. Supply L+ connected.

3BSE 008 878R301 A-27

Block Diagram AO810
L2+
FAULT L1+
RUN
WARNING ZP
OSP
# EMC O1
prot
Pos ZP
CPU
MBI-2
# EMC O8
5VS prot
5V ZP
ZD
Power_ok
EM
A-28 3BSE 008 878R301

Process Connections
Table A-12. A0810 Process Connections
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
Connection Terminal
+24V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
0V d.c. (ZP) L1- 2, 15 L1- (2)
- - - B1, B2
Ch1, + Output C1 3 C1
Ch1 Return (ZP) A1 16 A1, A2
- - - B3, B4
Ch 2, + Output C2 4 C3
- - - B5, B6
- - - B7, B8
- - - B9, B10
- - - B11, B12
- - - B13, B14
- - - B15, B16
+24V dc L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2)
0V dc (ZP) L2- 12, 25 L2- (2)
3BSE 008 878R301 A-29

A-30 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.6 AO820 Bipolar Analog Output Module, -20 mA...+20 mA, -10V...+10V
A.6 AO820 Bipolar Analog Output Module, -20 mA...+20 mA, -10V...+10V
Features
• 4 channels of -20 mA...+20 mA, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA or -
10V...+10V, 0...10V, 2...10V outputs
• Individually galvanically isolated channels
F
• OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon error detection R
• EMC protection W
O
1
Description
The AO820 Analog Output Module has 4 bipolar analog
output channels. The choice of current or voltage output is
configurable for each channel. There are separate sets of 2
terminals for voltage and current outputs, and it is up to the
user to wire outputs properly. The only differences between
current or voltage channel configuration is in software
settings.
3
To supervise the communication to the D/A-converters the
output data is read back and verified. The open-circuit
diagnostics are read continuously as well.
Four LEDs are used to indicate the state of the device. The
RUN (green) LED indicates that the device is in 4
operational state. The FAULT (red) LED indicates that the
device is in an error state, or a power fault has been
detected. In Not configured state the FAULT LED is turned
off after the first valid access to the module. The
WARNING (yellow) LED indicates that there is some kind AO820
of process error such as an open circuit. OSP (yellow) LED ±20 mA, ±10V Isolated
indicates that the output values are set to the OSP value.
The module cyclically performs self-diagnostics. Module
diagnostics include: Process power supply supervision
causes a module failure if detected. Channel diagnostics
include: Fault detection of the channel. (Only reported on
active channels). The error is reported if the output current
is different than configured (that is, open wire condition).
3BSE 008 878R301 A-31

command is received. The watchdog timer is set by the controller and is used for ModuleBus supervision. The watchdog
timer is re-triggered every time the correct node address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog timer expires
or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state and the active outputs (if any) are set to
their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or as the last good value sent.
are written.
enables wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin
Technical Data
Table A-13. AO820 Analog Output Module Specifications at 25°C
AO820
Feature
Output ranges (nominal) -20 mA...+20 mA, 0...20 mA, 4...20

mA or -10V...+10V, 0...10V, 2...10V
Over range ± 15%
Output load, current outputs <550 ohms - Nominal ranges

Including wire resistance <510 ohms - Over-range
Output load, voltage outputs >2k ohms
Rise time <0.4 ms
Cycle time for all channels <1.2 ms
Propagation delay <2.4 ms
Intrinsic error (IEC51-1) Voltage Max. 0.1%

Current at 250 ohms Max. 0.1%
Resolution 12 bits plus sign
Output Set as Predetermined (OSP) timer 256, 512, 1024 ms (1)
Temperature drift Max. 90 ppm/°C
A-32 3BSE 008 878R301

Table A-13. AO820 Analog Output Module Specifications at 25°C (Continued)
AO820
Feature
Power dissipation (2) 2.8 W
Isolation Individually isolated, channel-to-

channel and to circuit common
(RIV=50V)
MTU keying code BC

(2) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated.

3BSE 008 878R301 A-33

Block Diagram AO820
FAULT
RUN Iso Power U,I Amp
WARNING and Amp
OSP O1U+
EMC
S/H protect O1I+
O1U-
Current sense
O1I-
ZP1
Pos CPU
DAT+ EM
DAT-
CLK+
ModuleBus
CLK- #
5VS
MBI-2
Iso Power U,I Amp

5V and Amp
0V O4U+
EMC
+24V Amp protect O4I-
+0V24 O4U-
Current sense
Block O4I-
Power_ok ZP4
EM
A-34 3BSE 008 878R301

Process Connections
Table A-14. A0820 Process Connections
TU810 TU812
TU830
Terminal
+24V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
0V d.c. (ZP) L1- 2, 15 L1- (2)
- - - B1, B2
Ch1, Current Output + C1 3 C1
Ch1, Current Output - B1 16 C2
- A1 - A1, A2
- - - B3, B4
Ch1, Voltage Output + C2 4 C3
Ch1, Voltage Output - B2 17 C4
- A2 - A3, A4
- - - B5, B6
- A3 - A5, A6
- - - B7, B8
- A4 - A7, A8
- - - B9, B10
- A5 - A9, A10
- - - B11, B12
- A6 - A11, A12
- - - B13, B14
- A7 - A13, A14
- - - B15, B16
- A8 - A15, A16
+24V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2)
0V d.c. (ZP) L2- 12, 25 L2- (2)
3BSE 008 878R301 A-35

A-36 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.7 CI810/CI810A Fieldbus Communications Interface (FCI)
A.7 CI810/CI810A Fieldbus Communications Interface (FCI)
Features
• 2 twisted-pair Advant Fieldbus 100 modems which allows
use of redundant cable media
• Supervisory functions of I/O ModuleBus F R
P
• Isolated power supply to I/O modules T1 T2
• OSP handling and configuration

Description
The CI810/CI810A Fieldbus Communications Interface
(FCI) is an intelligent communication interface between an
Advant Controller via the Advant Fieldbus 100 fieldbus
and the S800 I/O modules via the ModuleBus.
CI810/CI810A has four basic parts: Module termination SERVICE
board, power supply board, processor board and the fiber STN. ADDR.
4 56
optic ModuleBus module (see block diagram). 3 7 x 10
2 8
The power supply board has an isolated power converter 109
4 56
that generates a short circuit proof +5V supply for the 1)
3 7 x1
2 8
CI810/CI810A and I/O modules. It also contains opto- CI810 109
isolated RS232 drivers/receivers for the service port.
The Processor board contains the CPU, RAM, Flash AF100 Tx Rx
L+ L+ SA 1 2
PROM, ModuleBus interfaces, Advant Fieldbus 100 L- L- SB
protocol chip, LED indicators and two rotary switches for + + Tx
the units AF100 station address. - -
SH SH
The termination board is a unit where most of the X1B SH Rx
SH
connections to the outside takes place. It is grounded to the
DIN-rail through a metallic spring connector. The board X1A
carries screw terminals for power supply and redundant
power supply monitoring, screw terminals for
Advant Fieldbus 100 twisted-pair, connector for the service X2 X3
port, connector for the Optical ModuleBus Port
1) or CI810A
TB810/TB811 and the electrical ModuleBus. It also carries
a replaceable fuse for the +24V supply of the I/O modules
and the electrical ModuleBus and a capacitor for back-up
of memory.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-37

Technical Data
Table A-15. CI810/CI810A FCI Specifications
Item Value
Microprocessor (CPU) Motorola MC68340 running at 8 bit
mode with a speed of 16 MHz
Flash PROM 512 kbyte
Fast RAM CI810 256 kbyte (backed-up)
C!810A 512 kbyte (backed-up)
RAM back-up time 10 minutes (1F capacitor)
Power Input 24V d.c. (19.2 - 30)
Rated isolation voltage 50V
Isolation test voltage 500V a.c.
Power input fuse (F1), valid only for 1.6A Fast
electrical ModuleBus, ModuleBus feed
Power consumption at 24V d.c. 110 mA
Power supply monitoring inputs Max. input voltage: 30V
Min. input voltage for high level: 15V
Max. input voltage for low level: 8V
Service port (D-sub 9-pole socket) Opto-isolated (RS-232);
19.2 Kbaud/s maximum
Advant Fieldbus (Ch1 & Ch2) Max 32 loads
Isolation test voltage 2kV
ModuleBus, valid for local/electrical Maximum of 12 I/O modules
With opto-coupling Maximum of 24 I/O modules
Power output - ModuleBus 24V max. = 1.3A
5V max. = 1.5A
A-38 3BSE 008 878R301

Table A-15. CI810/CI810A FCI Specifications
Item Value
Connector for Optical ModuleBus Fiber optic interface, one transmit and
(TB810/TB811) one receive connection.
Indicators R(un) LED: Green indicates that
CI810 is operational
F(ault) LED: Red indicates a fault
condition; Reset and halt (CPU signal)
turns the LED on
P(owok) LED: Green indicates that the
DC/DC converter generates a valid
+5V d.c.
T1 and T2 traffic LEDs: Yellow
(blinking) indicates that the CI810 is
receiving data on the two AF100
twisted-pair channels respectively
RX, TX on TB810 indicate traffic on
the optical ModuleBus.

Protection Rating Depth 122 mm (4.8”)
IP20 according to IEC 529, (IEC 144) Height 170 mm (6.7”) including latch
3BSE 008 878R301 A-39

Connections
Table A-16. Power Supply Connections

X1B - 1 L+ +24V d.c. Supply In
X1B - 2 L+ +24V d.c. Supply Out
Redundant Power Supply “A”
X1B - 3 SA Monitoring Input
X1A - 1 L- 0V d.c. Supply In
X1A - 2 L- 0V d.c. Supply Out
Redundant Power Supply “B”
X1A - 3 SB Monitoring Input
Table A-17. AF 100 Connections

X2 - 1 + Ch1 + Signal
X2 - 2 - Ch1 - Signal
X2 - 3 SH Ch1 Shield
Table A-18. Service Port (X4)

1
Transmit Data
2 TD channel B
Receive Data
3 RD channel B
4
5 SG Signal Ground
6
Receive Data
channel A (for
7 RDA debugging only)
Transmit Data
channel A (for
8 TDA debugging only)
9
A-40 3BSE 008 878R301

Block Diagram CI810/CI810A
E
X3
Fiber Optic RX
O
SH2 4
ModuleBus Module
E
3
TX
O
CH2- 2
TB810
CH2+ 1
LOGIC
STN.
ADDR BAP
X2
SH1 4
MC68340
3
DDCC+
CH1- 2
CH1+ 1
FLASH
RAM +VB
T1 Reset logic,
+5V Supervision
T2
RS-485
+5V +5V
P(owok) RS-485 DIN-rail
R(un) X9
0V 0V POWOK
F(ault) D+,D-
+5V CLK+,CLK-
POS(9:0)
+5V
+5V Connector
+5V +5V 0V
0V24
0V +24V
0V 0V
X4
0V
Service Port
Connector
BATOK
+5V
X1A
0V SB 3
Power Supply Monitor B
IRQ7-N
2
DC DC L- 1 0V d.c.
DC DC F1
X1B
SA 3
Power Supply Monitor A
2
L+ 1 +24V d.c.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-41

A-42 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.8 CI820 Fieldbus Communications Interface (FCI)
A.8 CI820 Fieldbus Communications Interface (FCI)
Features
• Redundant operation with another CI820 and a TB815 F R
Interconnection Unit P
• 1 twisted-pair Advant Fieldbus 100 modem port and a second T1 T2

PR DU
channel to the partner CI820 allows use of redundant cable
media
• Monitors each other to discover malfunctions and to take
over if primary FCI fails
• Supervisory functions of I/O ModuleBus
• Redundant isolated power supply to I/O modules on
electrical ModuleBus
STN. ADDR.
Description 4 56
3 7 x 10
2 8
The CI820 Fieldbus Communications Interface (FCI) is an 109
intelligent communication interface between an Advant 4 56
3 7x1
Controller via the AF 100 fieldbus and the S800 I/O CI820
2 8
109
modules via the ModuleBus. When used with a partner
CI820 it provides redundant communications to the Advant
Controller and I/O modules.
L+ L+ SA AF100
CI820 has three basic parts: Module termination board, L- L- SB
power supply board, and processor board. +
-
The power supply board has an isolated power converter SH
that generates a short circuit proof +5V supply for the X1B
SH
CI820 and I/O modules. A separate power converter X1A
generates +5V to power the ModuleBus. The ModuleBus
power converter allows 1:1 redundant operation with the
partner’s ModuleBus power converter. It also contains
X2
opto-isolated RS232 drivers/receivers for the service port.
The Processor board contains the CPU, RAM, Flash
PROM, ModuleBus interfaces, Advant Fieldbus 100
protocol chip, LED indicators and two rotary switches for
the units Advant Fieldbus 100 station address, and a
capacitor for back-up of memory.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-43

The termination board is a unit where most of the connections to the outside takes place. It is grounded to the DIN-rail
through a metallic spring connector. The board carries screw terminals for power supply and redundant power supply
monitoring, screw terminals for Advant Fieldbus 100 twisted-pair. It also carries a connector to the TB815
Interconnection Unit for the service port, and the optical and electrical ModuleBus.
Technical Data
Table A-19. CI820 FCI Specifications
Item Value
Fast SRAM 512 kbyte (backed-up)
Power consumption at 24V d.c. (typical) 250 mA
Min. input voltage for high level: 15 V
Max. input voltage for low level: 8 V
Service port (D-sub 9-pole socket) Opto-isolated (RS-232);
Advant Fieldbus (Ch1 & Ch2) Max 32 loads
Isolation test voltage 2kV
ModuleBus Maximum of 12 I/O modules
With opto-coupling Maximum of 24 I/O modules
A-44 3BSE 008 878R301

Table A-19. CI820 FCI Specifications (Continued)
Item Value
Power output - ModuleBus 24V max. = 1.3A
5V max. = 1.5A
Indicators R(un) LED: Green indicates that CI820
is operational.
condition; Reset and halt (CPU signal)
turns the LED on.
DC/DC converter generates a valid +5V
d.c.
T1 and T2 traffic LEDs: Yellow
(blinking) indicates that the CI820 is
receiving data on the two AF100
twisted-pair channels respectively.
PR(imary) LED: Yellow indicates that it
is operating as the primary FCI.
DU(al) LED: Green indicates that both
FCI are configured for redundancy and
redundant operation is OK.

3BSE 008 878R301 A-45

Connections

X1B - 3 SA Monitoring Input
X1A - 3 SB Monitoring Input
Table A-21. Advant Fieldbus 100 Connections

A-46 3BSE 008 878R301

Block Diagram - Redundant CI820s with TB815
FCL FCL
GLUE GLUE
BAP2 BAP2
Termination
RS-485
RS-485
MC68340 MC68340
DDCC+
TB810
TB810
PR FLASH PR
DU DU
RAM RAM
T1 Reset logic, Reset logic, T1
+5V Superv.
Electrical Modulebus
+5V Superv. T2
T2
Connector
BC +5V +5V +5V +5V BC P
P
0V 0V R
R
F
CI820-2 0V 0V 0V 0V CI820-2 F
POWOK MB
+5V MB
DC DC
DC +5V +5V +5V
DC
+5V
+5V +5V
DC DC
Service Port
Service Port
Connector
Connector
DC 0V
DC
0V 0V 0V
IRQ7-N
IRQ7-N
0V 0V
DC DC DC DC
DC DC DC DC
+24V/0V24
+5V +5V +5V +5V

OWN OWN
PARTNER PARTNER
0V 0V 0V 0V
Current
Current
Limiter
Limiter
TB815
1 CH1+
1 CH1+
2 CH1-
2 CH1-
4 SH1
4 SH1
X1A
X1B
X1A
X1B
1
2
3
1
2
3
3
2
1
3
2
1
X2
X2
3
CI820 CI820
DIN-rail
3BSE 008 878R301 A-47

A-48 3BSE 008 878R301

A.9 CI830 Fieldbus Communications Interface (FCI)
Features
• Profibus-DP fieldbus interface.
• Supervisory functions of I/O ModuleBus
F R
• Isolated power supply to I/O modules P
RX TX
PROFIBUS
Description
The CI830 Fieldbus Communications Interface (FCI) is an
intelligent communication interface between a Controller
via the Profibus-DP fieldbus and the S800 I/O modules via
the ModuleBus.
CI830 has four basic parts: Module termination board,
power supply board, processor board and the fiber optic SERVICE
ModuleBus module (see block diagram). STN. ADDR.
4 56
3 7 x 10
The power supply board has an isolated power converter 2 8
that generates a short circuit proof +5V supply for the 109
4 56
CI830 and I/O modules. It also contains opto-isolated 3 7 x1
2 8
RS232 drivers/receivers for the service port. CI830 109
The Processor board contains the CPU, RAM, Flash

PROFIBUS Tx Rx
PROM, ModuleBus interfaces, Profibus-DP protocol chip, X3
LED indicators and two rotary switches for the units
L+
Profibus station address. Tx
L-
The termination board is a unit where most of the SA
connections to the outside takes place. It is grounded to the SB Rx
DIN-rail through a metallic spring connector. The board
carries screw terminals for power supply and redundant
power supply monitoring, D-way terminal for Profibus-DP, X1
connector for the service port, connector for the Optical
ModuleBus Port TB810/TB811 and the electrical
ModuleBus. It also carries a replaceable fuse for the +24V X2
supply of the I/O modules and the electrical ModuleBus
and a capacitor for back-up of memory.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-49

Technical Data
Table A-22. CI830 FCI Specifications
Item Value
Fast RAM 256 kbyte (backed-up)
Rated Isolation Voltage 50V
Isolation Test Voltage 500V a.c.
Power Input Fuse (F1), ModuleBus feed Electronic circuit brake should not be
exchanged
Power Consumption at 24V d.c. 110 mA
Power Dissipation 2.6 W
Power Supply Monitoring Inputs Max. input voltage: 30V
Min. input voltage for high level: 15V
Max. input voltage for low level: 8V
Service Port (D-sub 9-pole socket) Opto-isolated (RS-232);
Profibus-DP (D-sub 9-pole socket) Opto-isolated (RS-485);
12 Mbaud/s maximum
ModuleBus Maximum of 12 I/O modules
Power Output - ModuleBus 24V max. = 1.3A
5V max. = 1.5A

A-50 3BSE 008 878R301

Connections
Table A-23. Power Supply Connections (X1)

4 L+ +24V d.c. Supply In
3 L- 0V d.c. Supply Int
2 SA Monitoring Input
1 SB Monitoring Input
Table A-24. Service Port (X3)

1
2 TD Transmit Data channel B
3 RD Receive Data channel B
4
5 SG Signal Ground
6
Receive Data channel A (for
7 RDA debugging only)
Transmit Data channel A (for
8 TDA debugging only)
9
3BSE 008 878R301 A-51

Table A-25. FCI Profibus-DP Connections (X2)

1 Shield Shield/protective ground
2 - Not used
3 RxD/TxD-P Receive/Transmit data - plus
4 - Not used
5 DGND Data ground
6 VP Supply voltage for the
terminating resistors
7 - Not used
8 RxD/TxD-N Receive/Transmit data - minus
9 - Not used
A-52 3BSE 008 878R301

Block Diagram CI830
E
Fiber Optical RX
O
Modulebus Module
E
TX X2
O
SHIELD 1
VP 6
DGND 5
Profibus Connector
GLUE DSUB9
STN. RxD/TxD-P 3
ADDR SPC4 RS-485
8
RxD/TxD-N
MC68340
DDCC+
FLASH
RAM Reset logic,

+VB
Rx
Tx +5V Supervsion
RS-485
+5V +5V
P(owok) RS-485
DIN-rail
R(un) X9
0V 0V POWOK
F(ault) D+,D-
CLK+,CLK-
POS(9:0)
+5V
Electrical Modulebus
+5V Connector
+5V +5V 0V
0V24
0V +24V
0V 0V
X3
0V Service Port
Connector
BATOK
+5V
X1
0V SB 1
IRQ7-N
L- 3
DC DC
DC DC F1
SA 2
L+ 4
3BSE 008 878R301 A-53

A-54 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.10 DI810 Digital Input Module, 24V
A.10 DI810 Digital Input Module, 24V
Features
• 16 channels for 24V d.c. inputs with current sink
• 2 isolated groups of 8 with voltage supervision
• Input status indicators
• EMC protection F
R
W
Description
The DI810 is a 16 channel 24V digital input module for the 1
S800 I/O. This module has 16 digital inputs. The input 2
voltage range is 18 - 30 volt d.c. and the input current is 3
6 mA at 24V. The inputs are divided into two individually 4
isolated groups with eight channels and one voltage
supervision input in each group. 5
6
Every input channel consists of current limiting 7
components, EMC protection components, input state 8
indication LED and optical isolation barrier.
9
Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run 10
(Green) and Warning (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per
11
channel (16) indicate input state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The
12
RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING
LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED 13
indicates that the module is in Init state or Not configured 14
state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off 15
after the first valid access to the module. 16
The process voltage supervision input gives an error signal
if the voltage disappears, and the Warning LED turns on. DI810
The error signal can be read via the ModuleBus. 24V
The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is

inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the
POWOK signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated
when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position.
The POWOK comes from the FCI after power is applied.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-55

The input channels can be digitally filtered. The different filter times that can be achieved are 2, 4, 8 and 16 ms. This
means that noise pulses shorter than the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than 3, 6, 12 and 24 ms will get
through the filter.
without additional terminals. The TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU has terminals for 24V process voltage supervision
inputs, but requires external terminals for distribution of 24V power supply to the devices. The TU812 Compact MTU
has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process.
Technical Data
Table A-26. DI810 Digital Input Module Specifications
DI810
Feature
Digital Input Module
Number of channels 16 (2 x 8), current sink
Rated voltage 24V d.c.

(process power supply range) (18 to 30V d.c.)
Input voltage range, “1” 15 to 30V
Input voltage range, “0” -30 to +5V
Nominal input channel current 6 mA @ 24V d.c.
Input Impedance 3.5 kΩ
Filter times (digital, selectable) 2, 4, 8, 16 ms
Process voltage supervision 2 channels (1 per group)
Current consumption +5V 50 mA

(1)

ground (RIV=50V)

TU830
MTU keying code AA

(1) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated at
nominal voltage of 24 Volts.
A-56 3BSE 008 878R301


Block Diagram DI810

BIC GROUP 1 X2
EMC- L1+
BARRIER U1
CH 1 I1
FAULT
RUN L1+
CH 2 I2
WARNING MBI-1 .
. .
ASIC . .
. L1+
X1
Process Connector
CH 8 I8
+5VI
+5V
RESET
24V SUPER-
ModuleBus Connector
POWER-OK ERROR 1-8 VISION

0V L1-
DAT
DAT-N RS-485
GROUP 2
POS0-9
EMC- L2+
BLOCK BARRIER L2+
8 8 I 9-16
/ CH 9-16 /
24V SUPER-
EEPROM ERROR 9-16 VISION
L2-
EM
3BSE 008 878R301 A-57

Process Connections
Table A-27. DI810 Process Connections
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
Connection Terminal
+24V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
0V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2)
Ch1/Ch 2, L1+ - - B1, B2
Ch1 Input C1 3 C1
Ch 2 Input B1 16 C2
Ch1/Ch2, L1- A1 - A1, A2
Ch 3/Ch 4, L1+ - - B3, B4
Ch 3 Input C2 4 C3
Ch 4 Input B2 17 C4
Ch 3/Ch 4, L1- A2 - A3, A4
Ch 5/Ch 6, L1+ - - B5, B6
Ch 5 Input C3 5 C5
Ch 6 Input B3 18 C6
Ch 5/Ch 6, L1- A3 - A5, A6
Ch 7/Ch 8, L1+ - - B7, B8
Ch 7 Input C4 6 C7
Ch 8 Input B4 19 C8
Ch 7/Ch8, L1- A4 - A7, A8
Ch 9/Ch 10, L2+ - - B9, B10
Ch 9 Input C5 7 C9
Ch 10 Input B5 20 C10
Ch 9/Ch 10, L2- A5 - A9, A10
Ch 11/Ch 12, L2+ - - B11, B12
Ch 11 Input C6 8 C11
Ch 11/Ch 12, L2- A6 - A11, A12
Ch 13/Ch 14, L2+ - - B13, B14
Ch 13/Ch 14, L2- A7 - A13, A14
Ch 15/ Ch16, L2+ - - B15, B16
Ch 15/Ch16, L2- A8 - A15, A16
+24V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2)
0V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2- (2)
A-58 3BSE 008 878R301

A.11 DI811 Digital Input Module, 48V
Features
• 16 channels for 48V d.c. inputs
• 2 isolated groups of 8 with voltage supervision
R
W
Description
The DI811 is a 16 channel 48V digital input module for the 1
S800 I/O. This module has 16 digital inputs. The input 2
signal voltage range is 36 - 60 volt d.c. and the input 3
current is 4 mA at 48V. The inputs are divided into two 4
individually isolated groups with eight channels and one
voltage supervision input in each group. 5
6
9
11
12

3BSE 008 878R301 A-59

through the filter.
Technical Data
DI811
Feature

(process power supply range) (36 to 60 V d.c.)
Input signal voltage range, “1” 30 to 60 V
Input signal voltage range, “0” -60 to +10 V
Input Impedance 11 kΩ

(1)

ground (RIV=50V)

TU830
MTU keying code BD

A-60 3BSE 008 878R301


Block Diagram DI811

BIC GROUP 1 X2
EMC- L1+
BARRIER U1
CH 1 I1
FAULT
RUN L1+
CH 2 I2
WARNING MBI-1 .
. .
ASIC . .
. L1+
X1
Process Connector
CH 8 I8
+5VI
+5V
RESET
48V SUPER-
ModuleBus Connector
POWER-OK ERROR 1-8 VISION

0V L1-
DAT
DAT-N RS-485
GROUP 2
POS0-9
EMC- L2+
BLOCK BARRIER L2+
8 8 I 9-16
/ CH 9-16 /
48V SUPER-
L2-
EM
3BSE 008 878R301 A-61

Process Connections
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
Connection Terminal
+48V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
0V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2)
Ch1/Ch 2, L1+ - - B1, B2
Ch1 Input C1 3 C1
Ch 2 Input B1 16 C2
Ch1/Ch2, L1- A1 - A1, A2
Ch 3/Ch 4, L1+ - - B3, B4
Ch 3 Input C2 4 C3
Ch 4 Input B2 17 C4
Ch 3/Ch 4, L1- A2 - A3, A4
Ch 5/Ch 6, L1+ - - B5, B6
Ch 5 Input C3 5 C5
Ch 6 Input B3 18 C6
Ch 5/Ch 6, L1- A3 - A5, A6
Ch 7/Ch 8, L1+ - - B7, B8
Ch 7 Input C4 6 C7
Ch 8 Input B4 19 C8
Ch 7/Ch8, L1- A4 - A7, A8
Ch 9/Ch 10, L2+ - - B9, B10
Ch 9 Input C5 7 C9
Ch 9/Ch 10, L2- A5 - A9, A10
Ch 11/Ch 12, L2+ - - B11, B12
Ch 11/Ch 12, L2- A6 - A11, A12
Ch 13/Ch 14, L2+ - - B13, B14
Ch 13/Ch 14, L2- A7 - A13, A14
Ch 15/ Ch16, L2+ - - B15, B16
Ch 15/Ch16, L2- A8 - A15, A16
+48V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2)
0V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2- (2)
A-62 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.12 DI814 Digital Input Module, 24V Current Source
A.12 DI814 Digital Input Module, 24V Current Source
Features
• 16 channels for 24V d.c. inputs with current source
• 2 Isolated groups of 8 with voltage supervision
R
W
Description
The DI814 is a 16 channel 24V digital input module with 1
current source for the S800 I/O. The input voltage range is 2
18 - 30 volt dc and the input current source is 6 mA at 24V. 3
The inputs are divided into two individually isolated 4
groups with eight channels and one voltage supervision
input in each group. 5
6
9
11
12

3BSE 008 878R301 A-63

through the filter.
Technical Data
DI814
Feature
Number of channels 16 (2 x 8), current source

(process power supply range) (18 to 30V d.c.)
Input voltage range, “1” 15 to 30 V
Input voltage range, “0” -30 to +5 V
Input Impedance 3.5 kΩ
Maximum Field Cable Length 600 meters (656 yd.)

(1)

ground (RIV=50V)

TU830
MTU keying code BE

A-64 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.12 DI814 Digital Input Module, 24V Current Source

Block Diagram DI814

BIC GROUP 1 X2
EMC- UP1
BARRIER U1
CH 1 I1
FAULT
U2
RUN
CH 2 I2
WARNING MBI-1 .
X1 . .
ASIC . .
. U18
+5VI
Process Connector
CH 8 I8
RESET
+5V
POWER-OK 24V SUPER-
Modulebus Connector
0V ERROR 1-8 VISION
DAT+ ZP1
DAT- RS-485
CLK+
CLK- RS-485
GROUP 2
POS0-6 EMC- UP2
BLOCK BARRIER U9-16
8 CH 9-16 8 I 9-16
/ /
24V SUPER-
ZP2
EM
3BSE 008 878R301 A-65

Process Connections
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
Connection Terminal
+24V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
0V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2)
Ch1/Ch 2, L1+ - - B1, B2
Ch1 Input C1 3 C1
Ch 2 Input B1 16 C2
Ch1/Ch2, L1- A1 - A1, A2
Ch 3/Ch 4, L1+ - - B3, B4
Ch 3 Input C2 4 C3
Ch 4 Input B2 17 C4
Ch 3/Ch 4, L1- A2 - A3, A4
Ch 5/Ch 6, L1+ - - B5, B6
Ch 5 Input C3 5 C5
Ch 6 Input B3 18 C6
Ch 5/Ch 6, L1- A3 - A5, A6
Ch 7/Ch 8, L1+ - - B7, B8
Ch 7 Input C4 6 C7
Ch 8 Input B4 19 C8
Ch 7/Ch8, L1- A4 - A7, A8
Ch 9/Ch 10, L2+ - - B9, B10
Ch 9 Input C5 7 C9
Ch 9/Ch 10, L2- A5 - A9, A10
Ch 11/Ch 12, L2+ - - B11, B12
Ch 11/Ch 12, L2- A6 - A11, A12
Ch 13/Ch 14, L2+ - - B13, B14
Ch 13/Ch 14, L2- A7 - A13, A14
Ch 15/ Ch16, L2+ - - B15, B16
Ch 15/Ch16, L2- A8 - A15, A16
+24V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2)
0V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2- (2)
A-66 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.13 DI820 Digital Input Module, 120V a.c./d.c.
A.13 DI820 Digital Input Module, 120V a.c./d.c.
Features
• 8 channels for 120V a.c./d.c. inputs
• Individually isolated points
• Voltage supervision of field input power F
R
W
• Signal filtering
2
Description
The DI820 is an 8 channel 120V a.c./d.c. digital input 3
module for the S800 I/O. This module has 8 digital inputs.
The a.c. input voltage range is 77 - 130 volt and the input 4
current is 10 mA at 120V a.c. The d.c. input range is
75 - 145V and the input current is 2.8 mA at 110V. The
5
inputs are individually isolated.
components, EMC protection components, input state
indication LED, optical isolation barrier and an analog
7
filter (6 ms).
RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING DI820
LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED 120V a.c.
indicates that the module is in Init state or Not configured
state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off
after the first valid access to the module.
Channel 1 can be used as voltage supervision input for
channels 2 - 4, and channel 8 can be used as voltage
supervision input for channels 5 - 7.
If the voltage connected to channel 1 or 8 disappears, the
error inputs are activated and the Warning LED turns on.
The error signal can be read from the ModuleBus. This
supervision can be enabled/disabled with a parameter. If
the error inputs are disabled channel 1 and 8 can be used as
normal input channels.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-67

through the filter.
Two different types of MTUs can be used, TU831 Extended MTU and TU811 Compact MTU both have two terminals
per channel.
Technical Data
DI820
Feature
Rated voltage 120V a.c.

(process power supply range) (77 to 130V a.c.)
110V d.c.
(75 to 145V d.c.)

+75 to 145V d.c.
Input voltage range, “0” 0 to 30V a.c.
+0 to 20Vd.c.
Nominal input channel current 10 mA ac @ 120V a.c.
2.8 mA dc @110V d.c.
Input frequency range 47…65 Hz
Impedance 12 kΩ (a.c.)
39 KΩ (d.c.)

100pF/m. Valid only for a.c.
Analog filter On/Off delay 5/18 ms
Process voltage supervision 2 channels, 1 and 8

(1)
Isolation Individually isolated

channels (RIV=250V)
Mounting termination units TU811 or TU831
MTU keying code AB

A-68 3BSE 008 878R301


Dielectric test voltage 2,000V a.c.
Block Diagram DI820
BIC INPUT CHANNELS X2
FAULT
RUN Rectifiers and
filters
WARNING I 1.1
CH 1
I 1.2
E2-4
1
X1 I 2.1
CH 2
MBI-1 I 2.2
+5VI
+5V ASIC
RESET
I 3.1
POWER-OK CH 3
Process Connector
I 3.2
ModuleBus Connector
0V
I 4.1
DAT+ CH 4
I 4.2
DAT- RS-485
I 5.1
CLK+ CH 5
I 5.2
CLK- RS-485
I 6.1
POS0-6 CH 6
I 6.2
BLOCK
I 7.1
CH 7
I 7.2
EEPROM
I 8.1
CH 8
I 8.2
E5-7
1
3BSE 008 878R301 A-69

Process Connections
Process TU811 TU831

Connection Terminal Terminal
Ch 1.1 Input B1 B1
Ch 1.2 Input A1 A1
Ch 2.1 Input C2 B2
Ch 2.2 Input A2 A2
Ch 3.1 Input B3 B3
Ch 3.2 Input A3 A3
Ch 4.1 Input C4 B4
Ch 4.2 Input A4 A4
Ch 5.1 Input B5 B5
Ch 5.2 Input A5 A5
Ch 6.1 Input C6 B6
Ch 6.2 Input A6 A6
Ch 7.1 Input B7 B7
Ch 7.2 Input A7 A7
Ch 8.1 Input C8 B8
Ch 8.2 Input A8 A8
A-70 3BSE 008 878R301

A.14 DI821 Digital Input Module, 230V a.c./d.c.
Features
• 8 channels for 230V a.c./d.c. inputs
• Individually isolated points
• Voltage supervision of field input power F
R
W
• Signal filtering
2
Description
The DI821 is an 8 channel 230V a.c./d.c. digital input 3
module for the S800 I/O. This module has 8 digital inputs.
The ac input voltage range is 164 - 264 volt and the input 4
current is 11 mA at 230V a.c. The d.c. input voltage range
is 175 - 275 volt and the input current is 1.6 mA at
5
220V d.c. The inputs are individually isolated.
indication LED, optical isolation barrier and an analog
7
filter (6 ms).
DI821
LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED 230V a.c.
indicates that the module is in Init state or Not configured
state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off
after the first valid access to the module.
Channel 1 can be used as voltage supervision input for
channels 2 - 4, and channel 8 can be used as voltage
supervision input for channels 5 - 7.
If the voltage connected to channel 1 or 8 disappears, the
error inputs are activated and the Warning LED turns on.
The error signal can be read from the ModuleBus. This
supervision can be enabled/disabled with the a parameter.
If the error inputs are disabled channel 1 and 8 can be used
as normal input channels.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-71

through the filter.
Two different types of MTUs can be used, TU831 Extended MTU and TU811 Compact MTU both have two terminals
per channel.
Technical Data
DI821
Feature
Rated voltage 230V a.c.

(process power supply range) (164 to 264V a.c.)
220V d.c.
(175 to 275V d.c.)
Input voltage range, “1” 164 to 264 V a.c.

+175 to 275V d.c.
Input voltage range, “0” 0 to 50V a.c.
+0 to 40V d.c.
Nominal input channel current 11 mA @ 230V a.c.
1.6mA @ 220V d.c.
Input frequency range 47…63 Hz
Impedance 21 kΩ (a.c.)
134 KΩ (d.c.)

100pF/m
Analog filter On/Off delay 5/28 ms
Process voltage supervision 2 channels, 1 and 8

(1)
Isolation Individually isolated

channels (RIV=250V)
Mounting termination units TU811 or TU831
MTU keying code AC

A-72 3BSE 008 878R301


Block Diagram DI821
BIC INPUT CHANNELS X2
FAULT
RUN Rectifiers and
filters
WARNING I 1.1
CH 1
I 1.2
E2-4
1
X1 I 2.1
CH 2
MBI-1 I 2.2
+5VI
+5V ASIC
RESET
I 3.1
POWER-OK CH 3
Process Connector
I 3.2
ModuleBus Connector
0V
I 4.1
DAT+ CH 4
I 4.2
DAT- RS-485
I 5.1
CLK+ CH 5
I 5.2
CLK- RS-485
I 6.1
POS0-6 CH 6
I 6.2
BLOCK
I 7.1
CH 7
I 7.2
EEPROM
I 8.1
CH 8
I 8.2
E5-7
1
3BSE 008 878R301 A-73

Process Connections
Process TU811 TU831

Connection Terminal Terminal
Ch 1.1 Input B1 B1
Ch 1.2 Input A1 A1
Ch 2.1 Input C2 B2
Ch 2.2 Input A2 A2
Ch 3.1 Input B3 B3
Ch 3.2 Input A3 A3
Ch 4.1 Input C4 B4
Ch 4.2 Input A4 A4
Ch 5.1 Input B5 B5
Ch 5.2 Input A5 A5
Ch 6.1 Input C6 B6
Ch 6.2 Input A6 A6
Ch 7.1 Input B7 B7
Ch 7.2 Input A7 A7
Ch 8.1 Input C8 B8
Ch 8.2 Input A8 A8
A-74 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.15 DI830 Digital Input Module, 24V d.c. with SOE
A.15 DI830 Digital Input Module, 24V d.c. with SOE
Features
• 2 isolated groups of 8 channels with voltage supervision
F
R
• Sequence of event (SOE) functionality W
• Shutter filter
2
3
Description 4
5
The DI830 is a 16 channel 24V d.c. digital input module for
the S800 I/O. The input voltage range is 18 - 30Vd.c. and 6
the input current is 6 mA at 24V d.c. 7
8
Each input channel consists of current limiting
9
indication LED and optical isolation barrier. 10
11
12
13
RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING 14
indicates that the module is in the Init state, Error state or 16
Not Configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT
LED is turned off after the first valid master frame to the DI830
module. 24V, SOE
if the voltage disappears, and the Warning LED turns on.
The error signal can be read via the Modulebus.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-75

The input signals can be digitally filtered. The filter is selectable from 0 to 100 ms. This means that pulses shorter than
the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than specified will get through the filter.
Four different types of MTUs can be used. The Extended MTU (for example TU830) enables three wire connection to
the transducers without additional terminals. The Compact MTU (for example TU810 or TU 814) has terminals for
process voltage supervision inputs, but requires external terminals for distribution of process power supply to the
transducers. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process.
Modes
• Event Recording
The DI830 Input Module can be used for event recording (SOE), that is, changing signals at digital input channels
can be announced together with a time stamp indicating when it occurred. The time stamp has a resolution of
0.4 millisecond, and is compensated for the filter time.
The module has intermediate storage for 32 events.
The SOE functionality can be switched on and off per channel.
For all channels with enabled SOE capability, a shutter filter is implemented that prevents intermediate storage for
events from overflow. The shutter filter is closed as soon as the number of events generated within the shutter
period (0-255 seconds) exceeds the shutter trigger number (0-255 changes). The shutter filter remains closed as
long as the recovery time (0-65535 seconds) has not expired.
• Simple Digital Input

If no event recording is used, the DI830 acts like a simple digital input device.
A-76 3BSE 008 878R301

Technical Data
DI830
Feature
Rated voltage 24 V d.c.

(Process power supply range) (18 to 30V d.c.)
Input impedance 4.2 kΩ
Maximum field cable length 600 m
Filter times (digital, selectable) 0 to 100 ms
Shutter filter
Shutter period 0.. 255 s
Shutter trigger 0.. 255 changes
Recovery time 0.. 65535 s
Event recording resolution 0.4 ms
Current consumption +5V 120 mA (max.)

100 mA (typ.)
Power dissipation(1) 2.3 W
Isolation Yes, opto


TU830
MTU keying code AA

nominal voltage of 24 Volt.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-77


Block Diagram DI830

MODULEBUS INTERFACE COMPUTER GROUP 1 X2
EMC- UP1
BARRIER U1
CH 1 I1
FAULT
RUN U2
CH 2 I2
WARNING RWM .
X1 MBI-2 . .
. .
ASIC . U8
+5VI DATA
CH 8 I8
Process Connector
+5V
RESET
ADDRESS 24V
POWER-OK CPU SUPER-
0V ERROR VISION
68HC12
Modulebus Connector
1-8
DAT+ ZP1
DAT- RS-485
GROUP 2
CLK+ EEPROM
EMC- UP2
CLK- RS-485
BARRIER U9-16
8 8
POS0-6 CH / I 9-16
FPROM /
BLOCK 9-16 24V
SUPER-
ERROR VISION
9-16 ZP2
3
/
PROGR
MODE
EM
X3 BDM
A-78 3BSE 008 878R301

Process Connections
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
Connection Terminal
+24V d.c. Group 1 L1+ 1, 14 L1+
0V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1-
Ch1 Input C1 3 C1
Ch 2 Input B1 16 C2
Ch 3 Input C2 4 C3
Ch 4 Input B2 17 C4
Ch 5 Input C3 5 C5
Ch 6 Input B3 18 C6
Ch 7 Input C4 6 C7
Ch 8 Input B4 19 C8
Ch 9 Input C5 7 C9
+24V d.c. Group 2 L2+ 11, 24 L2+
0V d.c. Group 2 L2- 12, 25 L2-
3BSE 008 878R301 A-79

A-80 3BSE 008 878R301

A.16 DI831 Digital Input Module, 48V d.c. with SOE
Features
• 2 isolated groups of 8 channels with voltage supervision
F
• Input status indicators R
• Sequence of event (SOE) functionality W
• Shutter filter
1
• EMC protection
2
Description 4
5
The DI831 is a 16 channel 48V digital input module for the
6
S800 I/O. The input voltage range is 36 - 60Vd.c. and the
7
input current is 4 mA at 48V d.c.).
8
Each input channel consists of current limiting 9
10
11
(Green) and Warning (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per 13
14
indicates that the module is in the Init state, Error state or 16
LED is turned off after the first valid master frame to the DI831
module. 48V, SOE
(continued on next page
3BSE 008 878R301 A-81

The input signals can be digitally filtered. The filter is selectable from 0 to 100 ms. This means that pulses shorter than
the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than specified will get through the filter.
Four different types of MTUs can be used. The Extended MTU (for example TU830) enables three wire connection to
the transducers without additional terminals. The Compact MTU (for example TU810 or TU 814) has terminals for
process voltage supervision inputs, but requires external terminals for distribution of process power supply to the
transducers. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process.
Modes
• Event Recording
0.4 millisecond, and is compensated for the filter time.

A-82 3BSE 008 878R301

Technical Data
DI831
Feature

(Process power supply range) (36 to 60V d.c).
Input voltage range, “1” +30 to +60 V.
Input impedance 11 kΩ
Bounce filter times (digital, selectable) 0 to 100 ms
Shutter filter
Event recording resolution 0.4 ms
Current consumption +5V 120 mA (max.)

100 mA (typ.)
Isolation yes, opto


TU830
MTU keying code BD

nominal voltage of 48 Volt.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-83


Block Diagram DI831

MODULEBUS INTERFACE COMPUTER GROUP 1 X2
EMC- UP1
BARRIER U1
CH 1 I1
FAULT
RUN U2
CH 2 I2
WARNING RWM .
X1 MBI-2 . .
. .
ASIC . U8
+5VI DATA
CH 8 I8
Process Connector
+5V
RESET
ADDRESS 24V
POWER-OK CPU SUPER-
0V ERROR VISION
68HC12
Modulebus Connector
1-8
DAT+ ZP1
DAT- RS-485
GROUP 2
CLK+ EEPROM
EMC- UP2
CLK- RS-485
BARRIER U9-16
8 8
POS0-6 CH / I 9-16
FPROM /
BLOCK 9-16 24V
SUPER-
ERROR VISION
9-16 ZP2
3
/
PROGR
MODE
EM
X3 BDM
A-84 3BSE 008 878R301

Process Connections
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
Connection Terminal
+48V d.c. Group 1 L1+ 1, 14 L1+
0V d.c. Group 1 L1- 2, 15 L1-
Ch1 Input C1 3 C1
Ch 2 Input B1 16 C2
Ch 3 Input C2 4 C3
Ch 4 Input B2 17 C4
Ch 5 Input C3 5 C5
Ch 6 Input B3 18 C6
Ch 7 Input C4 6 C7
Ch 8 Input B4 19 C8
Ch 9 Input C5 7 C9
+48V d.c. L2+ 11, 24 L2+
0V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2-
3BSE 008 878R301 A-85

A-86 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.17 DI885 Digital Input Module, 24V/48V d.c. with SOE
A.17 DI885 Digital Input Module, 24V/48V d.c. with SOE
Features
• 8 channels for 24/48V d.c. inputs
• Sequence of event (SOE) functionality
F
• External 24 or 48V d.c. sensor power supply R
• Internal 48V d.c. sensor power supply W
• Short circuit protection to ground and 48 Volt

1
• Channel supervision
• Sensor power supply supervision 2
• Shutter filter
3
• EMC protection
Description
5
The DI885 is a 8 channel 24/48V digital input module for
the S800 I/O. This module has 8 digital inputs. The input
6
voltage range is 11.8 - 60Vd.c. and the input current is
1.6 mA at 24V d.c., (3.2 mA at 48V d.c.).
7
Every input channel consists of current limiting
8
DI855
channel (8) indicate input state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The 24V/48V
LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED
indicates that the module is in the Init state, Error state or
Not Configured state. In Not configured state the FAULT
LED is turned off after the first valid master frame to the
module.
The sensor power supply supervision gives an error signal
3BSE 008 878R301 A-87

The input signals of the input module DI885 can be filtered to suppress any electrical interference or contact bounce.The
filter is selectable from 0 to 255 ms. This means that noise pulses shorter than the filter time will be filtered out and
pulses longer than specified will get through the filter.
Four different types of MTUs can be used. TheTU830 Extended MTU and the TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU has
terminals for process voltage inputs and three terminals per channel. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin
Modes
• Event Recording
1 millisecond, and is compensated for the filter time.

• Channel Supervision
The DI885 is able to supervise the process channel regarding wire break of sensor cable, missing sensor and short
circuit of sensor voltage to module ground.
The supervision can be switched on and off per device. The channel supervision is only possible when the contact
is equipped with a parallel resistor of 4.75 kΩ ±20%, and 48V sensor power.
• Sensor Power Supply and Supervision

The DI885 provides a 48V d.c. sensor power supply per device.
The DC/DC - converter for 48V d.c. supply can be powered from the internal 24V d.c. provided by the
ModuleBus or from an external source.
The power supply is short-circuit proof and galvanically insulated.
It is also possible to supply the sensors with an external 48V d.c. power supply. In this case the internal voltage
path is switched off.
A-88 3BSE 008 878R301

Supported Sensor Types

The following sensor types are supported by the DI885.
• Dry Contacts supervised: 48V d.c./ 3,2 mA

The supervision is only possible for contacts with resistor connected in parallel. Supervision is always available
within internal sensor power supply. Supervision in connection with external sensor power supply requires the
same strict limits in the tolerances of the external supply voltage as for internal supply voltage (48V d.c. ±10%)
Canaveral contacts can be connected to the input module with use of two input channels each providing on binary
signal. Non-equivalence supervision must be configured with use of PC elements of execution within the
application program.
• Dry Contacts not supervised with external Power Supply: >= 60V d.c./ max. 4 mA
The maximum input voltage of 60VDC must be kept strictly.
Change-over contacts can be connected to the input module with use of two input channels each providing one
binary signal. Non-equivalence supervision must be configured and execution within the application program.
• Electronic Inputs not supervised: 24V d.c./ 1.6 mA

Only in combination with external power supply.
• Open Collector Drivers (Current sourcing) not supervised: 24VDC / 1.6 mA

Only in combination with external power supply.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-89

Technical Data
7DEOH $ DI885 Digital Input Module Specifications
DI885
Feature
Number of channels 8, current sink
Power supply:
Nominal voltage 24 V d.c.
Operating voltage range 19.2 to 30V d.c.
Process Power supply: (UP)

Nominal voltage with internal supply 48 V d.c.+/- 10%
Voltage range with external supply 18V d.c. - 60V d.c.
Input voltage range, “1” >+ 11.2V d.c.... <+ 60 V d.c.
Input voltage range, “0” -30V d.c. ... <+5V d.c.
Nominal input channel current, “1” 0.8 mA ... <4 mA
Nominal input channel current, “0” <0.3 mA

Input impedance 15 kOhm
Bounce filter times (digital, selectable) 0 to 255 ms
Shutter filter
Event recording resolution 1 ms
Process voltage supervision per device
Current consumption
5V 160 mA
24V internal 91 mA
24V external 91 mA
48V external 22 mA
Power dissipation(1) 3W
Isolation yes, opto


TU830
MTU keying code BF

nominal voltage of 24/48 Volts.
A-90 3BSE 008 878R301


Block Diagram DI885
X2
EMC- L1+
BARRIER L1-
CH 1 I1
FAULT 1
L1+
RUN
CH 2 I2
WARNING MBI-2
ASIC . .
X1 (CPU)
+5VI .
+5V .
RESET
POWER-OK L1+ .
Modulebus Connector
0V .
Process Connector
.
DAT
.
DAT-N RS-485 .
CH 8 L1+
POS0-9 8
I8
BLOCK
24V 24V SUPER-
ERROR 1-8 VISION
EEPROM L1-
RAM
EM
24V
48V
48V d.c.
Power
Switch 24V d.c.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-91

Process Connections
7DEOH $ DI885 Process Connections
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
Connection Terminal
+24V d.c. ext. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
0V d.c. L1-, L2- 2, 15 L1- (2), L2- (2)
Ch1 +48V B1 16 C2
Ch1 Input C1 3 C1
Ch 2 +48V B2 17 C4
Ch 2 Input C2 4 C3
Ch 3 +48V B3 18 C6
Ch 3 Input C3 5 C5
Ch 4 +48V B4 19 C8
Ch 4 Input C4 6 C7
Ch 5 +48V B5 20 C10
Ch 5 Input C5 7 C9
Ch 6 +48V B6 21 C12
Ch 6 Input C6 8 C11
Ch 7 +48V B7 22 C14
Ch 7 Input C7 9 C13
Ch 8 +48V B8 23 C16
Ch8 Input C8 10 C15
+48V ext. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2)

A-92 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.18 DO810 Digital Output Module, 24V, 0.5A, Current Sourcing
A.18 DO810 Digital Output Module, 24V, 0.5A, Current Sourcing
Features
• 16 channels for 24V d.c. current sourcing outputs
• 2 isolated groups of 8 channels with process
• voltage supervision F
R
• Output status indicators
W
• OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon error detection O
• Short-circuit protection to ground and 30V 1
• Over-voltage and over-temperature protection 2
3
6
Description
7
The DO810 is a 16 channel 24V digital output module for 8
the S800 I/O. This module has 16 digital outputs. The 9
output voltage range is 10 - 30 volt and the maximum
10
continuous output current is 0.5A. The outputs are
protected against short circuits, over voltage and over 11
temperature. The outputs are divided into two individually 12
isolated groups with eight output channels and one voltage 13
supervision input in each group. 14
Each output channel consists of a short circuit and over 15
temperature protected high side driver, EMC protection 16
components, inductive load suppression, output state
indication LED and optical isolation barrier. DO810
24V, 0.5A
Four LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run
(Green), Warning (Yellow) and OSP (Yellow). One LED
(Yellow) per channel (16) indicate output state (On = 1 and
Off = 0). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the
WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The
FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state or
LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module.
The OSP LED indicates that the module is in the OSP state
and that the outputs are set to their OSP values.
The error signal can be read via the ModuleBus.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-93

timer is re-triggered every time the correct module address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog timer
expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state and the active outputs (if any) are
set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or to use the last good value sent.
are written.
The outputs are current limited and protected against over temperature. If the outputs are overloaded the output current
will be limited. This means that the power dissipation in the output stage will increase and the output will shutdown if
the temperature in the output stage increases above 150 °C (302 °F). The output will switch on again automatically as the
component temperature has decreased to about 140 °C (284 °F). If any output is shutdown due to overload the indication
LED on that channel is also switched off. The output status of that channel can not be read from the module.
Four different types of MTUs can be used, TU830 Extended MTU and TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU have
terminals for 24V process voltage supervision inputs and two terminals per channels. The TU812 Compact MTU has a
D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process.
Technical Data
Table A-42. DO810 Digital Output Module Specifications
DO810
Feature
Digital Output Module
Number of channels 16 (2 x 8)
Type of output Transistor current source,
short circuit proof
Voltage range 12 - 32V d.c.
Load current, maximum 0.5 A
Short circuit current, maximum 2.4 A
Leakage current, maximum <10 µa
Output impedance <0.4 ohm
Output Set as Predetermined (OSP) timer 256 (2), 512, 1024 ms
ground (RIV=50V)
TU830
MTU keying code AA
A-94 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.18 DO810 Digital Output Module, 24V, 0.5A, Current Sourcing

Block Diagram DO810

BIC GROUP 1 X2
24V SUPER-
VISION OUTPUT-
DRIVERS L1+
FAULT ERROR 1-8
RUN L1+
WARNING CH 1 O1
OSP L1+
MBI-1 CH 2 O2
X1
Process Connector
. .
+5VI ASIC .
. .
RESET
+5V . L1+
ModuleBus Connector
POWER-OK CH 8 O8
0V
L1-
DAT
DAT-N RS-485
GROUP 2
POS0-9 24V SUPER-

VISION OUTPUT-
BLOCK ERROR 9-10 DRIVERS L2+
L2+
8 8
EEPROM / CH 9-16 / O 9-16
L2-
3BSE 008 878R301 A-95

Process Connections
Table A-43. DO810 Process Connections
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
Connection Terminal
+24V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
0V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2)
Ch 1/Ch 2, L1+ - - B1, B2
Ch 1 Output C1 3 C1
Ch 2 Output B1 16 C2
Ch 1/Ch 2, L1- A1 - A1, A2
Ch 3/Ch 4, L1+ - - B3, B4
Ch 3 Output C2 4 C3
Ch 3/Ch 4, L1- A2 - A3, A4
Ch 5/Ch 6, L1+ - - B5, B6
Ch 5 Output C3 5 C5
Ch 5/Ch 6, L1- A3 - A5, A6
Ch 7/Ch 8, L1+ - - B7, B8
Ch 7 Output C4 6 C7
Ch 7/Ch 8, L1- A4 - A7, A8
Ch 9/Ch 10, L2+ - - B9, B10
Ch 9 Output C5 7 C9
Ch 9/Ch 10, L2- A5 - A9, A10
Ch 11/Ch 12, L2+ - - B11, B12
Ch 11 Output C6 8 C11
Ch 11/Ch 12, L2- A6 - A11, A12
Ch 13/Ch 14, L2+ - - B13, B14
Ch 13/Ch 14, L2- A7 - A13, A14
Ch 15/ Ch16, L2+ - - B15, B16
Ch 15/Ch16, L2- A8 - A15, A16
+24V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2)
0V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2- (2)
A-96 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.19 DO814 Digital Output Module, 24V, 0.5A, Current Sinking
A.19 DO814 Digital Output Module, 24V, 0.5A, Current Sinking
Features
• 16 channels for 24V d.c. current sinking outputs
• 2 isolated groups of 8 channels with process voltage
supervision F
• Output status indicators R
W
• OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon error detection
O
• Short-circuit protection to ground and 30V
1
• Over-voltage and over-temperature protection 2
4
5
Description 6
7
The DO814 is a 16 channel 24V digital output module with
current sinking for the S800 I/O. The output voltage range 8
is 10 - 30 volt and the maximum continuous current sinking 9
is 0.5A. The outputs are protected against short circuits, 10
over voltage and over temperature. The outputs are divided 11
into two individually isolated groups with eight output 12
channels and one voltage supervision input in each group. 13
Each output channel consists of a short circuit and over 14
temperature protected low side switch, EMC protection 15
components, inductive load suppression, output state 16
Four LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run DO814
(Green), Warning (Yellow) and OSP (Yellow). One LED 24V, 0.5A
WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The
Not Configured state. In Not configured state the FAULT
LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module.
The OSP LED indicates that the module is in the OSP state
The error signal can be read via the ModuleBus.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-97

are written.
The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK is inactive and POWOK signals is
active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK
comes from the FCI after power is applied.
The outputs are current limited and protected against over temperature. If the outputs are overloaded the output current
sinking will be limited. This means that the power dissipation in the output stage will increase and the output will
shutdown if the temperature in the output stage increases above 150 °C (302 °F). The output will switch on again
automatically as the component temperature has decreased to about 140 °C (284 °F).
A-98 3BSE 008 878R301

Technical Data
DO814
Feature
Number of channels 16 (2 x 8) current sinking
Type of output Transistor current sinking,

short circuit proof
Voltage range 12 - 32V d.c.
Load current, maximum 0.5A
Short circuit current, maximum 2.4A
Leakage current, maximum <10 µa

(1)

ground (RIV=50V)

TU830
MTU keying code BE


3BSE 008 878R301 A-99

Block Diagram DO814
BIC GROUP 1 X2
24V SUPER- OUTPUT

VISION Current Sinking-
ERROR 1-8 DRIVERS UP1 24V
FAULT
RUN U1
WARNING CH 1 O1
X1 OSP U2
Process Connector
+5VI MBI-1 CH 2 O2
+5V . .
RESET
ASIC .
. .
POWER-OK . U8
Modulebus Connector
0V CH 8 O8
DAT+
ZP1
DAT- RS-485
CLK+
GROUP 2
CLK- RS-485
24V SUPER- OUTPUT
POS0-6 VISION Current Sinking-
BLOCK ERROR 9-10 DRIVERS UP2 24V
U9-16
8 CH 9-16 8 O 9-16
EEPROM / /
ZP2
A-100 3BSE 008 878R301

Process Connections
Table A-45. DO814 Process Connection
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
Connection Terminal
+24V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
0V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2)
Ch 1/Ch 2, L1+ - - B1, B2
Ch 1 Output C1 3 C1
Ch 1/Ch 2, L1- A1 - A1, A2
Ch 3/Ch 4, L1+ - - B3, B4
Ch 3 Output C2 4 C3
Ch 3/Ch 4, L1- A2 - A3, A4
Ch 5/Ch 6, L1+ - - B5, B6
Ch 5 Output C3 5 C5
Ch 5/Ch 6, L1- A3 - A5, A6
Ch 7/Ch 8, L1+ - - B7, B8
Ch 7 Output C4 6 C7
Ch 7/Ch 8, L1- A4 - A7, A8
Ch 9/Ch 10, L2+ - - B9, B10
Ch 9 Output C5 7 C9
Ch 9/Ch 10, L2- A5 - A9, A10
Ch 11/Ch 12, L2+ - - B11, B12
Ch 11/Ch 12, L2- A6 - A11, A12
Ch 13/Ch 14, L2+ - - B13, B14
Ch 13/Ch 14, L2- A7 - A13, A14
Ch 15/ Ch16, L2+ - - B15, B16
Ch 15/Ch16, L2- A8 - A15, A16
+24V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2)
0V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2- (2)
3BSE 008 878R301 A-101

A-102 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.20 DO815 Digital Output Module, 24V, 2A, Current Sourcing
A.20 DO815 Digital Output Module, 24V, 2A, Current Sourcing
Features
• 8 channels for 24V d.c. current sourcing outputs
• 2 isolated groups of 4 channels with under voltage detection
• OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon communication F
error R
W
• Output status indicators and a channel wise error flag
O
• Short-circuit protection to ground and positive supply
1
• Over load protection 1F
• Open load detection 2
2F
• Two output fault operation modes:
3
Automatic reset mode and Fault latching mode
3F
• Inductive load driving capability 4
• Filament lamp load up to 10W 4F
5F
6
Description 6F
The DO815 is a 8 channel 24V digital output module for 7

the S800 I/O. The output voltage range is 10 - 30 volt and 7F
the maximum continuous output current is 2A @ 24V. The 8
outputs are protected against short circuits, and over load. 8F
The outputs are divided into two individually isolated
groups with four output channels in each group. DO815
24V, 2A
Each output channel consists of a short circuit and over
load protected high side driver with open load detection,
EMC protection components, inductive load suppression,
output status indication LEDs and optical isolation barrier.
Four LEDs indicate module status; Fault (Red), Run
Off = 0). The output fault diagnostic function, that is, short
circuit, over load, under voltage and open load detection,
activities a channel wise Error input and Fault LED
(1F - 8F) (Red). The error signal can be read via the
ModuleBus. The RUN LED indicates normal operation and
the WARNING LED indicates if any Error input is active.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-103

The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state or Not Configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT
LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The OSP LED indicates that the module is in the OSP state
The driver outputs provide a “free-wheel diode” to demagnetize inductive loads. No external demagnetization
arrangement is required up to loads of 1J.
DO815 outputs are able to drive filament lamp loads up to 10W, but only in Automatic reset mode.
leave OSP state. When reentering Operational State, the outputs are still kept with their OSP value until new valid values
are written.
DO815 provides two protection operation modes. Each channel can be configured to operate in one of the two modes.
1. Automatic reset mode (Default mode): The output is switched off for a time interval by the driver’s over current
protection. Operation is resumed when the output current is below a reset value.
2. Fault latching mode (This mode in not applicable in all controllers): The output is switched off by any of the fault
conditions. The fault latch remains in fault condition until reset by temporarily setting the automatic reset mode.
The output drivers are current limited and protected against over load. If an output has a short circuit to ground the output
current will be limited and the driver will shutdown in order to minimize the power dissipation. In the automatic reset
mode the output will switch on again automatically after a defined time interval. If the short circuit condition is still
present, the output is turned of again, otherwise the normal operation is resumed. In the fault latching mode the output
remains off until the fault condition is not valid and the reset of the fault latch is activated. If any output is shutdown due
to fault condition the indication LED (Yellow) on that channel remains on if the channel is activated.The output status of
the channel can be read from the module.
Three different types of MTUs can be used, TU830 Extended MTU and TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU have
terminals for 24V process voltage supervision inputs and two terminals per channels.
A-104 3BSE 008 878R301

Technical Data
DO815
Feature
Number of channels 8 (2 x 4)
Type of output High side driver,
short circuit proof
Process voltage (L+)
Normal 24V d.c.
Range 10 - 32V d.c.
On-state output voltage drop Max. 0.5V
Load current, maximum 2 A @ 24V, 2,5A @ 30V
Total permissible current of outputs per group Max. 6A
Short circuit current Max. 4A
Open load detection current < 6 mA
Leakage current, maximum Max. 500 µA
Filament lamp load Max. 10W
only in Automatic reset mode
Inductive load switch off energy Max. 1J
Output signal delay Max. 0.2 ms
Switching frequency resistive load Max. 200 Hz
Switching frequency inductive load Max. 2.5 Hz
Current consumption +5V 120 mA, 150 mA max.
Power dissipation (1) 4 W @ 24V
ground (RIV=50V)
Mounting termination units TU810, TU814 or TU830
MTU keying code AA

3BSE 008 878R301 A-105

Block Diagram DO815

BIC GROUP 1 X2
CH 1-4 F 1-4
OUTPUT-
ERR. DRIVERS L1+
FAULT 4 1-4
RUN / L1+
O1
Fault Mode Control

WARNING
CH 1
OSP L1+
MBI-1 CH 2 O2
X1
Process Connector
.
+5VI ASIC . .
CH 4 .
RESET
+5V
L1+
ModuleBus Connector
POWER-OK CTR O4
4 1-4
0V /
L1-
DAT
DAT-N RS-485
GROUP 2
POS0-9 CH 5-8 F 5-8

OUTPUT-
BLOCK ERR. DRIVERS L2+
4
/ 5-8
Fault Mode
L2+
Contol
CH
4 5-8 4 O 5-8
EEPROM / /
4 CTR
/ L2-
5-8
A-106 3BSE 008 878R301

Process Connections
TU810
Process TU830
(or TU814)
Connection Terminal
Terminal
+24V d.c. L1+ (2) L1+ (2)
0V d.c. L1- L1- (2)
Ch 1/ L1+ - B1, B2
Ch 1 Output C1, B1 C1, C2
Ch 1/L1- A1 A1, A2
Ch 2/L1+ - B3, B4
Ch 2 Output C2, B2 C3
Ch 2/, L1- A2 A3, A4
Ch 3/ L1+ - B5, B6
Ch 3Output C3, B3 C5
Ch 3/ L1- A3 A5, A6
Ch 4/ L1+ - B7, B8
Ch 4/ L1- A4 A7, A8
Ch 5/ L2+ - B9, B10
Ch 5/ L2- A5 A9, A10
Ch 6/ L2+ - B11, B12
Ch 6/ L2- A6 A11, A12
Ch 7/ L2+ - B13, B14
Ch 7/ L2- A7 A13, A14
Ch 8/ L2+ - B15, B16
Ch 8/ L2- A8 A15, A16
+24V d.c. L2+ (2) L2+ (2)
0V d.c. L2- L2- (2)
3BSE 008 878R301 A-107

A-108 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.21 DO820 Digital Output Module, Relay NO
A.21 DO820 Digital Output Module, Relay NO
Features
• 8 channels for 230V a.c./d.c. relay Normal Open (NO)
outputs
• 8 isolated channels
F
• Output status indicators R
• OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon error detection W
O
• EMC protection
1
Description 2
The DO820 is an 8 channel 230V a.c./d.c. relay (NO)

3
output module for the S800 I/O. The maximum output
voltage is 250V a.c./d.c. and the maximum continuous
output current is 3A. All outputs are individually isolated. 4
Each output channel consists of optical isolation barrier,

output state indication LED, relay driver, relay and EMC 5
protection components.
6
(Yellow) per channel (8) indicate output state (On = 1 and 7
WARNING LED indicates if any error is active. The 8
LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. DO820
The OSP LED indicates that the module is in the OSP state NO 24 - 250V
The relay supply voltage supervision, derived from the 24V
distributed on the ModuleBus, gives an error signal if the
voltage disappears, and the Warning LED turns on. The
error signal can be read via the ModuleBus. This
supervision can be enabled/disabled with a parameter
3BSE 008 878R301 A-109

command is received. The watchdog timer which is set by the controller and is used for ModuleBus supervision. The
watchdog timer is re-triggered every time the correct node address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog
are written.
Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU831 Extended MTU and TU811 Compact MTU enables two wire
connection to the devices without additional terminals. The extended MTU, TU836, provides an individual fuse (3A
max.) per channel on the load outlet terminals. The extended MTU, TU837 provides an individual fuse (3A max.) per
channel. Outputs can be individually isolated or grouped by bridging. Signal return terminals are provided in two groups
of four terminals.
A-110 3BSE 008 878R301

Technical Data
DO820
Feature
Type of output Relay (NO)
Voltage range 5 - 250V a.c./d.c.
Load current, maximum 3A
Load current, minimum 5 mA
Switch on current during 50 ms/s 2000VA (max 10A)
Max. make current 30A, 220ms, L/R >10 ms
Max break power 720 VA @ power factor

> 0.4, 40 W d.c.
Maximum field cable length (d.c., a.c.) 600 meters (656 yd.)
Pick-up time, maximum 9 ms
Release time, maximum 5 ms
Number of operations per hour, maximum 2000
Number of operations per lifetime:

Mechanical >20 x 106
Electrical >1 x 106
Power supervision 24/12V Relay power converter

monitor
Isolation Individually isolated from

ground (RIV=250V)

TU837
MTU keying code AD

3BSE 008 878R301 A-111


Block Diagram DO820
X1 BIC OUTPUT CHANNELS

+24V
12V
0V-24V 24V
X2
FAULT
RUN
ModuleBus Connector
WARNING
12V SUPER-
OSP VISION
ERROR 1-8
O 1.1
+5VI
+5V
Process Connector
RESET
MBI-1 CH 1 O 1.2
POWER-OK
ASIC
0V O 2.1
DAT CH 2 O 2.2
DAT-N RS-485
POS0-9 . .
. .
BLOCK .
.
O 8.1
EEPROM CH 8 O 8.2
A-112 3BSE 008 878R301

Process Connections
Process TU811 TU831 TU836 TU837

Connection Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal
Ch 1.1 Output B1 B1 11 (fused) B1
Ch 1.2 Output A1 A1 12 A1 (fused)
Ch 2.1 Output C2 B2 21 (fused) B2
Process Power - - L1, N1 N1, N1, 11, 12,

Source 1 13, 14

Source 2 27, 28
3BSE 008 878R301 A-113

A-114 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.22 DO821 Digital Output Module, Relay NC
A.22 DO821 Digital Output Module, Relay NC
Features
• 8 channels for 230V a.c./d.c. relay Normal Closed (NC)
outputs
• 8 isolated channels
F
• Output status indicators R Remove field power
before replacement
• OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon error detection W
O
• EMC protection
1
Description 2
The DO821 is an 8 channel 230V a.c./d.c. relay (NC)

3
output module for the S800 I/O. The maximum output
voltage is 250V a.c. and the maximum continuous output
current is 3A. All outputs are individually isolated. 4
Each output channel consists of optical isolation barrier,

output state indication LED, relay driver, relay and EMC 5
protection components.
6
(Yellow) per channel (8) indicate output state (On = 1 and 7
WARNING LED indicates if any error is active. The 8
LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. DO821
The OSP LED indicates that the module is in the OSP state NC 24 - 250V
The relay supply voltage supervision, derived from the 24V
Caution
distributed on the ModuleBus, gives an error signal if the
voltage disappears, and the Warning LED turns on. The Since the module has normally closed
error signal can be read via the ModuleBus. This relay contacts the field power must be
supervision can be enabled/disabled with a parameter. removed before replacement.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-115

command is received. The watchdog timer which is set by the controller and is used for ModuleBus supervision. The
watchdog timer is re-triggered every time the correct node address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog
are written.
Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU831 Extended MTU and TU811 Compact MTU enables two wire
connection to the devices without additional terminals. The extended MTU, TU836, provides an individual fuse (3A
max.) per channel on the load outlet terminals. The extended MTU, TU837 provides an individual fuse (3A max.) per
channel. Outputs can be individually isolated or grouped by bridging. Signal return terminals are provided in two groups
of four terminals.
A-116 3BSE 008 878R301

Technical Data
DO821
Feature
Type of output Relay (NC)
Voltage range 5 - 250V a.c./d.c.
Load current, maximum 3A
Load current, minimum 5 mA
Switch on current during 50 ms/s 2000VA (max 10A)
Max. make current 30A, 220ms, L/R >10 ms
Max break power 720 VA @ power factor

> 0.4, 40 W d.c.
Maximum field cable length (d.c., a.c.) 600 meters (656 yd.)
Pick-up time, maximum 9 ms
Release time, maximum 5 ms
Number of operations per hour, maximum 2000
Number of operations per lifetime:

Mechanical >20 x 106
Electrical >1 x 106
Power supervision 24/12V Relay power converter

monitor
Isolation Individually isolated from

ground (RIV=250V)

TU837
MTU keying code CA

3BSE 008 878R301 A-117


Block Diagram DO821
X1 BIC OUTPUT CHANNELS

+24V
12V
0V-24V 24V
X2
FAULT
RUN
WARNING
12V SUPER-
OSP VISION
ModuleBus Connector
ERROR 1-8
O 1.1
+5VI
Process Connector
RESET
+5V O 1.2
MBI-1 CH 1
POWER-OK ASIC
0V O 2.1
DAT CH 2 O 2.2
DAT-N RS-485
POS0-9 . .
. .
BLOCK . .
O 8.1
EEPROM CH 8 O 8.2
A-118 3BSE 008 878R301

Process Connections
Process TU811 TU831 TU836 TU837

Connection Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal

Source 1 13, 14

Source 2 27, 28
3BSE 008 878R301 A-119

A-120 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.23 DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module
A.23 DP820 Incremental Pulse Counter Module
Features
• Two channels
• Interface for RS422, 5V, 12V, 24V and 13 mA transducer F
signal levels R
• Simultaneous pulse count and frequency measurement W
O
• Pulse count (length/position) by accumulation in a
bidirectional 29 bit counter PX1
• Frequency (speed) measurement 0.25 Hz - 1.5 MHz UP1
ST1
• EMC protection
DI1
• DIN rail mounting SY1
Description DO1
TP1
The DP820 module consists of two identical independent
UL1
channels. Each channel can be used for independent pulse
count (length/position) and frequency (speed) PX2
measurement. UP2
ST2
Transducer Connection DI2
Each channel has four inputs (A, B, ST and DI) and one SY2
output (DO). The input signals A and B are used as pulse DO2
inputs. The input signals ST and DI is used for TP2
synchronizing, sampling and gated count purposes.
UL2
The balanced inputs A, B and ST can be connected to pulse
transducers with RS422, 5V, 12V, 24V and 13mA signal
levels if an extended MTU is used (TU830). Adaption to DP820
different signal levels is made by using different terminals
on the MTU (see chapter about process connection).
Only pulse transducers with RS422, 5V and 13mA signal
levels can be used if an compact MTU is used (TU810,
TU812 or TU814).
The unipolar input (DI) is intended for 24V unipolar
signal level.
The DO output is a short circuit proof digital output,
current sourcing type, 24V d.c., 0.5A.
All signals are individually isolated.
All inputs have overvoltage protection. A maximum
voltage of 30V can be connected without any damages.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-121

Shielded twisted pair cables with characteristic impedance=100 (+/- 25%) ohm shall be used for connection of
transducers with RS422/5V/13 mA signals.
Input Filter
Each DP820 input has a configurable input filter (see Technical Data). Notice the following restrictions for selection of
filters for inputs A or B:
• The 1us filter shall always be used when 12V and 24V inputs are used.
• Unfiltered inputs can be used if RS422/+5V/13 mA inputs are used, but cables between transducers and the DP820
module must then be separated from other cables to avoid that extra pulses occur due to EMI.
Pulse Encoding
The following different methods for pulse encoding are supported by DP820:
• Input A is used for counting up, input B is used for counting down.
• Input A is used for pulse counting, input B is used to determine count direction.
B=0: down, B=1: up.
• Input A and B is used for a quadrature encoded signals. Multiplication factors
*1, *2 and *4 can be specified. Count direction is determined by A and B phase shift:
Up count ABB: ... 00 10 11 01 00 10 ...
Down count ABB: ... 11 10 00 01 11 10 ...
A
B
PULSE 4 3 2
0 -1 0 1 2 3
COUNT
Figure A-1. Up/Down Pulse Mode
B
PULSE 4 3 2
0 -1 0 1 2 3
COUNT
Figure A-2. Count/Direction Mode
A-122 3BSE 008 878R301

B
PULSE 4 3 2 1 0
0 1 2 3
COUNT
UP DOWN
Figure A-3. Quadrature Mode, #1 (Count on Pos. Edge Input A)
B
PULSE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 5 4 1 -1
0 3 2 0
COUNT
UP DOWN
Figure A-4. Quadrature Mode, #2 (Count on Pos. Edge and Neg. Edge Input A)
B
PULSE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 13121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3
0
COUNT
UP DOWN
Figure A-5. Quadrature Mode, #4 (Count on Pos. Edge and Neg. Edge Input A and Input B)
Pulse Count (Length/Position) Measurement

Pulse count is done by pulse accumulation in a 29-bit (28bit + sign) bidirectional pulse counter. The pulse counter value
is normally continuously loaded into the pulse register (see block diagram).
A pulse count sample condition can be specified by the user (see respective PC Elements Reference Manual,
PSAMPCOD). When a sample condition is fulfilled is the value in the pulse register “freezed”. The value in the pulse
register will remain “freezed” until a freeze disable command is received from the controller (that is, when the sampled
value has been read by the PC element). The pulse accumulation in the pulse counter continues during the time when the
pulse register is frozen
The value of the pulse register (that is, actual pulse count value or “freezed” value) is read by the CPU, and transferred to
the controller.
The pulse counter is synchronized (that is, set to zero) if a user selectable synchronization condition is fulfilled (see
respective PC Elements Reference Manual, SYNCMODE).
3BSE 008 878R301 A-123

A comparator is used to compare the value of the pulse counter with the content of the compare register. The value of the
compare register is specified by the user (see respective PC Elements Reference Manual, COINCSP). A “coincidence”
occur when a equal condition is detected by the comparator.
The coincidence function can be used to control the digital output signal (DO), as pulse count sample condition, as
synchronization condition and as frequency sample condition (see below).
The pulse counter has overflow detection.
Gated Count Mode

In gated count mode the pulse counter only counts when the gate is active. The gate is controlled by the DI input. The
gate can be controlled in two different ways:
• The DI input is level sensitive, that is, the counter only counts when DI = high.
• The DI input is edge sensitive, that is, the counter starts count on a positive edge on the DI input, stops on the next
positive edge, continues on the next positive edge, and so forth.
Level sensitive
DI
Counter 0
Value 1 2 3 4 5
Edge sensitive
DI
Counter
Value 0 1 2 3 4 5
Figure A-6. Gated Count Mode in Two different Ways
Synchronization and sample conditions which uses the DI signal as part of the condition can not be used in gated count
mode.
Frequency (speed) Measurement.

The frequency measurement function consists of two counters, that is, the SX and SR counters (see block diagram). The
SX counter is used to count number of pulses (Sx) from the unknown input frequency. The SR counter is used to count
the number of pulses (Sr) from a reference frequency source with frequency FREF. The frequency value (Fx) is calculated
as:
Fx = FREF * Sx / Sr
The SX counter is implemented by a 24 bit up/down counter (23 bit + sign). The SR counter is implemented by a 24 bit
up-counter.
The SX and SR counters accumulates pulses during a measurement period. The measurement period can be determined
in two different ways (user selectable):
• By a measurement interval timer.
• By the coincidence comparator function.
A-124 3BSE 008 878R301

With the first method is a measurement interval for each channel defined by the user in increments of 1 ms from 1 to
2,000 ms (see respective PC Elements Reference Manual, MEASTIME1 and MEASTIME2). By changing the
measurement interval the user can select a suitable filter time (integration time) with respect to the application’s
requirements.
With the second method is the measure interval controlled by the coincidence function, that is, a measurement interval is
started when a coincidence is detected. Next coincidence terminates the measurement interval, and starts a new
measurement interval.
At the end of each measurement period are the SX and SR registers is updated with the value of the SX and SR counters.
The CPU reads the content in the SX and SR registers and calculates a frequency value.
It is possible to synchronize frequency measurements between the two channels, that is, the measurement period from
one of the channels is then used by both channels.
A frequency sample condition can be specified by the user (see respective PC Elements Reference Manual,
SSAMPCOD). When a sample condition is fulfilled is the value in the SX and SR registers “freezed”. The value in the
SX and SR registers will remain “freezed” until a freeze disable command is received from the controller (that is, when
the sampled frequency value has been read by the PC element). The pulse accumulation in the SX and SR counters
continues during the time when the SX and SR registers is frozen
The reference counter (SR) has a overflow detection function. The SR overflow will be activated if no incoming pulses
has been detected during 4.3 s. When the CPU detects SR overflow, is the frequency value set to zero.
Digital Output
The digital output function can be configured in four different ways:
1. The digital output DO is activated when coincidence occur, and inactivated after a configurable pulse-length
(1ms - 65535 ms) (see respective PC Elements Reference Manual, DOTIME1 and DOTIME2).
2. The digital output DO is activated when DOVALUE (See respective PC Elements Reference Manual, DOVALUE) =1,
and inactivated after a configurable pulse-length (1ms - 65535 ms). The function is retriggable.
3. The digital output DO is activated when DOVALUE=1, and deactivated DOVALUE=0.
4. The digital output DO is activated when coincidence occur and the DOVALUE =1, and inactivated when
DOVALUE=0.
DO DOTIME, 1ms - 65535 ms

1.
COINC
2. DO DOTIME, 1ms - 65535 ms
DOVALUE=1
3. DO
DOVALUE=1 DOVALUE=0
4. DO
COINC and DOVALUE=1 DOVALUE=0
Figure A-7. Configuration of Digital Output Function
3BSE 008 878R301 A-125

OSP Function
The digital outputs will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState
command is received. The watchdog timer is re-triggered every time the correct module address has been decoded (or
broadcast). If the watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state.
The function in OSP state, and when reentering the operational state, will be different depending on how the DO function
is configured (see Digital Output 1 - 4 above):
1. Function in OSP state: No more pulses will be activated as long as the module remains in OSP state. The DO pulse is
always completed if the OSP-state is entered during an active DO pulse (this is, the pulse width is always in accordance
with the DOTIME value).
Function when reentering operational state: The coincidence function has to be enabled before normal DO function will
start.
2. Function in OSP state: Same as in 1. above.
Function when reentering operational state: A new DO-pulse will be started as soon as a modulebus frame with
DOVALUE=1 is received.
3. Function in OSP state: The digital outputs are set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or
to use last good value sent.
Function when reentering operational state: The outputs keeps the OSP value until a modulebus frame with a new
DOVALUE value is received.
4. Same as 3.
LED Indicators
For description about the LED-indicators with comments see Table A-52
Table A-52. Description of LED-indicators
Name No Name No Color Comments

PX1 1 PX2 9 Yellow Activated on each pulse on A or
B input (>0.5s flash)
UP1 2 UP2 10 Yellow Activated when count direction = up
ST1 3 ST2 11 Yellow Activated on each pulse on ST input

(>0.5s flash)
DI1 4 DI2 12 Yellow Activated on each pulse on DI input

(>0.5s flash)
SY1 5 SY2 13 Yellow Activated on PSX counter sync.

(>0.5s flash)
DO1 6 DO2 14 Yellow Activated when DO is activated

(>0.5s flash)
TP1 7 TP2 15 Green Transducer power OK
A-126 3BSE 008 878R301

Technical Data
Table A-53. DP820 Digital Pulse Counter Module Specifications
DP820
Feature
Digital Pulse Counter
Power Supply voltage 24V d.c.

(12 to 32V d.c.)
Max non-destructive voltage on inputs 30V d.c.

A, B, ST or DI
Cable type Shielded, twisted pair

Characteristic impedance 100 (+/- 25%) ohm
Configurable input filters

Input A and B Unfiltered or 1 us
Input ST 1 us or 1 ms
Input DI 1 ms or 5 ms
Max input frequency / Min pulse width,

input A and B
RS422/+5V/13mA - range
Filter = unfiltered
Pulse encoding = u/d or c/d 1.5 MHz / 333 ns
Pulse encoding = quadrature 750 kHz / 667 ns
Filter = 1 us
Pulse encoding = u/d or c/d 200 kHz / 2.5 us
Pulse encoding = quadrature 100 kHz / 5 us
12V - range (only TU830)
Filter = unfiltered Not allowed
Filter = 1 us
Filter = unfiltered Not allowed
Filter = 1 us
Max. input frequency/Min. pulse width,

input ST
All voltage ranges 200 kHz / 2.5 us
Filter = 1 us 1 kHz / 500 us
Filter = 1 ms
Max. input frequency/Min. pulse width,

input DI 1 kHz / 500 us
Filter = 1 us 0.1 kHz / 5 us
Filter = 1 ms
3BSE 008 878R301 A-127

Table A-53. DP820 Digital Pulse Counter Module Specifications (Continued)
DP820
Feature
Digital Pulse Counter
Input impedance, A, B and ST -inputs
RS422/+5V/13mA - range 100 ohm
12V - range (only TU830) 1 kohm
24V - range (only TU830) 2 kohm
Input impedance, DI - input 2.5 kohm
Input signal voltage range

Input A, B, ST
RS422/+5V/13mA - range
“1” 2.5V to 30V
“0” -30V to 1.0V
“1” 8V to 30V
“0” -30V to 2.0V
“1” 15V to 30V
“0” -30V to 5.0V
Input DI
“1” 15V to 30V
“0” -30V to 5.0V
Digital output, max. load current 0.5 A
Digital output, max. short circuit current 2.4 A
Digital output, max. leakage current 10 uA
Digital output, max. output impedance 0.4 ohm
Max. frequency measurement error

Relative error [320/(MEASTIMEx in ms)] ppm
Absolute error [(320/(MEASTIMEx in ms)) +100] ppm
DP820 current consumption, +5V 120 mA
Isolation Individually isolated channels

(RIV = 50V)
MTU keying code CB

(1) 256 ms are used for Msaster. Set by the user for MOD.
A-128 3BSE 008 878R301

Block Diagram DP820
FAULT
RUN
WARNING X2
X1 CHANNEL1 (FPGA)
TP1 L1+
+5VI PULSE COUNT
COUNT CA+_1
RESET
+5V A1
PULSE
MODULEBUS CONNECTOR
PULSE DIR CA-_1

POWER-OK REGISTER COUNTER VA_11, VA_12
0V
COINC CB+_1
COMPARE COINC B1
MBI2 REGISTER COMP PULSE CB-_1
DAT+ DECO- VB_11, VB_12
DER
PROCESS CONNECTOR
DAT- RS485 (MODULE FREQUENCY CST+_1
BUS COUNT ST1 CST-_1
CLK+ COMM.) SX SX DIR
REGISTER COUNTER VST_11, VST_12
CLK- RS485 DI1 DI_1
POS0-6 SR Fref
SR
REGISTER COUNTER DO1 DO_1
BLOCK
CHANNEL2 (FPGA) CA+_2

A2
OSP PULSE COUNT CA-_2
COUNT VA_21, VA_22
PX1 PX2 PULSE PULSE DIR
REGISTER COUNTER CB+_2
UP1 UP2 CPU B2 CB-_2
COMPARE COINC COINC VB_21, VB_22
ST1 ST2
REGISTER COMP PULSE CST+_2
DECO- ST2
DI1 DI2 (CONTROL CST-_2
DER
OF MODULE FREQUENCY
SY1 SY2 BUS COMM.) COUNT VST_21, VST_22
SX SX DIR DI2 DI_2
DO1 DO2 REGISTER COUNTER
(FREQUENCY
DO2 DO_2
TP1 TP2 CALC.)
SR SR Fref
UL1 UL2 REGISTER COUNTER TP2 L2+
3BSE 008 878R301 A-129

Process Connections
Table A-54. DP820 Process Connections
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
(or TU814) D-Sub 25 Male
Connection Terminal
+24V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
0V d.c. (ZP) L1- 2, 15 L1- (2)
Ch1, CA+ C1 3 C1
Ch1, CA- B1 16 C2
Ch1, VA_1 - - B1
Ch1, VA_2 - - B2
Ch1, Zp A1 - A1, A2
Ch1, CB+ C2 4 C3
Ch1, CB- B2 17 C4
Ch1, VB_1 - - B3
Ch1, VB_2 - - B4
Ch1, Zp A2 - A3, A4
Ch1, CST+ C3 5 C5
Ch1, CST- B3 18 C6
Ch1, VST_1 - - B5
Ch1, VST_2 - - B6
Ch1, Zp A3 - A5, A6
Ch1, DI C4 6 C7
Ch1, DO B4 19 C8
Ch1, L1+ - - B7
Ch1, VST_2 - - B8
Ch1, Zp A4 - A7, A8
Ch2, CA+ C5 7 C9
Ch2, CA- B5 20 C10
Ch2, VA_1 - - B9
Ch2, VA_2 - - B10
Ch2, Zp A5 - A9, A10
A-130 3BSE 008 878R301

Table A-54. DP820 Process Connections (Continued)
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
(or TU814) D-Sub 25 Male
Connection Terminal
Ch2, CB+ C6 8 C11
Ch2, CB- B6 21 C12
Ch2, VB_1 - - B11
Ch2, VB_2 - - B12
Ch2, Zp A6 - A11, A12
Ch2, CST+ C7 9 C13
Ch2, CST- B7 22 C14
Ch2, VST_1 - - B13
Ch2, VST_2 - - B14
Ch2, Zp A7 - A13, A14
Ch2, DI C8 10 C15
Ch2, DO B8 23 C16
Ch2, L1+ - - B15
Ch2, VST_2 - - B16
Ch2, Zp A8 - A15, A16
+24V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2)
0V d.c. (ZP) L2- 12, 25 L2- (2)

3BSE 008 878R301 A-131

A-132 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.24 SD811/SD812 Power Supply Module, 24V d.c.
A.24 SD811/SD812 Power Supply Module, 24V d.c.
Features
• SD811 24V d.c. @ 2.5A
• SD812 24V d.c. @ 5.0A
SD811
• Input 110 - 240V a.c. (45 - 65 Hz), or 185 - 250V d.c.
L1
• Power OK status indicator and output signal X1 L2 (N)
PE
• DIN-rail mounted a.c. 110-240V
104VA
Description DCOK
DC Adj.
The SD811 Power Supply Module provides 24V d.c. at 2.5A
and the SD812 Power Supply Module provides 24V d.c. at +24V
2.5A
5.0A. X2 0V
The SD811(SD812) is a switch-mode power supply unit DCOK

converting main voltage to 24 Volts d.c. This power supply
can be utilized for non-redundant and redundant applications
and does not require additional load-sharing control
equipment or diode voting units.
Two or more power supply devices can be connected in
parallel. No special efforts are included to get the paralleled
devices sharing the load equally. Connecting units in parallel
can be used for increasing the power output or to get n+1 SD812
redundancy. L1
X1 L2 (N)
Normal function, DCOK, is indicated by a green Light
PE
Emitting Diode (LED). a.c. 110-240V
207VA
Status Signal, DCOK terminal;
DCOK
Power Good = active high; 24V source with a series
DC Adj.
resistance = 270 ohms, signal return = 0V
+24V
Signal voltage output (in parallel with DCOK LED) is X2 5A
0V
derived from the output terminal voltage, but the device
signal status is independent of external voltage injection from DCOK
power supply units connected in parallel.

The output voltage is adjustable within the range 22.5 Volts to
28.5 Volts, and is factory set at 24 Volts ±1%.
Primary voltage setting needs no selection or adjustment, the
full voltage range specified is covered by the design.
The modules can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a
mechanical latch that locks it to the DIN rail. The latch can be
released with a screwdriver.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-133

Technical Data
Table A-55. SD811/SD812 Power Supply Module Specifications
Item SD811 Value SD812 Value

Output 24V d.c. @ 2.5A 24V d.c. @ 5.0A
Mains input voltage 110 - 240V a.c. 110 - 240V a.c.

185 - 250V d.c. 185 - 250V d.c.
Mains frequency
a.c. 45 - 65 Hz 45 - 65 Hz
d.c. 0 Hz 0 Hz
Rated input power, a.c. 104 VA 207 VA
Power factor 0.67 typical 0.67 typical
Rated input power, d.c. 70 Watts 140 Watts
Rated output power (at 24V) 60 Watts 120 Watts
Efficiency (50 - 100% loading) 0.85 0.85

Power dissipation (full load) 11 W 22 W
Over-voltage protection 35V d.c. 35V d.c.
Rated Input Current

230V a.c. 0.45A 0.9A
110V a.c. 0.8A 1.6A
220V d.c. 0.32A 0.65A
Power on surge current 3.5A 7A
Primary power protection Fusable links Fusable links
Output power protection Electronic short-circuit protection Electronic short-circuit protection
Ambient temperature
Transport (max) -25oC to 70oC (-13°F to 158°F) -25oC to 70oC (-13°F to 158°F)
Storage (max) -25oC to 55oC (-13°F to 131°F) -25oC to 55oC (-13°F to 131°F)
Operating (nominal) 5oC to 55oC (41°F to 131°F) 5oC to 55oC (41°F to 131°F)
Relative humidity 10% - 75% 10% - 75%
Approvals Also meeting the requirements for a Also meeting the requirements for a
CE mark based upon the Low CE mark based upon the Low
Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC; Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC;
requirements referring to EN 50178 requirements referring to EN 50178
including EMC capabilities meeting including EMC capabilities meeting
the EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2. the EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2.
A-134 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.24 SD811/SD812 Power Supply Module, 24V d.c.

Class I according to IEC 536; (earth protected) Width SD811 50 mm (2”)
SD812 125 mm (5”)
Protection Rating Depth SD811 130 mm (5.1”)
IP20 according to IEC 529, (IEC 144) SD812 138 mm (5.4”)
Insulation Height SD811 102 mm (4”)

Rated insulation voltage 300V SD812 134 mm (5.25”) with mounting ears
Connections
Table A-56. SD811/SD812 Primary Power Connections
Terminal Description
X1 - L1 Mains power Line
X1 - L2 (N) Mains power Neutral
X1 - PE Mains power ground (Protected Earth)
Table A-57. SD811/SD812 Output Power Connections
Terminal Description
X2 - 1 24V d.c.
X2 - 2 24V d.c.
X2 - 3 0V
X2 - 4 0V
X2 - 5 DCOK Status Signal
3BSE 008 878R301 A-135

Block Diagram SD811/SD812
L1
x
L2 (N)
x
PE
BUV48A
x 0V
35V
x +24V
270 ohms
1W
SD811/SD812 DCOK
A-136 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.25 TB805 ModuleBus Cable Adapter-Out
A.25 TB805 ModuleBus Cable Adapter-Out
Features
• Passive unit used for connection and extension of the
ModuleBus ModuleBus
• DIN rail mounting Connector (X1)
Description
The TB805 ModuleBus Cable Adaptor-Out with the TB806
ModuleBus Cable Adaptor-In and ModuleBus Extension
Cables, TK801V0xx, are used to extend the ModuleBus.
Using the TB805 with the TB806, I/O modules on the same
electrical ModuleBus of an I/O cluster, can be mounted on 1
different DIN rails. This makes the installation of I/O 14
Modules more flexible when laying out an enclosure design. DB25 Female
Please refer to Section 2.1.4.1, I/O Station with S800 I/O for Connector (X2)
details on layouts.
The ModuleBus extension cables used with the TB805
comes in 3 standard lengths:
• VTK801V003 - 300 mm 25
13
• TK801V006 - 600 mm
• TK801V012 - 1.2 meters
Overall ModuleBus length must not exceed 2.5 meters
including all cables, MTUs and CI810 or TB820.
The TB805 mounts on the standard DIN rail. It has a
mechanical latch that locks it to the rail. It is grounded to the
DIN-rail through a metallic spring connector. The latch can
be released with a screwdriver.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-137

Technical Data
Table A-58. TB805 ModuleBus Cable Adaptor-Out Specifications
Item Value
Connections 2
DIN41612 Type R/4 (X1)
DB25 Female (X2)
ModuleBus:
Maximum 5V current distribution 1.5A
Module catch Locks module to previous device
Module DIN rail lock Locks module and provide ground

connection

Insulation Weight 55 g (0.12 lbs.)
Block Diagram TB805
X1 7 X2
POS 0 - 6
ModuleBus Connector DB25 Female
/
ModuleBus Connector R/4 Female
POWOK
DAT, DAT-N 2
/
+24V, 0V24 2
/
+5V 5
/
0V 4
/
CLK+, CLK- 2
/
Shield
EM
A-138 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.26 TB806 ModuleBus Cable Adapter-In
A.26 TB806 ModuleBus Cable Adapter-In
Features
• Passive unit used for connection and extension of the
ModuleBus ModuleBus
Connector (X1)
Description
The TB806 ModuleBus Cable Adaptor-In with the TB805
ModuleBus Cable Adaptor-Out and ModuleBus Extension
Cables, TK801V0xx, are used to extend the ModuleBus.
Using the TB806 with the TB805, I/O modules on the same
electrical ModuleBus of an I/O cluster, can be mounted on DB25 Male 13
different DIN rails. This makes the installation of I/O Connector (X2)
25
Modules more flexible when laying out an enclosure design.

Please refer to Section 2.1.4.1, I/O Station with S800 I/O for
details on layouts.
The ModuleBus extension cables used with the TB806
comes in 3 standard lengths:
• VTK801V003 - 300 mm 14
1
• TK801V006 - 600 mm
• TK801V012 - 1.2 meters
Overall ModuleBus length must not exceed 2.5 meters
including all cables, MTUs and CI810 or TB820.
The TB806 mounts on the standard DIN rail. It has a
mechanical latch that locks it to the rail. It is grounded to the
DIN-rail through a metallic spring connector. The latch can
be released with a screwdriver.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-139

Technical Data
Table A-59. TB806 ModuleBus Cable Adaptor-In Specifications
Item Value
Connections 2
DB25 Male (X2)
ModuleBus:
Module catch Accepts module lock of next device
Module DIN Rail Lock Locks module and provide ground

connection

Block Diagram TB806
X2 X1
7
POS 0 - 6
/
ModuleBus Connector DB25 Male
POWOK
ModuleBus Connector R/4 Male
DAT, DAT-N 2
/
+24V, 0V24 2
/
+5V 5
/
0V 4
/
CLK+, CLK- 2
/
Shield
EM
A-140 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.27 TB807 ModuleBus Terminator
A.27 TB807 ModuleBus Terminator
Features
ModuleBus
• Passive unit used for termination of the electrical Connector (X1)
ModuleBus
Description
Top View
The TB807 ModuleBus Terminator is used to
terminate the electrical ModuleBus.
Use the TB807 with the CI810 FCI or TB820
ModuleBus Modem to terminate the electrical TB807
ModuleBus of an I/O cluster. The ModuleBus
terminator connects to the outlet ModuleBus
connector of the last MTU. ModuleBus Terminator
Latch
E
F
D
A
C
B
MTU Assembly
E
F
D C A
B
L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C8 L2+
L1+ B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B8 L2+
L1- A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A8 L2-
3BSE 008 878R301 A-141

Technical Data
Table A-60. TB807 ModuleBus Terminator Specifications
Item Value
Connections 1
Module catch Attaches module MTU

module projects 17 mm (0.67”) from MTU
Block Diagram TB807
X1
DAT
DAT-N
CLK+
CLK-
A-142 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.28 TB810 ModuleBus Optical Port
A.28 TB810 ModuleBus Optical Port
Features
• 1 fiber optic port for the Optical ModuleBus expansion
• ModuleBus (electrical) connection to the CI810 FCI
Description
The TB810 ModuleBus Optical Port is a communication
interface between the CI810 FCI electrical ModuleBus and
the TB820 ModuleBus Modem of an I/O cluster via the
Optical ModuleBus.
The TB810 can be used in both a simplex optical
configuration as well as in a duplex optical configuration.
In a simplex configuration, the optical Modulebus nodes
are connected in a ring. In a duplex configuration, the
optical Modulebus nodes are connected in a row. Please
refer to Section 3.1.3.2, Optical ModuleBus Connections Tx Rx

The TB810 has two connectors for fiber optic connections
and a connection to the communication interface module. Rx
The module is equipped with Transmitter/Receiver for up

to 10 Mbit/s. Both plastic and HCS (Hard Clad Silica) optic
fiber with connectors (HP Versatile Link) can be used with Tx
the TB810.
Technical Data
Table A-61. TB810 ModuleBus Optical Port Specifications
Item Value
Optical ModuleBus Fiber optic interface, one
transmit and one receive
connection for max. 10 Mbit/s.
Indicators Tx LED: Yellow indicates that
the TB810 is transmitting data
on the optical ModuleBus
Rx LED: Yellow indicates that
the TB810 is receiving data on
the optical ModuleBus
3BSE 008 878R301 A-143


Protection Rating Depth 39.6 mm (1.6”)
IP20 according to IEC 529, (IEC 144) Height 39.6 mm (1.6”)
Connections
Table A-62. Optical ModuleBus Connections (X2)
Port Duplex Signals Simplex Signals

Tx Transmit data to down-stream Transmit data to next
device device
Rx Receive data from up-stream Receive data from

device previous device
Opto connectors type HP Versatile Link can handle both plastic and HCS optic fiber.
Opto Cable
Opto cable according to HP.
• Plastic Optical Fiber (POF) up to 15 meters.
– Extra low loss attenuation
– Simplex or duplex cable
– Latching simplex or duplex connector
• Hard Clad Silica (HCS) fiber up to 200 meters.
– Riser or plenum
– Simplex cable
– Standard simplex connector
Block Diagram TB810
X1
E
O
X2
E
O
RX
TX
A-144 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.29 TB811 ModuleBus Optical Port
A.29 TB811 ModuleBus Optical Port
Features
• 1 fiber optic port for the Optical ModuleBus expansion
• ModuleBus (electrical) connection to the CI810 FCI
Description
The TB811 ModuleBus Optical Port is a communication
interface between the CI810 FCI electrical ModuleBus and
the ABB variable drives ACS 600.
The TB811 has two connectors for fiber optic connections
and a connection to the communication interface module.
The module is equipped with Transmitter/Receiver for up
to 5 Mbit/s. The opto connectors type HP Versatile Link is
used with plastic optic fiber.
Tx Rx
Rx
Tx
Technical Data
Table A-63. TB811 ModuleBus Optical Port Specifications
Item Value
Optical ModuleBus Fiber optic interface, one transmit
and one receive connection for max.
5 Mbit/s.
Indicators Tx LED: Yellow indicates that the

TB811 is transmitting data on the
optical ModuleBus
Rx LED: Yellow indicates that the
TB811 is receiving data on the
optical ModuleBus
3BSE 008 878R301 A-145


Protection Rating Depth 39.6 mm (1.6”)
IP20 according to IEC 529, (IEC 144) Height 39.6 mm (1.6”)
Connections
Table A-64. Optical ModuleBus Connections (X2)
Port Simplex Signals

Tx Transmit data to next
device
Rx Receive data from

previous device
Opto connectors type HP Versatile Link can be used with plastic optic fiber.
Opto Cable
– Simplex cable
– Latching simplex connector
Block Diagram TB811
X1
E
O
X2
E
O
RX
TX
A-146 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.30 TB815 Interconnection Unit
A.30 TB815 Interconnection Unit
Features
• ModuleBus (electrical) connector to the I/O Modules for
redundant FCIs
• Fiber optic ports to optical ModuleBus
M
O
• Interconnection to the CI820 FCIs D
U
• 2 service ports for the CI820 FCIs L
E
B
• DIN rail mounting U
S
Description
The TB815 Interconnection Unit is a communication
interface between redundant CI820 FCIs and the S800 I/O
modules via the optical and electrical ModuleBus. SERVICE SERVICE
TB815 has two service ports to the CI820 FCIs.
TB815
Tx
Rx
3BSE 008 878R301 A-147

Technical Data
Connections
Table A-65. Service Port (X4, X5) D-sub 9 (female)

1 -
2 TD Transmit Data channel B
3 RD Receive Data channel B
4 - -
5 SG Signal Ground
6 - -
7 RDA Receive Data channel A

(for debugging only)
8 TDA Transmit Data channel A

(for debugging only)
9 - -
Block Diagram TB815

See Section A.8, CI820 Fieldbus Communications Interface (FCI) for a block diagram with the
CI820 FCIs.
A-148 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.31 TB820 ModuleBus Modem
A.31 TB820 ModuleBus Modem
Features
• 2 fiber optic ports to optical ModuleBus
• ModuleBus (electrical) to the I/O Modules
F R
• Supervisory functions of I/O ModuleBus P
ORx1 ORx2
• Isolated power supply to I/O modules ERx
Description
The TB820 ModuleBus Modem is a communication
interface for connection of S800 I/O modules via the
optical and electrical ModuleBus.
The TB820 can be used in both a simplex optical
configuration as well as in a duplex optical configuration.
In a simplex configuration, the optical Modulebus nodes
CLUSTER
are connected in a ring. In a duplex configuration, the
4 56
optical Modulebus nodes are connected in a row. Please 3 7
2
refer to Section 3.1.3.2, Optical ModuleBus Connections 1
TB820
TB820 has two basic parts: Module termination board and
the power supply/communications board (see block
diagram).
L+ L+ SA
The termination board is a unit where most of the L- L- SB
connections to the outside takes place. It is grounded to the X4 X5

DIN-rail through a metallic spring connector. The board Rx Rx
Tx Tx
carries screw terminals for power supply and redundant X1B
power supply monitoring, connector for the electrical
Modulebus, a current limit “fuse” for the +24V supply of X1A
the I/O modules and the electrical Modulebus.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-149

The power supply board has an isolated power converter that generates a short circuit proof +5V supply for the TB820
and connected I/O modules. This board also contains the Modulebus interfaces, LED indicators and one screwdriver
maneuvered rotary switch for the Modulebus I/O cluster address. The Modulebus I/O cluster address (1-7) is set by a
rotary decimal code switch, any other value than 1-7 is not allowed and will turn the Run LED off.
The Modulebus has an electrical and an optical interface which are logically the same bus. A maximum of twelve I/O
modules can be connected to the electrical Modulebus and up to seven clusters can be connected to the fiber optic
Modulebus expansion. The fiber-optical interface is intended for local distribution of I/O clusters and where more than
12 I/O modules per station are required. Any distribution of I/O modules across the base cluster and the remote cluster(s)
is allowed, however not more than 24 I/O modules per station can be used.
The module is equipped with optical Transmitter/Receiver for up to 10 Mbit/s. Both plastic and HCS (Hard Clad Silica)
optic fiber with connectors (HP Versatile Link ) can be used with TB820.
A-150 3BSE 008 878R301

Technical Data
Table A-66. TB820 ModuleBus Modem Specifications
Item Value
Power input 24V d.c. (19.2 - 30)

Power consumption at 24V d.c. 100 mA

Min. input voltage for high level: 15 V
Max. input voltage for low level: 8 V
Power output (ModuleBus) 24V max. = 1.5A

5V max. = 1.25A
Electrical ModuleBus Maximum of 12 I/O modules
Optical ModuleBus Maximum of 7 I/O clusters

Fiber optic interface, two transmitters
and two receivers for Max. 10 Mbit/s
Indicators R(un) LED: Green indicates that the

TB820 is operational
condition; Reset and communications
errors on the electrical ModuleBus
turns the LED on.
d.c./d.c. converter generates a valid
+5V d.c.
ORx1 and ORx2 traffic LEDs: Yellow
(blinking) indicates that the TB820 is
receiving data on the two optical
ModuleBus channels respectively.
ERx traffic LED: Yellow (blinking)
indicates the TB820 is receiving data
on the electrical ModuleBus. It also
indicates that the electrical Modulebus
channel is supervised.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-151


Connections

X1B - 3 SA Redundant Power Supply “A”

Monitoring Input
X1A - 3 SB Redundant Power Supply “B”

Monitoring Input
Table A-68. Optical ModuleBus Connections (X4, X5)
Port Duplex Signals Simplex Signals

X4 - Tx Transmit data to down-stream Transmit data to next
device device
X4 - Rx Receive data from down-stream Not used

device
X5 - Tx Transmit data to up-stream Not used

device
X5 - Rx Receive data from up-stream Receive data from

device previous device
Opto connectors type HP Versatile Link can handle both plastic and HCS optic fiber.
A-152 3BSE 008 878R301

Opto Cable
– Simplex or duplex cable
– Latching simplex or duplex connector
• Hard Clad Silica (HCS) fiber up to 200 meters.
– Riser or plenum
– Simplex cable
– Standard simplex connector
Block Diagram TB820
RS-485
RS-485 X3
POWOK
D+,D-
X2 CLK+,CLK-
TB820-1 POS(9:0) Electrical Modulebus
MB +5V Connector
MB+5V
F(ault) 0V
Reset logic,
R(un) MBI-4 +5V Supervision
0V
L-
MB+24V
P(owok) MB +5V MB +5V
+5V +5V +5V

ORx1
0V
ORx2
0V 0V
ERx DC
Current
DIN-rail
Limit
DC X1A
SB 3
2
L- 1
POS(9:7) X1B
SA 3
2
L+ 1
E E E E
O O O O TB820-2
X4 X5
3BSE 008 878R301 A-153

A-154 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.32 TU810 Compact MTU
A.32 TU810 Compact MTU
Features
• 50 Volt applications - use with AI810, AI820, AI830, AI835,
AO810, AO820, DI810, DI811, DI814, DI830, DI831,
DI885, DO810, DO814, DO815, and DP820 I/O modules
• Compact installation of I/O modules using one-wire
connections
• Up to 16 channels of field signals and process power
connections
• Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules
• Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the wrong I/O
module
• Latching device to DIN rail for grounding
Description
E
F
The TU810 is a 16 channel 50V compact module D
A
termination unit (MTU) for the S800 I/O. The MTU is a
C
B
passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the
I/O modules. It also contains a part of the ModuleBus.
E
F
D
The TU810 MTU can have up to 16 I/O channels and two A
C
process voltage connections. The maximum rated voltage
B
is 50V and maximum rated current is 2A per channel. Two
mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for
different types of I/O modules.
The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and
to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the
I/O module by shifting the outgoing position signals to the
next MTU.
Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for Row C L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C8 L2+
different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical

configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the Row B L1+ B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B8 L2+
MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which
gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The Row A L1- A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A8 L2-
configuration can be changed with a screwdriver.
The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a
mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The
latch can be released with a screwdriver.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-155

The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the
signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position.
The process signal terminals are divided into 2 equal and individually isolated groups. Each group consists of 8 I/O
connections, one process voltage connection and 5 common L- connections.
The top part of the MTU can be removed to replace the termination board even with an operational system. Such a need
can be caused by a damaged terminal screw.
Technical Data
Table A-69. TU810 Compact MTU Specifications
Item Value
Process Connections 30
up to 16 I/O channels
2 x 2 Process power terminals
5 x 2 Process power 0V
Rated maximum continuous current per 2A
I/O channel

process voltage connection (L+)
ModuleBus:
Acceptable Wire Sizes Solid: 0.2 - 4 mm2

Stranded: 0.2 - 2.5 mm2,
24 - 12 AWG
Rekommended torque
0.5 - 0.6 Nm
Mechanical Keys (2) 36 different combinations
I/O Module Lock Locks module and enables

operation

Class I according to IEC 536; (earth protected) Width 64 mm (2.5”) including connector
58.5 mm (2.3”) (edge to edge installed)
Protection Rating Depth 58 mm (2.28”) including terminals
A-156 3BSE 008 878R301

Connections
Table A-70. TU810 Process Connection Screw Terminals (X1)
Position Row A Row B Row C

1 L1- L1+ L1+
2 A1 (L1-) B1 C1
3 2 (L1-) 2 2
4 3 (L1-) 3 3
5 4 (L1-) 4 4
6 5 (L2-) 5 5
7 6 (L2-) 6 6
8 7 (L2-) 7 7
9 A8 (L2-) B8 C8
10 L2- L2+ L2+
3BSE 008 878R301 A-157

Block Diagram TU810
TU810
C B A
ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male I/O module
UP1 UP1
ZP1 ZP1
EM
I1 I1
1
I2 I2 1
ZP1 1
BLOCK
I3 I3 2
I4 I4 2
ZP1 2
ModuleBus Connector Metral Female
I5 I5 3
I6 I6 3
Module Process Connector

ZP1 3
I7 I7 4
I8 I8 4
ZP1 4
I9 I9 5
I 10 I 10 5
ZP2 5
I 11 I 11
6
I 12 I 12 6
ZP2 6
I 13 I 13 7
I 14 I 14 7
ZP2 7
I 15 I 15 8
I16 I 16
8
2
3
3
/
7
/
/
ZP2 8
DAT, DAT-N
+24V, 0V24
POS 0 - 6
UP2 UP2
POWOK
+5V
0V
ZP2 ZP2
ModuleBus Connector R/4 Female EM
A-158 3BSE 008 878R301

Features
• 250 Volt applications - use with DI820, DI821, DO820, and
DO821 I/O modules
• Compact installation of I/O modules
• Up to 8 isolated channels of field signals
module
Description
The TU811 is a 8 channel 250V compact module
termination unit (MTU) for the S800 I/O. The MTU is a
passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the
E
F
I/O modules. It also contains a part of the ModuleBus. D
A
C
The TU811 MTU can have up to 8 I/O channels. The
B
maximum rated voltage is 250V and maximum rated
E
current is 3A per channel. Two mechanical keys are used to
F
D
configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. A
C
B
I/O module by shifting the outgoing position signals to the
next MTU.
Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for
configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the
gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The Row C C 2 4 6 C8
Row B B1 3 5 7 B
latch can be released with a screwdriver. Row A A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A8
3BSE 008 878R301 A-159

The process signal terminals has 8 individually isolated I/O channels. Each channel has two connections.
The TU811 is primarily intended for modules with individually isolated channels.
The top part of the MTU can be removed to replace the termination board even with an operational system. Such
a need can be caused by a damaged terminal screw.
Technical Data
Item Value
Process connections 16
(2 terminals per channel)
I/O channel
ModuleBus:
Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.2 - 4 mm2

Stranded: 0.2 - 2.5 mm2, 24 - 12 AWG
Rekommended torque 0.5 - 0.6 Nm
Mechanical keys (2) 36 different combinations
I/O Module lock Locks module and enables operation

A-160 3BSE 008 878R301

Connections
Position (1) Row A Row B Row C

1 NC NC NC
2 A1 B1 NC
3 2 NC C2
4 3 3 NC
5 4 NC 4
6 5 5 NC
7 6 NC 6
8 7 7 NC
9 A8 NC C8
10 NC NC NC
(1) All positions marked NC are not mounted in the connector.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-161

Block Diagram TU811
TU811
I/O module
C B A
ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male
I 1.1 S1 1
I 1.2 S2 1
I 2.1 S3 2
EM
I 2.2 S4 2
I 3.1 S5 3
BLOCK
I 3.2 S6 3
ModuleBus Connector Metral Female I 4.1 S7 4
I 4.2 S8 4

I 5.1 S9 5
I 5.2 S10 5
I 6.1 S11 6
I 6.2 S12 6
I 7.1 S13 7
I 7.2 S14 7
2
3
3
/
7
/
/
I 8.1 S15 8
I 8.2 S16 8
DAT, DAT-N
+24V, 0V24
POS 0 - 6
POWOK
+5V
0V
EM
A-162 3BSE 008 878R301

Features
AO810, AO820, DI810, DI811, DI814, DI830, DI831 DI885,
DO810, DO814, and DP820 I/O modules
• Compact installation of I/O modules using D-sub connector.
module
Description
The TU812 is a 50V compact module termination unit
(MTU) for the S800 I/O system with 16 signal connections.
The MTU is a passive unit used for connection of the field
E
F
wiring. It also contains a part of the ModuleBus. D
A
The TU812 MTU can have up to 16 I/O signals. The
C
B
maximum rated voltage is 50V and maximum rated current
is 2A per channel. The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to
E
F
the I/O module and to the next MTU. It also generates the D
A
correct address to the I/O module by shifting the outgoing
C
B
position signals to the next MTU.
configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the
gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The
latch can be released with a screwdriver.
(continued next page)
3BSE 008 878R301 A-163

The process signal connector is a D-Sub 25 pin (male).
Technical Data
Item Value
Process connections 25 pin (male) D-Sub connector
up to 16 I/O signals
Rated maximum continuous current per I/O 2A

channel
ModuleBus:

A-164 3BSE 008 878R301

Connections
Table A-74. TU812 Process Connection D-Sub Connector (X1)
Position Row A
1 UP1
2 ZP1
3 S1
4 S3
5 S5
6 S7
7 S9
8 S11
9 S13
10 S15
11 UP2
12 ZP2
13 EM
14 UP1
15 ZP1
16 S2
17 S4
18 S6
19 S8
20 S10
21 S12
22 S14
23 S16
24 UP2
25 ZP2
3BSE 008 878R301 A-165

Block Diagram TU812
TU812
UP1 UP1 1
UP1 14
ZP1 ZP1 2
EM
ZP1 15
Ch1 S1 3
Ch2 S2 16
BLOCK Ch3 S3 4
Ch4 S4 17
ModuleBus Connector Metral Female Ch5 S5 5
Ch6 S6 18

Ch7 S7 6
Ch8 S8 19
Ch9 S9 7
Ch10 S10 20
Ch11 S11 8
Ch12 S12 21
Ch13 S13 9
Ch14 S14 22
Ch15 S15 10
Ch16 S16 23
2
3
3
/
7
/
/
/
UP2 UP2 11
UP2 24
DAT, DAT-N
12
+24V, 0V24
ZP2 ZP2
POS 0 - 6
POWOK
ZP2 25
+5V
0V
EM EM 13
A-166 3BSE 008 878R301

Features
AO810, AO820, DI810, DI811, DI814, DI830, DI831,
DI885, DO810, DO814, DO815, and DP820 I/O modules
• Compact installation of I/O modules using one-wire
connections
• Up to 16 channels of field signals and process power
connections with crimped snap-in connectors
module
Description
E
F
The TU814 is a 16 channel 50V compact module D
A
termination unit (MTU) for the S800 I/O. The TU814 has
C
B
three rows of crimp snap-in connectors for field signals and
process power connections. The MTU is a passive unit
E
F
used for connection of the field wiring to the I/O modules. D
A
It also contains a part of the ModuleBus.
C
B
The TU814 MTU can have up to 16 I/O channels and two
process voltage connections. The maximum rated voltage
is 50V and maximum rated current is 2A per channel. Two
mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for
different types of I/O modules.
I/O module by shifting the outgoing position signals to the Row C
next MTU.
Row B
configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the Row A
gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The
Snap-on connector positions
3BSE 008 878R301 A-167

The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch
can be released with a screwdriver.
connections, 2 process voltage connection and 5 common L- connections.
Crimp terminals are provided for connection to field wiring and insertion into the 3 snap-on connectors. Once the
contacts are correctly placed in the connectors, the cable can be easily inserted and removed without future wiring errors.
This assembly function can be performed before the cables are delivered to the site.
Technical Data
Item Value
2 x 2 process power terminals
2 x 5 process power 0V

channel

ModuleBus:
Maximum 5V current distribution: 1.5A
Acceptable wire sizes Stranded: 0.5 - 1.0 mm2, 16 - 22 AWG

attached to crimped snap-in connectors (3)
I/O module lock Locks module and enables operation

A-168 3BSE 008 878R301

Connections
Table A-76. TU814 Process Connection Crimp Connector (X1)
Position Row A Row B Row C

1 L1- L1+ L1+
2 A1 (L1-) B1 C1
3 2 (L1-) 2 2
4 3 (L1-) 3 3
5 4 (L1-) 4 4
6 5 (L2-) 5 5
7 6 (L2-) 6 6
8 7 (L2-) 7 7
9 A8 (L2-) B8 C8
10 L2- L2+ L2+
Contact crimping tool

E
F
D A for installation is not supplied.

C
B
Phoenix part - CRIMPFOX MT2.5

E
F
D A
C
B
Connection is made with

removable contacts crimped
to the wires
Cabling to
field devices
3BSE 008 878R301 A-169

Block Diagram TU814
TU814
C B A
UP1 UP1
ZP1 ZP1
EM
I1 I1
1
I2 I2 1
ZP1 1
BLOCK
I3 I3 2
I4 I4 2
ZP1 2
I5 I5 3
I6 I6 3

ZP1
I7
3
I7 4
I8 I8 4
ZP1 4
I9 I9 5
I 10 I 10 5
ZP2 5
I 11 I 11
I 12 I 12 6
ZP2 6
I 13 I 13 7
I 14 I 14 7
ZP2 7
I 15 I 15 8
I 16 I 16
8
2
3
3
/
7
/
/
ZP2 8
DAT, DAT-N
+24V, 0V24
POS 0 - 6
UP2 UP2
POWOK
+5V
0V
ZP2 ZP2
A-170 3BSE 008 878R301

Section A.36 TU830 Extended MTU
A.36 TU830 Extended MTU
Features
Row A
Row B
Row C
• 50 Volt applications - use with AI810,
AI820, AI830, AI835, AO810, AO820,
DI810, DI811, DI814, DI830, DI831,
DI885, DO810, DO814, DO815, and DP820
I/O modules
L1+ L1+
• Complete installation of I/O modules using
L1- L1- A1
3-wire connections, fuses and field power
distribution
C1
• Up to 16 channels of field signals and
2
2
process power connections
3
3
4
4
4
• Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the
5
5
5
wrong I/O module
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
9
Description
9
9
10
10
10
E
F
The TU830 is a 16 channel 50V extended
11
11
D
11
module termination unit (MTU) for the A

12
C
12
12
S800 I/O. The MTU is a passive unit used
B
13
for connection of the field wiring to the

13
13
E
14
I/O modules. It also contains a part of the
F
14
14
D
ModuleBus. A
15
15
15 C16 19
C
B
16 L2+ L2+
The TU830 MTU can have up to 16 I/O

16 L2- L2-
channels and two process voltage

connections. Each channel has two I/O
20
connections and one ZP connection. The

process voltage can be connected to two
individually isolated groups. Each group
has a 6.3A fuse. The maximum rated
voltage is 50V and maximum rated Fuse Holder
current is 2A per channel. It is
recommended that the fuse rating be
chosen to meet the applications needs.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-171

The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the
I/O module by shifting the outgoing position signals to the next MTU.
The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch
Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical
configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which
gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver.
channels, process voltage connection and a 6.3A fuse (as delivered). Each I/O channel has two I/O connections and one
ZP connection. For input modules, field power is provided by the C-row.
Technical Data
Table A-77. TU830 Extended MTU Specifications
Item Value
Process Connections 56
4 Process terminals 6.3A
10 x 2 Process power 0V

I/O channel

ModuleBus:
Fuse (2) 6.3A (fast glass tube, 5x20 mm)

Stranded: 0.2 - 2.5 mm2, 24 - 12 AWG
I/O module lock Locks module and enables operation
A-172 3BSE 008 878R301


Class I according to IEC 536; (earth protected) Width 126 mm (5”) including connector
Connections
Position (1) Row A Row B Row C

1 L1- L1+ NC
2 L1- L1+ NC
3 A1 B1 C1
4 2 2 2
5 3 3 3
6 4 4 4
7 5 5 5
8 6 6 6
9 7 7 7
10 8 8 8
11 9 9 9
12 10 10 10
13 11 11 11
14 12 12 12
15 13 13 13
16 14 14 14
17 15 15 15
18 A16 B16 C16
19 L2- L2+ NC
20 L2- L2+ NC
(1) All positions marked NC are not mounted in the connector.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-173

Block Diagram TU830
TU830 C B A
ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male I/O module 6.3A
UP1 UP1
UP1
ZP1 ZP1
ZP1
I1 I1 1
EM
U1 U1 1
ZP1 1
I2 I2 2
U2 U2 2
BLOCK
ZP1 2
I3 I3 3
U3 U3
3
ZP1 3
I4 I4 4
U4 U4 4

ZP1 4
I5 I5 5
U5 U5 5
ZP1 5
I6 I6 6
U6 U6 6
ZP1 6
I7 I7 7
U7 U7 7
ZP1 7
I8 I8 8
U8 U8 8
ZP1 8
I9 I9 9
U9 U9 9
ZP2 9
. .
.
2
3
3
. .
/
7
.
/
/
/
I16 I16 16
U16 U16 16
ZP2 16
DAT, DAT-N
+24V, 0V24
POS 0 - 6
POWOK
UP2
UP2 6.3A UP2
+5V
0V
ZP2
ZP2 ZP2
A-174 3BSE 008 878R301

Features
• 250 Volt applications - use with DI820
Row A
DI821, DO820, and DO821 I/O modules
Row B
• Greater connection area for larger wires
• Up to 8 isolated channels of field signals
wrong I/O module
B1 2
A1 2
Description
module termination unit (MTU) for the
3
3
4
4
I/O modules. It also contains a part of the 5

ModuleBus.
5

6
E
F
channels. The maximum rated voltage is
7
D
A
7
250V and maximum rated current is 3A
C
per channel. Two mechanical keys are
B8
B
A8
used to configure the MTU for different
E
F
types of I/O modules. D
A
The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to
C
B
the I/O module and to the next MTU. It
also generates the correct address to the
I/O module by shifting the outgoing
The MTU can be mounted on a standard
DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that
locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch
3BSE 008 878R301 A-175

The process signal terminals has 8 individually isolated I/O channels. Each channel has two connections.
Technical Data
Item Value
I/O channel
ModuleBus:
Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.2 - 6mm2
Stranded: 0.2 - 4 mm2, 24 - 10 AWG


A-176 3BSE 008 878R301

Connections
Position Row A Row B

1 A1 B1
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5
6 6 6
7 7 7
8 A8 B8
3BSE 008 878R301 A-177

Block Diagram TU831
TU831
B A
O 1.1 S1 1
O 1.2 S2 1
O 2.1 S3 2
EM
O 2.2 S4 2
O 3.1 S5 3
BLOCK
O 3.2 S6 3
ModuleBus Connector Metral Female O 4.1 S7 4

O 4.2 S8 4

O 5.1 S9 5
O 5.2 S10 5
O 6.1 S11 6
O 6.2 S12 6
O 7.1 S13 7
O 7.2 S14 7
2
3
3
/
7
O 8.1 S15 8
/
/
/
O 8.2 S16 8
DAT, DAT-N
+24V, 0V24
POS 0 - 6
POWOK
+5V
0V
EM
A-178 3BSE 008 878R301

Features
• 50 Volt applications - use with the AI810
Row A
module
Row B
• Up to 8 channels of field signals and process
power connections
• Each channel has one fused transducer
power terminal and one signal connection
• Process voltage can be connected to 2
individually isolated groups
• Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules X11
L1+ L1+
L1- L1-
wrong I/O module
11 12 21 22
31 32 41 42
Description
51 52 61 62

E
F
for connection of the field wiring to the D
I/O modules. It also contains a part of the A
71 72
C
ModuleBus. X12
B
81 82
E
F
L2+ L2+
channels. The maximum rated voltage is D

A
L2- L2-
50V and maximum rated current is 3A per
C
B
channel. Two mechanical keys are used to
configure the MTU for different types of X13
I/O modules.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-179

The process signal terminals has 8 individually isolated I/O channels. Each channel has two connections: one fused
transducer power terminal and one signal connection. Process voltage can be connected to two individually isolated
groups.
Technical Data
Item Value

channel
ModuleBus:
Fuse (8) 100 mA (fast glass tube, 5x20 mm)

Stranded: 0.2 - 2.5 mm2, 24 - 12 AWG

A-180 3BSE 008 878R301

Connections
Table A-82. Process Power Source Connections (X11, X13)

X11 - 1 L1- L1+
X11 - 2 L1- L1+
X13 - 1 L2- L2+
X13 - 2 L2- L2+
Position Row A
1 11 (F1, L1+ power)
2 12 (signal)
3 21 (F2, L1+ power)
4 22 (signal)
5 31 (F3, L1+ power)
6 32 (signal)
7 41 (F4, L1+ power)
8 42 (signal)
9 51 (F5, L2+ power)
10 52 (signal)
11 61 (F6, L2+ power)
12 62 (signal)
13 71 (F7, L2+ power)
14 72 (signal)
15 81 (F8, L2+ power)
16 82 (signal)
3BSE 008 878R301 A-181

Block Diagram TU835
TU835
ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male I/O module X11

B A
UP1 L1+ 1
L1+ 2
ZP1 L1- 1
L1- 2
EM
X12
A
F1 U1 11 1
S1 12 2
BLOCK
F2 U2 21 3
S2 22 4
F3
U3 31 5
S3 32 6

F4 U4 41 7
S4 42 8
F5 U5 51 9
S5 52 10
F6 U6 61 11
S6 62 12
F7 U7 71 13
S7 72 14
F8 U8 81 15
S8 82 16
X13
2
2
3
B A
/
7
/
/
/
UP2 L2+ 1
L2+ 2
DAT, DAT-N
1
+24V, 0V24
ZP2 L2-
POS 0 - 6
POWOK
L2- 2
+5V
0V

EM
A-182 3BSE 008 878R301

Features
• 250 Volt applications - use with the DO820,
Row A
and DO821 module
Row B
• Two groups with 4 channels of field signals
and process power connections
• Each channel has one fused load power
terminal and one signal return connection
• Process voltage can be connected to 2
individually isolated groups X11
L1 L1
N1 N1
wrong I/O module
11 12
21 22

31 32
Description
41 42

51 52 61 62

E
F
for connection of the field wiring to the D
I/O modules. It also contains a part of the A
71 72
C
ModuleBus. X12
B
81 82
E
F
channels. The maximum rated voltage is D
L2 L2
A
N2 N2
C
B
X13
types of I/O modules.
3BSE 008 878R301 A-183

The process signal terminals are divided into 2 equal and individually isolated groups. Each groups consists of 4 I/O
connections and process voltage connection. Each channel has two connections: one fused load outlet terminal and one
signal return connection.
Technical Data
Item Value
process voltage connection (L1, L2, N1, N2)
channel
ModuleBus:
Stranded: 0.2 - 2.5 mm2, 24 - 12 AWG


Dielectric test voltage 2,000V ac
A-184 3BSE 008 878R301

Connections
Table A-85. Process Power Source Connections (X11, X13)

X11 - 1 N1 L1
X11 - 2 N1 L1
X13 - 1 N2 L2
X13 - 2 N2 L2
Position Row A
1 11 (F1, L1 power)
2 12 (signal return)
3 21 (F2, L1 power)
5 31 (F3, L1 power)
7 41 (F4, L1 power)
9 51 (F5, L2 power)
11 61 (F6, L2 power)
13 71 (F7, L2 power)
15 81 (F8, L2 power)
3BSE 008 878R301 A-185

Block Diagram TU836
TU836 X11
ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male I/O module B A
UP1 L1 1
L1 2
ZP1 N1 1
N1 2
EM
X12
A
S1 F1 S11 11 1
12 2
BLOCK
F2
S2 S21 21 3
22 4
S3 F3 S31 31 5
32 6

F4
S4 S41 41 7
42 8
F5
S5 S51 51 9
52 10
S6 F6 S61 61 11
62 12
S7 F7 S71 71 13
72 14
F8
S8 S81 81 15
82 16
2
3
3
/
7
/
/
X13
B A
DAT, DAT-N
+24V, 0V24
UP2 1
POS 0 - 6
L2
POWOK
L2 2
+5V
0V
ZP2 N2 1
N2 2
A-186 3BSE 008 878R301

Features
• 250 Volt applications - use with the DO820,
Row A
Row B
and DO821 module Fuse
Holders
• Up to 8 individually isolated channels of
field signals and process power connections
• Each channel two terminals and one fuse
X11
• Allows a mix of isolated and grouped
N1 11 12
channels
N1 13 14
• Process voltage return can be connected to 2
individually isolated groups
B1
A1
2
wrong I/O module 2
3
3
Description
4
E
5
F
S800 I/O. The MTU is a passive unit used D
A
6
C
X12
B
6
I/O modules. It also contains a part of the

7
ModuleBus.
E
F
7
D
The TU837 MTU can have up to 8 I/O A
B8
C
channels. The maximum rated voltage is
B
A8

25 26 N2
27 28 N2

types of I/O modules. X13
3BSE 008 878R301 A-187

The process signal terminals has 8 individually isolated I/O channels. Each channel has two connections: one fused load
outlet terminal and one process voltage connection. There are 2 individually isolated groups for signal return
connections.
Technical Data
Item Value
2 x 6 power common terminals
signal return connection (N1, N2)

I/O channel
ModuleBus:
Acceptable wire sizes

Signal connection Solid: 0.2 - 6 mm
Stranded: 0.2 - 4 mm2, 24 - 10 AWG
Return connection Solid: 0.2 - 4 mm
Stranded: 0.2 - 2.5 mm2, 24 - 12 AWG

A-188 3BSE 008 878R301

Connections
Table A-88. Process Power Connection X11
Row A Row B
Terminal Signal Marking Signal Marking

1 ZP1 N1 ZP1 N1
2 ZP1 13 ZP1 11
3 ZP1 14 ZP1 12
Table A-89. Process Power Connection X13
Row A Row B
1 ZP2 27 ZP2 25
2 ZP2 28 ZP2 26
3 ZP2 N2 ZP2 N2
Table A-90. Process Connection Terminals X12
Row A Row B
1 S21 (F1) A1 S1 B1
2 S41 (F2) 2 S3 2
3 S61 (F3) 3 S5 3
4 S81 (F4) 4 S7 4
5 S101 (F5) 5 S9 5
6 S121 (F6) 6 S11 6
7 S141 (F7) 7 S13 7
8 S161 (F8) A8 S15 B8
3BSE 008 878R301 A-189

Block Diagram TU837
X11
B A
TU837
ZP1 N1 1
I/O module N1 1
ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male
X12
B A
S1 B1 1
S2 F1 S21 A1 1
11 2
EM
S3 2 2
S4 F2 S41 2 2
12 3
BLOCK
S5 3 3
F3
S6 S61 3 3
13 2
S7 4 4
S8 F4 S81 4 4
14 3
S9 5 5
S10 F5 S101 5 5
25 1
S11 6 6
S12
F6 S121 6 6
26 2
S13 7 7
S14 F7 S141 7 7
2
3
7
/
/
/
27 1
S15 B8 8
DAT, DAT-N
+24V, 0V24
POS 0 - 6
S16 F8 S161 A8 8
POWOK
28 2
+5V
0V
EM ZP2 N2 3
N2 3
B A
X13
A-190 3BSE 008 878R301

Index
INDEX
A D
A.C. supply 2-18 D.C. supply 2-18
Address jumpering 2-84 Data scanning principles 3-33, 4-3, 4-5
Advant Fieldbus 100 1-12, 2-83, 4-1 DI810 1-9, 1-33, 2-36 to 2-37, 5-16, A-55
AI810 1-8, 1-32, 2-20, 5-16, A-1 DI811 1-9, 1-33, 2-39, 5-16, A-59
AI820 1-8, 1-32, 2-24, 5-16, A-7 DI814 1-9, 1-33, 2-41, 2-43, 5-16, A-63
AI830 1-8, 1-32, 2-26, 5-16, A-13 DI820 1-9, 1-33, 2-44 to 2-45, 5-16, A-67
AI835 1-8, 1-32, 2-28, 5-16, A-19 DI821 1-9, 1-34, 2-46, 5-16, A-71
Analog input module DI830 1-9, 2-48 to 2-50, 5-16, A-75
AI810 A-1 Digital input module, SOE A-76
AI820 A-7 DI831 1-9, 2-51 to 2-53, 5-16, A-81
AI830 A-13 Digital input module, SOE A-82
AI835 A-19 DI885 1-9, 1-34, 2-54 to 2-55, 5-16, A-87
Analog output module Digital input module, SOE A-88
AO810 A-25 Digital input module
AO820 A-31 DI810 A-55
AO810 1-9, 1-33, 2-31, 2-33, 5-16, A-25 DI811 A-59
AO820 1-9, 1-33, 2-34 to 2-35, 5-16, A-31 DI814 A-63
DI820 A-67
C DI821 A-71
Cable adaptor 1-9 DI830 A-75
Cable considerations 2-16 DI831 A-81
Channel Status 4-9 DI885 A-87
Check of non-redundant power supply 5-14 Digital output module
Check of redundant power supply 5-14 DO810 A-93
CI810/CI810A 1-9, 1-12, 5-3, 5-21, A-37 DO814 A-97
CI820 1-9, 1-14, 5-5, 5-21, A-43 DO815 A-103
CI830 1-9, 1-16, 2-83, 5-7, 5-21, 5-28, A-49 DO820 A-109
Compact MTU 1-24 to 1-26, A-155, A-159, A-163, A-167 DO821 A-115
Connection principles 2-19 DIN-rail 2-3
Connections Dissipation permitted in cabinets 3-27
AF 100 Fieldbus 3-9 Distributed MTUs 2-83
Power supply 3-15 DO810 1-9, 1-34, 2-56 to 2-58, 5-16, A-93
Process 2-19 DO814 1-9, 1-35, 2-59 to 2-61, 5-16, A-97
Profibus-DP 3-14 DO815 1-9, 1-35, 2-62 to 2-63, 5-16, A-103
Cooling load 3-35 DO820 1-9, 1-35, 2-64 to 2-67, 5-17, A-109
Current consumption 2-18 DO821 1-9, 1-35, 2-68 to 2-70, 5-17, A-115
DP820 1-9, 1-35, 2-72 to 2-75, 5-17, A-121
E
Enclosure layouts 1-39
Environmental considerations 2-2
Error state 4-8, 4-12
Extended MTU 1-24, 1-26 to 1-28, A-171, A-175, A-179,
A-183, A-187
Extension cables 1-11
3BSE 008 878R301 i

Index
F L
FCI 1-7, 1-12, 1-14, 1-16, 4-1, 4-3, 5-21, A-37, A-43, A-49 LED
CI810 3-6 Location 5-3
CI810A 3-6 LEDs 5-2
CI820 3-6 FCI 5-3, 5-5, 5-7
CI830 3-6 I/O module 5-10
FCI and I/O module replacement 5-15 Lightning strike protection 2-76
FCI functionality
Advant Fieldbus 100 4-1 M
Profibus-DP 4-3 Maintenance 5-1
FCI module 1-13, 1-15, 1-17 Maximum ambient temperature 3-35
Fieldbus communications interface A-37, A-43, A-49 Module status 4-9
Fieldbus connection 2-83 Module termination units 1-24
Fusing 2-19 ModuleBus 2-6
ModuleBus extension 1-10
G ModuleBus extension cable 2-8
General specifications A-1 ModuleBus modem 5-22, A-149
Ground contact 2-4 ModuleBus optical port 2-9
Grounding 2-15, 2-79 TB810 2-9
Process signals 2-80 ModuleBus terminator 2-13
Protective ground 2-15 Mounting 1-29
Signals and voltage supply 2-16 MTU
TU810 A-155
H TU811 A-159
Hardware configuration 3-1 TU812 A-163
Hazardous applications 2-76 TU814 A-167
Heat dissipation 3-27 TU830 A-171
High voltage switch-gear applications 2-76 TU831 A-175
TU835 A-179
I TU836 A-183
I/O clusters (1-7) 2-83 TU837 A-187
I/O module functionality MTUs 5-17
Advant Fieldbus 100 4-5
Profibus-DP 4-9 N
I/O module installation 2-12 Not configured state 4-7, 4-11
I/O modules 1-32
I/O Station O
Assembly 2-82 Operational state 4-7, 4-11
I/O station 1-8, 1-11, 2-3 Optical ModuleBus expansion 2-9
Incremental pulse counter A-121 OSP 1-35, 4-8, 4-13
Industrial environments 2-16 OSP state 4-7, 4-11
Init state 4-6, 4-10
Installation
Checklists 2-84
Profibus-DP 2-1
Interconnection unit
TB815 A-147
ii 3BSE 008 878R301

Index
P R
Parameters RE810 1-10, 1-39
Loading 4-8, 4-12 Enclosures layouts 1-39
Loading invalid 4-8, 4-12 Ready state 4-7, 4-11
Non-volatile 4-8, 4-12 Redundant FCI installation 2-6
Personnel safety 2-79 Repair 5-12
Power RTD input module
A.C. supply 2-18 AI830 A-13
D.C. supply 2-18
Requirements 2-18 S
Power and cooling 3-35 S800 I/O
Power consumption 3-35 Assembly 2-82
Power supply 1-36, 3-22 Installation 2-1
Load calculation 3-26 Safety regulations 2-79, 5-1
Power supply module A-133 SD811 1-10, 1-36, 3-22, A-133
Power watts 3-35 SD812 1-10, 1-36, 3-22, A-133
Procedure Sequence of event A-75, A-81, A-87
Power up 2-92 Shut down
Process connections 2-19 Emergency 2-90
AI810 2-20, A-5 Manual stop 2-91
AI820 2-24, A-11 Safety 2-90
AI830 2-26, A-17 Site planning environment 2-1
AI835 2-28, A-23 SOE A-75, A-81, A-87
AO810 2-31, A-29 Specifications A-1
AO820 2-34, A-35 Start-up 2-84
DI810 2-36, A-58 State
DI811 2-39, A-62 Error 4-8, 4-12
DI814 2-41, A-66 Init 4-6, 4-10
DI820 2-44, A-70 Not configured 4-7, 4-11
DI821 2-46, A-74 Operational 4-7, 4-11
DI830 2-48, A-79 OSP (Outputs Set as Predefined) 4-7, 4-11
DI831 2-51, A-85 Ready 4-7, 4-11
DI885 2-54, A-92 Station address selector
DO810 2-56, A-96 Advant Fieldbus 100 3-6 to 3-7
DO814 2-59, A-101 Profibus-DP 3-8
DO815 2-62, A-107 Status
DO820 2-64, A-113 Channel (Data quality) 4-9, 4-13
DO821 2-68, A-119 Module 4-9, 4-13
DP820 2-72, A-130
Process signals 2-83
Profibus-DP 1-3, 1-8 to 1-9, 1-16, 2-83, 3-32, 4-3, A-49
I/O module functionality 4-9
Module identity 4-9
Module states 4-10
Module status 4-13
Protective ground 2-18
Pulse counter
DP820 A-121
3BSE 008 878R301 iii

Index
T
TB805 1-9, A-137
TB806 1-9, A-139
TB807 1-9, 2-13, A-141
TB810 1-9, 2-9, A-143
TB810/811 5-22
TB811 1-10, A-145
TB815 1-10, 5-22, A-44, A-147
TB820 1-10, 5-22, A-149
TC501V150 1-10
TC505 1-10
Temperature 2-2, 3-35
Cabinetry factors 2-2
I/O module factors 2-2
Terminator 1-10
Thermocouple/mV input module
AI835 A-19
TK801V003 1-10
TK801V006 1-10
TK801V012 1-10
TK811V015 1-10
TK811V050 1-10
TK811V150 1-10
TU810 1-10, 1-24 to 1-25, 2-21, 2-25, 2-27, 2-29, 2-32,
2-35, 2-37, 2-40, 2-42, 2-49, 2-52, 2-55, 2-57, 2-60, 2-63,
2-72, 5-17, A-155
TU811 1-10, 1-24, 1-26, 2-45, 2-47, 2-65, 2-69, 5-17, A-159
TU812 1-24, 1-26, 2-23, 2-33, 2-38, 2-43, 2-50, 2-53, 2-58,
2-61, 2-73, 5-17, A-163
TU814 1-10, 1-24, 1-26, 2-21, 2-25, 2-27, 2-29, 2-32, 2-35,
2-37, 2-40, 2-42, 2-49, 2-52, 2-55, 2-57, 2-60, 2-63, 2-72,
5-17, A-167
TU830 1-10, 1-24, 1-26, 2-20, 2-24, 2-26, 2-28, 2-31, 2-34,
2-36, 2-39, 2-41, 2-48, 2-51, 2-54, 2-56, 2-59, 2-62, 2-74
to 2-75, 5-17, A-171
TU831 1-10, 1-24, 1-27, 2-44, 2-46, 2-64, 2-68, 5-17, A-175
TU835 1-10, 1-24, 1-27, 2-22, 5-17, A-179
TU836 1-10, 1-24, 1-28, 2-66, 2-70, 5-17, A-183
TU837 1-10, 1-24, 1-28, 2-67, 2-71, A-187
U
User repair 5-12
V
Ventilation 3-27
Vibration 2-2
Voltage distribution 2-19
iv 3BSE 008 878R301

3BSE 008 878R301
March 1999

User Guide S800 I-O

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

User Guide S800 I-O

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Advant® OCS S800 I/O

with Master Software

Copyright © 1999 ABB Automation Products AB. All rights reserved.

3BSE 008 878R301

3BSE 008 878R301 i

ii 3BSE 008 878R301

3BSE 008 878R301 iii

Chapter 4 - Runtime Operation

iv 3BSE 008 878R301

3BSE 008 878R301 v

Appendix A - General Specification

vi 3BSE 008 878R301

3BSE 008 878R301 vii

viii 3BSE 008 878R301

1.1 General Information

Figure 1-1. S800 I/O Field Communication Interface with an I/O-module on

3BSE 008 878R301 1-1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 FCI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112

I/O Cluster (1-7) I/O Cluster (1-7)

AC 70 Station with S800 I/O AC 70 Station with S800 I/O

Figure 1-2. S800 I/O Overview

1-2 3BSE 008 878R301

I/O Station with S800 I/O

I/O Cluster (1-7)

Other Profibus-DP slave

Figure 1-3. S800 I/O Overview with Fieldbus Profibus-DP

1.2 Equipment Requirements

3BSE 008 878R301 1-3

1.3 Manual Organization

General Site Planning Design Product Preventive

Figure 1-4. Organization of this Manual

1-4 3BSE 008 878R301

1.4 Related Documentation

3BSE 008 878R301 1-5

1.5 Release History

1-6 3BSE 008 878R301

This is the third release for this product. It includes:

Table 1-1. S800 I/O Terminology

3BSE 008 878R301 1-7

Table 1-1. S800 I/O Terminology (Continued)

1.7 Product Overview

Table 1-2. I/O Station with S800 I/O Components

1-8 3BSE 008 878R301

Table 1-2. I/O Station with S800 I/O Components (Continued)

3BSE 008 878R301 1-9

Table 1-2. I/O Station with S800 I/O Components (Continued)

1-10 3BSE 008 878R301

1.7.1 I/O Station with S800 I/O

3BSE 008 878R301 1-11

2.5 meters (8.2 feet) maximum

2.5 meters (8.2 feet) maximum

1.7.1.1 CI810/CI810A Fieldbus Communication Interface

1-12 3BSE 008 878R301

Figure 1-7. CI810/CI810A FCI Module

3BSE 008 878R301 1-13

84 mm (3.3”) 122 mm (4.8”)

Figure 1-8. CI810 FCI Dimensions

1.7.1.2 CI820 Fieldbus Communication Interface

1-14 3BSE 008 878R301

Electrical ModuleBus LED Status

Label SWX.X/Y Locking

AF 100 Twisted-pair Channel n

Figure 1-9. CI820 FCI Module

3BSE 008 878R301 1-15